Sony DVPCX-875-P Service manual

DVP-CX875P

gy

RMT-D149A

SERVICE MANUAL

SPECIFICATIONS

System

Laser: Semiconductor laser Signal format system: NTSC

Audio characteristics

Frequency resp ons e: DVD VI D EO ( PCM

96 kHz): 2 Hz to 44 kHz (±1.0 dB)/DV D VIDEO (PCM 48 kHz): 2 Hz to 22 kHz (±0.5 dB)/CD: 2 Hz to 20kHz (±0.5dB)

Signal-to-noise ratio (S/N ratio): 115dB

(AUDIO OUTPUT L/R 1/2 jacks only)

Harmonic dis tortion: 0.003 % Dynamic range: DVD V I DE O: 10 3dB/CD:

99 dB

Wow and flutter: Less than detected value

(±0.001% W PEAK)

When you play PCM sound tracks with a 96 kHz sampling frequency, the output signals from the DIGITAL OUTPUT (COAXIAL or OPTIC AL) jack are con verted to 48 kHz sampling frequency.

Outputs

(Jack name: Jack type/Output level/Load

impedance)

AUDIO OUTPUT L/R 1/2: Phono jack/

2Vrms/10 kilohms

DIGITAL OUTPUT (OPTICAL): Optical

output jack/–18 dBm (wave length: 660 nm)

DIGITAL OUTPUT (COAXIAL): Phono

jack/0.5 Vp-p/75 ohms

COMPONENT VIDE O OUTPUT (Y, P

P

R

): Phono jack/Y: 1.0 Vp-p/PB, PR:

interlace = 0.648 Vp-p, progressive =

0.7 Vp-p/75 ohms

VIDEO OUTPUT 1/2: Phono jack/

1.0 Vp-p/75 ohms

S VIDEO OUPUT 1/2: 4-pin mini DIN/

Y: 1.0 Vp-p/C: 0.286 Vp-p /75 ohms

S-LINK (CONTROL S IN): Mini jack

US Model

Canadian Model

General

Power requirements:

120 V AC, 60 Hz

Power consumption: 17 W Dimensions (approx.): 430 × 158 × 415 mm

Mass (approx.): 6.9 kg (15 lb 3 oz) Operating temperature: 5 °C to 35 °C

Operating humidity: 25 % to 80 %

B

,

Supplied accessories

Check that you have the following items:

•Audio/vi d eo cord (pinplug × 3 y pinplug × 3) (1)

•Remote commander (remote) (1)

•Size AA (R6) batteries (2)

Specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

E

NERGY STARR is a U.S. regis tered mark. As an Corporatio n has det ermi ned that this produc t meets the ener

1

(17 × 6 depth) incl. projecting parts

(41

°

F to 95°F)

E

NERGY STARR Partner, Sony

E

efficiency.

3

/

4

× 16

/

8

in.) (width/height/

NERGY STARR guidelines for

CD/DVD PLAYER

SAFETY CHECK-OUT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer:

1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges.

2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are “pinched” or contact high-wattage resistors.

3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.

4. Look for parts which, though functioning, show obvious signs of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.

5. Check the line cord for cracks and abrasion. Recommend the replacement of any such line cord to the customer.

6. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.

7. Check the antenna terminals, metal trim, “metallized” knobs, screws, and all other exposed metal parts for AC leakage. Check leakage as described below.

To Exposed Metal Parts on Set

1.5 k

0.15 µF

Fig. A. Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage.

Ω

Earth Ground

AC voltmeter (0.75 V)

WARNING!!

WHEN SERVICING, DO NO T APPR O A CH THE LASER EXIT WITH THE EYE TOO CLOSELY. IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION, BE SURE TO OBSERVE FROM A DISTANCE OF MORE THAN 25 cm FROM THE SURFACE OF THE OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK.

LEAKAGE TEST

The AC leakage fr om any exposed metal part to earth ground and from all exposed metal parts to any exposed metal part having a return to chassis, must not exceed 0.5 mA (500 microamperes). Leakage current can be measured by any one of three methods.

1. A commer cial leakage tester, such as the Simpson 229 or RCA

WT -540A. Follow the manuf acturers' instructions to use these

instruments.

2. A battery-operated AC milliammeter. The Data Precision 245

digital multimeter is suitable for this job.

3. Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor by means of a

VOM or battery-operated AC voltmeter. The “limit” indica-

tion is 0.75V, so analog meters must have an accurate low-

voltage scale. The Simpson 250 and Sanwa SH-63T rd are ex-

amples of a passive VOM that is suitable. Nearly all battery

operated digital multimeters that have a 2V A C range are suit-

able. (See Fig. A)

Unleaded solder

Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the leadfree mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead. (Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with the lead free mark due to their particular size.)

: LEAD FREE MARK

Unleaded solder has the following characteristics.

• Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than

ordinary solder. Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time. Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to about 350°C. Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!

• Strong viscosity

Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky , less prone to flow) than ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such as on IC pins, etc.

• Usable with ordinary solder

It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may also be added to ordinary solder.

CAUTION:

The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye hazard.

CAUTION

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!

COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMA TIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY.

ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

À LA SÉCURITÉ!

LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFIÉS P AR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈCES SONY DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU DANS LES SUPPLÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

– 2 –

SERVICE NOTE

1. DISASSEMBLY

•This set can be disassembled in the order shown below.

Set

Upper Case

(Page 2-1)

Front Panel Block

Removal

(Page 2-1)

Mechanical Deck

Assembly

(Page 2-1)

Center Guide

Assembly

(Page 2-3)

Mechanical Deck

Block

(Page 2-3)

Optical Pick-Up

(Page 2-3)

Power Block

(Page 2-1)

AV-66 Board

(Page 2-2)

VD-33 Board

(Page 2-2)

MB-107 board

(Page 2-2)

T Driving Block

(Page 2-2)

AI-25 Board

(Page 2-3)

– 5 –

2. CONNECTION OF MB-107 BOARD JIG

VD-33

AV-66

MB-107

J-6090-125-A (29 pin FFC 400 mm) (for MB-107 SIDE B)

AI-25

– 6 –

Precautions

On safety

•Caution – The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard.

•To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not place objects filled with liquids, such as vases, on the apparatus.

•Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet, unplug the player and have it checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further.

On power sources

•The player is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if the player itself has been turned off.

•If you are not going to use the player for a long time, be sure to disconnect the player from the wall outlet. To disconnect the AC power cord, grasp the plug itself; never pull the cord.

•Should the AC power cord need to be changed, have it done at a qualified service shop only.

On placement

•Place the player in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent heat build-up in the player.

•Do not place the player on a soft surface such as a rug that might block the ventilation holes.

•Do not place the player in a location near heat sources, or in a place subject to direct sunlight, excessive dust, or mechanical shock.

On operation

•If the player is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, or is placed in a very damp room, moisture may condense on the lenses inside the player. Should this occur, the player may not operate properly. In this case, remove the disc and leave the player turned on for about half an hour until the moisture evaporates.

•When you move the player, take out any discs. If you don’t, the disc may be damaged.

On adjusting volume

Do not turn up the vo lume while listening to a section with very low level inputs or no audio signals. If you do, the speakers may be damaged when a peak level section is played.

On cleaning

Clean the cabinet, panel, and controls with a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring powder or solvent such as alcohol or benzine.

On cleaning discs

Do not use a commercially availa ble cleaning disc. It may cause a malfunction.

IMPORTANT NOTICE

Caution: This player is capable of holding a still video image or on-screen display image on your television screen indefinitely. If you leave the still video image or on-screen display image displayed on your TV for an extended period of time you risk permanent damage to your television screen. Projection televisions are especially susceptible to this.

On transporting the player

Before transporting the player, follow the procedure below to return the internal mechanisms to their original positions.

1

Remove all the discs from the disc slots.

2

Press OPEN/CLOSE to close the front cover. Make sure that “NO DISC” appears on the front panel display.

3

Wait for 10 seconds, then press ?/1 to turn off the player. The player enters standby mode and the power indicator lights up in red.

4

Disconnect the AC power cord.

If you have any questions or problems concerning your player, please consult your nearest Sony dealer.

SECTION 1

GENERAL

DVP-CX875P

This section is extracted from instruction manual (3-077-145-11).

Example of discs that the player cannot play

The player cannot play the following discs:

•All CD-ROMs (including PHOTO CDs)/ CD-Rs/CD-RWs other than those recorded in the following formats: –music CD format –video CD format –MP3 format that conforms to ISO9660*

Level 1/Level 2, or its extended format, Joliet

•Data part of CD-Extras

•DVD-ROMs

•DVD Audio discs

•HD layer on Super Audio CDs

*A logical format of files and folders on CD-

ROMs defined by ISO (International Standard Organization).

Also, the player cannot play the following discs:

•A DVD VIDEO with a different region code.

•A disc recorded in a color system other than NTSC, such as PAL or SECAM (this player conforms to the NTSC color system).

•A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g., card, heart).

•A disc with paper or stickers on it.

•A disc that has the adhesive of cellophane tape or a sticker still left on it.

Note

Some DVD-Rs, DVD-RWs, CD-Rs, or CD-RWs cannot be played on this player due to the recording quality or physical condition of the disc, or the characteristics of the recording device. Also, images in DVD-RW discs with CPRM* protect ion may not be played if they contain a copy protection signal. “Copyright lock” appears on the screen. For more information, see the operating instructions for the recording device. Note that discs created in the Packet Write format cannot be played. *CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable

Media) is a coding technology that protects copyright for images.

Note on playback operations of DVDs and VIDEO CDs

Some playback operations of DVDs and VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by software producers. Since this player plays DVDs and VIDEO CDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features m ay not be available. Also, refer to the instructions supplied with the DVDs or VIDEO CDs.

Copyrights

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents, other intellectual property righ ts owned by Macrovision Corporation, and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

3

Notes about the Discs

•To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its edge. Do not touch the surface.

•Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the temperature may rise considerably inside the car.

•After playing, store the disc in its case.

To ensure stable operation

• If the front cover automatically opens and “C32” appears in the front panel display (page 98), it may be because burrs remain on the outer edge of the disc, particularly CD discs. In order to ensure stable operation, remove the burrs by rubbing the edge of the disc with the side of a pen or pencil. Check all of the discs in the two slots to the left and right of the center slot, including the center slot.

Burrs

Pen or pencil

•Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the disc from the center out.

•Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners, or anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.

7

8

1-1

Index to Parts and Controls

Ligh

For more information, refer to the pages indicated in parentheses.

Front panel

Front panel display

When playing back a DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW

Disc type

Playing status

ts up when the player outputs

progressi v e signals (91)

All discs mode (45)

Current play mode (45)

Lights up when you can change the angle (74)

Current disc

A [/1 (on/standby) button/indicator (32)

Lights up in green when the power is on and lights up in red when the player is in standby mode.

B (re mote sensor) (17) C PICTURE MODE button (77) D SURROUND button (72) E Front cover (32) F

A

EJECT button (33)

G OPEN/CLOSE button (32) H H (play) button (33) I X (pause) button (35) J EASY PLAY button/indicator (19) K LOAD button/indicator (52) L FLIP button/indicator (36) M x (stop) button (35) N JOG button/indicator (39) O C/X/x/c/ENTER buttons (40) P Click shuttle (38) Q MENU button (40)

Rear panel

A AUDIO OUTPUT L/R 1/2 jacks (25)

(26) (27)

B DIGITAL OUTPUT (COAXIAL) jack

(26) (27) (28)

C DIGITAL OUTPUT (OPTICAL) jack

(26) (27) (28)

R TOP MENU button (40) S

O

RETURN button (36)

T DISPLAY button (13) U ONE/ALL DISCS button (45) V TIME/TEXT button (67) W PROGRAM button (46) X SHUFFLE button (48) Y REPEAT button (49) Z .–/> + (previous/next) dial(35)

wj DISC CHANGE button/indicator (32)

(33) (35) (54)

wk DIRECT SEARCH button/indicator

(35)

wl Front panel display (10) e; EDIT button (58) ea SORT button (61) es FILE button (56) ed FOLDER button (52) ef KEYBOARD jack (60)

D COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT/

SCAN SELECT switch (91)

E COMMAND MODE switch (17) F S-LINK/CONTROL S IN jack (21) G COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT (Y,

P

B

, PR) jacks (21)

H S VIDEO OUTPUT 1/2 jacks (21) I VIDEO OUTPUT 1/2 jacks (21)

Current title and chapter (68)

Current audio signal (71)

Playing time (68)

When playing back a VIDEO CD with Playback Control (PBC) (42)

Lights up when the player outputs progressive signals (91)

Disc type

Current scene (68)

All discs mode (45)

Playing status

Current play mode (45)

Current disc

Playing time (68)

When playing back a CD, DATA CD (MP3 audio), or VIDEO CD (without PBC)

Lights up when the pl ayer outputs progressive si gnals (91)

Disc type

Lights up when playing MP3 audio tracks (43)

9

10

All discs mode (45)

Playing status

Current track (CD,VIDEO CD) or album (DATA CD) (68)

Current play mode (45)

Current index (CD,VIDEO CD) or track (DATA CD) (68)

Current disc

Playing time (68)

Remote

L c / C SEARCH/STEP

buttons (37)

M H PLAY button (33)

The H button has a tactile dot.*

N X PAUSE button (35) O C/X/x/c buttons (40) P DISPLAY/FILE button (13)(56) Q TOP MENU/EDIT button (40)(58) R [/1 (on/standby) button (32) S VOL (volume) + /– buttons (8 5)

The + button has a tactile dot.*

T TV/VIDEO /DISC SKIP + button

(35)(85)

U ENTER button (85) V WIDE MODE/DISC SKIP – button

(35)(85)

W BOOKMARK button (65) X PICTURE MEMORY button (55)(91) Y ANGLE button (74) Z TIME/TEXT button (67)

wj EASY PLAY button (19) wk FLIP button (36) wl FOLDER button (56) e; REPLAY button (35) ea m /M SCAN/SLOW

buttons (38)

es x STOP button (35) ed ENTER button (29) ef O RETURN button (36) (42) (54) eg MENU/SORT button (40) (43) (61)

*Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating

A TV/DISC EXPLORER/DVD switch

(54)(85)

B

Z

OPEN/CLOSE button (35)

C Number buttons (40)

The number 5 button has a tactile dot.*

D CLEAR button (46) E SURROUND button (72) F PICTURE MODE button (77) G SUBTITLE button (75) H AUDIO button (71) I PICTURE NAVI (picture navigation)

button (64)

J REPEAT button (49) K ./> PREV (previous) /NEXT

11

buttons (35)

12

the player.

1-2

Guide to the Control Menu Display

Use the Control Menu to select a function and to view related information. Press DISPLAY repeatedly to turn on or change the Control Menu display as follows:

,

Control Menu display 1

m

Control Menu display 2 (DVD/VIDEO CD/CD only)

m

ADVANCED display (DVD only, see page 69.)

m

Control Menu display off

z Hint

You can skip the ADVANCED display by setting “OFF” under “ADVANCED” in the Control Menu (page

69).

Control Menu

The Control Menu display 1 and 2 will show different items depending on the disc type. For details, please refer to the pages in parentheses.

Example: Control Menu display 1 when playing a DVD VIDEO

Control Menu items

Selected item

Function name of selected Control Menu item

Operation message

*Displays the scene number for VIDEO CDs (PBC is on), track number for VIDEO CDs/CDs, album

number fo r DATA CDs.

**Displays the index number for VIDEO CDs/CDs, MP3 audio track number for DATA CDs.

SUBTITLE Select: Cancel:

Currently playing disc number Currently playing title number* Currently playi ng chapter number**

Selected folder

ALL

1 2 3

)

1 2 ( 2 7

)

1 8 ( 3 4 T

1 : 3 2 : 5 5

OFF OFF 1: ENGLISH 2: FRENCH 3: SPANISH

ENTER RETURN

Playback status (N Playback, X Pause, x Stop, etc.)

PLAY DVD

Type of disc being

played back Total number of titles* Total number of chapters** Playing time

Current settin g Options

List of Control Menu Items

Item Item Name, Function, R elevant Disc Type

DISC (page 63)

Selects th e disc to be played .

TITLE (page 63)/S CENE (page 63)/TRACK (page 63)

Selects the tit le, scene, or track to be played.

CHAPTER (page 63)/INDEX (page 63)

Selects the chapter or index to be played.

ALBUM (page 63)

Selects the album to be played.

TRACK (page 63)

Selects the tra ck to be played.

INDEX (page 63)

Selects the index to be played.

ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST (pa ge 41)

Selects the type of titles (DVD-RW) to be played, the ORIGINAL one, or an edited PLAY LIST .

TIME/MEMO (page 63)

Checks the elapsed time and the remaining playback time. Use to input the time code when searching for a scene or music. Displays the Disc Memo you entered in the edit mode of the Disc Explorer function.

TIME/TEXT (page 6 3)

Checks the elapsed time and the remaining playback time. Use to input the time code when searching for a scene or music. Displays the DVD/CD text or the DATA CD’s track name.

AUDIO (page 71)

Changes the audio setting.

SUBTITLE (page 75)

Displays the subtitles. Changes the subt itle language.

ANGLE (page 74)

Changes the angle.

TVS (page 72)

Selects the surrou nd functions.

ADVANCED (page 69)

Displays the information (bit rate or layer) of the disc currently play ing.

PARENTAL CONTROL (page 80)

Set to prohib it playback on this pl ayer.

c

continued

SETUP (page 88)

QUICK Setup Use Quick Setup to choose the desired language of the on-screen display, the aspect ratio of the TV , and the audio output s ettings. CUSTOM Setup In addition to the Quick Setup se tting, you can adjust other various settings. RESET Returns the se ttings in “SETUP” to the d efault setting.

ALL DISCS/ONE DISC (page 45)

Selects All Discs or One Disc mode.

PROGRAM (page 46)

Selects the disc, title, chapter, or t rack to play in the ord er you want.

SHUFFLE (page 48)

Plays the disc , title, chapter, or tra ck in random order.

REPEAT (page 49)

Plays the entire disc (all t itles/all tracks/all albu ms) repeatedly or one tit le/chapter/ track/album repeatedly.

A-B REPEAT (page 50)

Specifies t he parts you want to play repeatedly.

BNR (page 76)

Adjusts the picture quality by reducing the “block noise” or mosaic like patterns that appear on your TV screen.

CUSTOM PICTURE MODE (page 77)

Adjusts the video signal from the player. You can select the picture quality that best suits the program you are watching.

DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER (page 78)

Exaggerates the outline of the image to produce a sharper picture.

PICTURE NAVIGATION (page 64)

Divides the screen into 9 subscreens to help you find the scene you want quickly.

13

14

Simple Start Guide

Quick Overview

A quick overview presented in this guide will give you enough inform ation to start using the player for your enjoym ent. To use the surround sound features of this player, refer to “Hookups” on page 21.

Notes

•You cannot connect this player to a TV that does not have a video input jack.

•Be sure to disconnect the power of each component before connecting.

Step 1: Unpacking

Check that you have the following items:

•Audio/video cord (pinplug × 3 y pinplug × 3) (1)

•Remote commander (remote) (1)

•Size AA (R6) batteries (2)

z Hint

The Control Menu icon indicator lights up in green when you select any item except “OFF.” (“TVS,” “PROGRAM,” “SHUFFLE,” “REPEAT,” “A-B REPEAT,” “BNR,” “DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER” only). The “ANGLE” indicator lights up in green only when the angles can be changed. The “CUSTOM PICTURE MODE” indicator lights up in green when any setting other than “STANDARD” is selected.The “PICTURE NAVIGATION” indicator lights up in green when a bookmark of the disc is set in the player’s memory.

t

15

16

1-3

Step 2: Preparing the Remote

You can control the player using the supplied remote. Insert two Size AA (R6) batteries by matching the 3 and # ends on the batteries to the markings inside the compartment. When using the remote, point it at the remote sensor on the pl ayer.

When you have more than one Sony DVD player

If the supplied remote interferes with your other Sony DVD player, set the command mode for this player and the supplied remote to one that differs from the other Sony DVD player. The default command mode setting for this player and the supplied remote is DVD1.

Step 3: TV Hookups

Connect the supplied audio/video cord and the power cord in the order (1 ~ 3) shown below.

Simple Start Guid e

Be sure to connect the power cord last.

CD/DVD Player

3

Power source

Notes

•Do not leave the remote in an extremely hot o r humid place.

•Do not drop any foreign object into the remote casing, particular ly when replacing the batteries.

•Do not expose the remote s ensor to direct light from the sun or a lighting apparatus. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

•If you do not use the remote for an extended period of time, remove the batteries to avoid possible d amage from battery leakage and corrosion.

1

Slide the COMMAND MODE switch on the remote to select the command mode (DVD 1, DVD 2, or DVD 3) so that the setting for the remote differs from the other DVD players. For example, if other DVD players respond to the default command mode setting for the supplied remote (DVD 1), set the remote to DVD 2 or DVD 3.

2

Slide the COMMAND MODE switch on the rear of the player so it matches that of the supplied remote.

Step 4: Playing a Disc (Easy Play)

Aside from the slots with a capacity for 300 discs, this player has an EASY PLAY slot for immediate playing. The EASY PLAY disc is numbered 301. When you use the Program Play or the Disc Explorer function, or Search for a disc by slot number, enter the disc in the EASY PLAY slot as disc number 301.

With the playback side facing left

Front cover

to video input

to audio input

to AUDIO OUTPUT L/R 1 or 2

TV

2

z Hint

When connecting to a monaural TV, use a stereomono conversion cord (not supplied). Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack on the player to the TV’s video input jack, and connect the AUDIO OUTPUT L/R 1/2 jacks to the TV’s audio input jack.

Power source

to VIDEO OUTPUT 1 or 2

1

Audio/video

cord (supplied)

l : Signal flow

To change the aspect ratio for the connected TV

Depending on the disc and the TV type (standard 4:3 screen TV or wide screen TV), the image may not fit the TV screen. If this happens, change the aspect ratio (page

90).

When connecting to a TV that accepts progressive (480p) format signal

You need to use the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks to view progressive signals. Hook up your TV using pattern C on page 21, and then run Quick Setup on page 29.

17

Simple Start Guid e

18

To remove the disc

1

Press OPEN/CLOSE. The front cover opens.

2

Press EASY PLAY. The EASY PLAY slot comes to the loading position.

3

Press A EJECT. The loading guide rises so that you can remove the disc easily.

4

Remove the disc.

To turn off the player

Press [/1. The player enters standby mode and the power indicator lights up in red.

z Hints

•To play discs in the other slots, see “Inserting Discs” o n page 32 and “Playing Discs” on page 33.

• If you use a Sony 8cm CD adaptor (not supplied), you can play 8cm (3-inch) CDs with the EAS Y PLAY slot.

Note

Do not insert an empty 8 cm (3-inch) CD adaptor. It may damage the player.

1

Turn on the TV.

2

Press [/1.

3

Switch the input selector on your TV so that the signal from the player appears on the TV screen.

4

Press EASY PLAY.

The EASY PLAY indicator lights up and the EASY PLAY slot comes to the loading position. Then, the front cover opens.

5

Insert the disc.

6

Press EASY PLAY again.

The front cover closes and the EASY PLAY disc starts. “EZ” appears in the front panel display.

After Step 6

Depending on the disc, a menu may be displayed on the TV screen. If so, select the item you want from the menu and play the DVD VIDEO (page 40) or VIDEO CD disc (page 42).

To stop playing

Press x.

c

continued

19

20

1-4

Hookups

Hooking Up the Player

Follow Steps 1 to 4 to hook up and adjust the settings of the player. Before you start, disconnect the power cords, check that you have all of the supplied accessories, and insert the batteries into the remote (page 17).

Notes

•Plug cords securely to prevent unwanted noise.

•Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected.

Step 1: Connecting the Video Cords

Connect this player to your TV monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver) using a video cord. Select one of the patterns A through C, according to the input jack on your TV monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver).

Component

(green)

video cord (not supplied)

TV, projector or AV amplifier (receiver)

to COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT

(red)(blue)

(green) (blue)

(red)

(yellow)

TV, projector or AV amplifier (receiver)

to VIDEO OUTPUT 1 or 2

(yellow)

CD/DVD player

Audio/video cord (supplied )

A If you are connecting to a video input jack

Connect the yellow plug of the audio/video cord (supplied) to the yellow (video) jacks. You will enjoy standard quality images.

Hookups

Use the red and white plugs to connect to the audio input jacks (page 25). (Do this if you are connecting to a TV only.)

Yellow (Video)

White (L) Red (R)

Yellow (Video) White (L) Red (R)

B If you are connecting to an S VIDEO input jack

Connect an S VIDEO cord (not supplied). Y ou will enjoy high quality images.

C If you are connecting to a monitor, projector, or AV amplifier

B/PR

Green Blue Red

)

(receiver) having component video input jacks (Y/P

Connect the component via the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks using a component video cord (not supplied) or three video cords (not supplied) of the same kind and length. You will enjoy accurate color reproduction and high quality images. If your TV accepts progressive (480p) format signals, you must use this connection and set “COMPONENT OUT” to “PROGRESSIVE” in “SCREEN SETUP” (page 91).

Green Blue Red

If your TV or video component has an S-LINK (CONTROL S) connector

You can control the player by pointing the remote at the remote sensor on the TV or video component. This feature is convenient when you placed the player and the TV or video component away from each other. Connect the TV or video component via the S-LINK/CONTROL S jack using the S-link (control S) cord (not supplied). Refer to the instructions supplied with the component to be connected.

VCR

Connect directly

to S-LINK/ CONTROL S IN (page 22)

S-link (control S) cord (not supplied)

TV

TV or video component with S-LINK (CONTROL S) jack

c

continued

to S VIDEO OUTPUT 1 or 2

CD/DVD player

S VIDEO cord (not supplied)

TV, projector or AV amplifier (receiver)

l : Signal flow

Notes

•Connect the player directly to the TV. If you pass the player signals via the VCR, you may not receive a clear image on the TV screen.

•Consumers should note that not all high definition television sets are fully com patible with this product and may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In the case of 480 progressive scan picture problems, it is recommended that you switches the connection to the standard definition output. If there are questions regarding your Sony TV set’s compatibility with this model 480p DVD player, please contact our customer service center.

21

22

Step 2: Connecting the Audio Cords

Refer to the chart below to select the connection that best suits your system. Be sure to also read

Hookups

the instructions for the components you wish to connect.

Select a connection

Select one of the following connections, through .

Components to be connected Connection Your setup

TV

•Surround effects: TVS DYNAMIC (page 73), TVS WIDE (p age 73)

Stereo amplifier (receiver)

•Surround effects: TVS STANDARD (page 7 3)

or

MD deck/DAT deck

•Surround effects: none

AV amplifier (receiver) having a Dolby* Surround (Pro Logic) decoder and 3 to 6 speakers

•Surround effects: Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) (page 94)

and two speakers

A D

A

B

C

(page 25) Exampl e

(page 26) Exampl e

(page 27) Exampl e

AV amplifier (receiver) with a digital input jack having a Dolby Digital or DTS** decoder and 6 speakers

•Surround effects: Dolby Digital (5.1ch) (page 94), DTS (5.1ch) (page 95)

* Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro Logic,” and the double-D sy mbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

**“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are trademarks of

Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

23

24

(page 28) Exampl e

D

1-5

A

l

Connecting to your TV

This connection will use your TV speakers for sound.

CD/DVD player

Connecting to a stereo ampl ifier (re ceiv er) an d 2 speak ers/ Connec ting to

B

an MD deck or DAT deck

If the stereo amplifier (receiver) has audio input jacks L and R only, use . If the amplifier

Hookups

(receiver) has a digital input jack, or when connecting to an MD deck or DAT deck, use . In this case, you can also connect the player directly to the MD deck or DAT deck without using your stereo amplifier (receiver).

CD/DVD player

B-1

B-2

to audio input

TV

c

continued

(white)

(red)

(yellow)*

Audio/video cord (supplied)

to AUDIO OUTPUT

l : Signal flow

*The yellow plug is used for video signals (page

21).

z Hint

When connecting to a monaural TV, use a stereomono conversion cord (not supplied). Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT L/R 1 or 2 jacks to the TV’s audio input jack.

C

Connecting to an AV amplifier (receiver) having a Dolby Surround (Pro

L/R 1 or 2

(white)

(red)

(yellow)

Logic) decoder and 3 to 6 speakers

You can enjoy the Dolby Surround effects only when playing Dolby Surround audio or multichannel audio (Dolby D igital) discs. If your amplifier (receiver) has L and R audio input jacks only, use . If your amplifier (receiver) has a digital inp ut jack, use .

CD/DVD player

C-2

C-1

Stereo audi o c o rd (not supplied)

(white)

(red)

to AUDIO OUTPUT L/R 1 or 2

(red)

to audio input to coaxial or optical

[Speakers]

Front (L)

Front (R)

: Signal flow

z Hint

B-1

In connection audio/video cord instead of using a separate stereo audio cord.

25

26

D

, you can use the supplied

Connecting to an AV ampl ifier (receiver) with a digital input jack having

Stereo amplifier (receiver)

Coaxial digital cord (not supplied)

or

Optical digital cord (not supplied)

digital input

MD deck/DAT deck

Note

Remove jack cap before co nnecting.

B-2

(white)

If you select one of the TVS effects (page 72) while playing a disc, no sound will come from your speakers with the connection.

to DIGITAL OUTPUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)

a Dolby Digital, or DTS decoder and 6 speakers

This connection will allow you to use the Dolby Digital, or DTS decoder function of your AV

Hookups

amplifier (receiver). The surround sound effects of this player will be disabled with this connection.

CD/DVD player

Stereo audio cor d (no t supplied)

(white)

(red)

to AUDIO OUTPUT L/R 1 or 2

(red)

(white)

to audio input

[Speakers]

Rear (R)

Rear (L)

l: Signal flow

Note

When connecting 6 speakers, replace the monaural rear speaker with a center speaker, 2 rear speakers and a subwoofer.

Subwoofer

Amplifier (receiver) with Dolby Surround decoder

Center

Coaxial digital cord (not supplied)

or

to DIGITAL OUTPUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)

Optical digital cord (not supplied) Remove jack cap before connecting.

to coaxial or optical digital input

[Speakers]

Front (L)

Front (R)

Rear (mono)

c

continued

to DIGITAL OUTPUT (COAXIAL)

Coaxial digital cord (not supplied)

to coaxial digital input

[Speakers]

Rear (L)

Subwoofer

Rear (R)

l: Signal flow

Note

After you have completed the connection, be sure to set “DOLBY DIGITAL” to “DOLBY DIGITAL”

27

and “DTS” to “ON” in Quick Setup (page 29).

28

AV amplifier (receiver) having a decoder

to DIGITAL OUTPUT (OPTICAL)

or

to optical digital input

Optical digital cord (not supplied) Remove jack cap before connecting.

Front (L)

[Speakers]

Center

Front (R)

1-6

Step 3: Connecting the Power Cord

Plug the player’s and the TV’s power cords into an AC outlet.

Step 4: Quick Setup

Follow the steps below to make the minimum number of basic adjustments for using the player. To skip an adjustment, press >. To ret urn to the previous adjustment, press .. The on-screen display differs depending on the player model.

4

Press ENTER.

The Setup Display for selecting the language used in the on-screen display appears.

1

Turn on the TV.

2

Press [/1.

3

Switch the input selector on your TV so that the signal from the player appears on the TV screen.

“Press [ENTER] to run QUICK SETUP.” appears at the bottom of the screen. If this message does not appear, select “QUICK” under “SETUP” in the Control Menu to run Quick Se tup (page 89).

LANGUAGE SETUP

OSD: MENU: AUDIO: SUBTITLE:

5

Press X/x to select a language.

The player uses the language selected here to display the menu and subtitles as well.

6

Press ENTER.

The Setup Display for selecting the aspect ratio of the TV to be connected appears.

SCREEN SETUP

TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND:

STARTUP SCREEN: COMPONENT OUT: MODE:

ENGLISH ENGLISH

FRENCH

SPANISH

PORTUGUESE

4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 LETTER BOX

4:3 PAN SCAN

16:9

INTERLACE

AUTO

7

Press X/x to select th e setting th at matches your TV type.

◆ If you have a 4:3 standard TV

•4:3 LETTER BOX or 4:3 PAN SCAN

Hookups

(page 90)

◆ If you have a wide-screen TV or a 4:3 standard TV with a wide-screen mode

•16:9 (page 90)

8

Press ENTER.

The Setup Display for selecting the type of video signal appears.

SCREEN SETUP

TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: STARTUP SCREEN: COMPONENT OUT: MODE:

4:3 LETTER BOX

JACKET PICTURE

STANDARD INTERLACE

INTERLACE

PROGRESSIVE

ON

connect to an amplifier (receiver), then press ENTER.

Choose the item that matches the audio connection you selected on pages 25 to 28 ( through ).

A

•If you connect just a TV and nothing else, sel ect “NO.” Quick Setup is finished and connections are complete.

B-1

•Select “AUDIO OUTPUT L/R.” Quick Setup is finished and connections are complete.

B-2 C-2

•Select “DIGITAL OUTP UT.” The Setup Display for “DOLBY DIGITAL” appe ars.

12

Press X/x to select the type of

D

C-1

D

Dolby Digital signal you wish to send to your amplifier (receiver).

9

Press X/x to select the type of signals you wish to output to your TV.

Select “PROGRESSIV E” only if you have made video connection C (page 21 ) and wish to view progressive video signals.

◆ If you have an Interlace format TV (standard TV)

•INTERLACE (page 91)

◆ If you have a Progressive format TV

•

PROGRESSIVE

10

Press ENTER.

The Setup Display for selecting the type of jack used to connect your amplifier (receiver) appears.

11

Press X/x to select the type of

(page 91)

Is this player connected to an amplifier (receiver) ? Select the type of jack you are using.

YES

AUDIO OUTPUT L/R DIGITAL OUTPUT

NO

jack (if any) you are using to

Choose the signal that matches the audio connection you selected on pages 26 to 28 ( through ).

B D

AUDIO SETUP

AUDIO ATT: AUDIO DRC: DOWNMIX: DIGITAL OUT:

DOLBY DIGITAL: DTS:

B-2 C-2

•D-PCM (page 94)

D

•DOLBY DIGITAL (only if the amplifier (receiver) has a Dolby Digital decoder) (page 94)

13

Press ENTER.

“DTS” is selected.

AUDIO SETUP

AUDIO ATT: AUDIO DRC: DOWNMIX: DIGITAL OUT:

DOLBY DIGITAL: DTS:

STANDARD

DOLBY SURROUND

DOLBY DIGITAL

STANDARD

DOLBY SURROUND

OFF

D-PCM D-PCM

OFF

D-PCM

OFF OFF

ON

14

Press X/x to select whether or

not you wish to send a DTS signal to your amplifier (receiver).

Choose the item that matches the audio connection you selected on pages 26 to 28 ( through ).

B D

B-2 C-2

•OFF (page 95)

D

•ON (only if the amplifier (receiver) has a DTS decoder) (page 95)

15

Press ENTER.

Quick Setup is finished. All connections and setup operations are complete.

Enjoying the surround sound effects

To enjoy the surround sound effects of this player or your amplifier (receiver), set the following items as described below for the audio connection you selected on pages 26 to 28 ( through ). Each of these is the

B D

default setting and does not need to be adjusted when you first connect the player. Refer to page 88 for using the Setup Display.

Audio Connection (pages 25 t o 28)

A

•No additional settings are needed.

C-1

B-1

•Set “DOWNMIX” to “DOLBY SURROUND” (page 94).

•If the sound distorts even when the volume is turned down, set “AUDIO ATT” to “ON” (page 93).

B-2 C-2 D

•Set “DOWNMIX” to “DOLBY SURROUND” (page 94).

•Set “DIGITAL OUT” to “ON” (page 94).

c

continued

29

Hookups

31

30

Playing Discs

Inserting Discs

You can insert up to 300 discs into the disc slots in this player, not counting the EASY PLAY slot.

Front cover

.–/>+ dial

1

Press

[/1

.

The player turns on.

2

Press OPEN/CLOSE.

The front cover opens.

3

Press DISC CHANGE.

The DISC CHANGE indicator lights up.

4

Turn the .–/>+ dial until y ou find the disc slot where you want to insert a disc, while checking the disc slot number indicated on the front panel display or by the slot.

Disc slot number Disc slot at the loading posit i on

5

Insert a disc.

Gently place the disc all the way into the slot and do not release the disc until it is completely seated. Make sure you have

32

inserted the disc into each slot at a right angle to the rotary table. If the disc is not put in straight, it may damage the player or the disc.

With the playback side facing left

6

Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to insert more discs.

7

Press OPEN/CLOSE.

The front cover closes. The rotary table turns and the disc slot at the loading position is set to the playing position.

z Hints

•In Step 4, you can select a disc slot number by skipping 10 slots. After sliding the TV/DISC EXPLORER/DVD switch to DISC EXPLORER or DVD, press DISC SKIP +/– on the remote. 10 disc slots each befor e or after from the cu rrent disc slot nu mber will be skip ped.

• If you use a Sony 8 cm CD adaptor (not supplied), you can pl ay 8cm (3-inch) CDs with the EASY PLAY slot (page 19).

Notes

•Do not turn the turntable by hand.

•Do not reach inside of the turntable compar tment. Always follo w the correct steps for inserting and removing discs.

•When transporting the player, remove all discs from the player. Failure to remove the discs may cause damage to the player.

•When closing the front cover, be careful not to let anything get caught between the door and the player.

1-7

Removing discs

.–/>+ dial

1

Press OPEN/CLOSE.

2

Press DISC CHANGE.

3

Turn the .–/>+ dial until you find the disc you want to remove, while checking the disc slot numb er indicated on the front panel display or by the slot.

4

Press A EJECT. The loading guide rises so that you can remove the disc easily.

Loading guide

5

Remove the disc.

6

Repeat Steps 3 to 5 to remove other discs.

7

Press OPEN/CLOSE. The front cover closes.

z Hint

If you want to replace a disc in Step 5, wait a few seconds until the loading guide goes down befor e inserting the disc.

Note

The loading guide automatically goes down when you make another operation.

Playing Discs

Depending on the disc, some operations may be different or restricted. Refer to the operating instructions supplied with your disc.

Power indicator

.–/>+dial

1

Turn on your TV.

2

Press [/1.

The player turns on and the power indicator lights up in green.

3

Switch the input selector on your TV so that the signal from the player appears on the TV screen.

◆ When using an amplifier (receiver)

Turn on the amplifier (receiver) and select the appropriate channel so that you can hear sound from the player.

4

Press H.

The player starts playing the selected disc. Adjust the volume on the TV or the amplifier (receiver). Depending on the disc, a menu may appear on the TV screen. For DVD VIDEOs, see page 40. Fo r VIDEO CDs,

Playing Di scs

see page 42.

To change the disc

Press DISC CHANGE to turn the indicator on. Then turn the .–/>+ dial until the desired disc number appears on the front panel display. Press the .–/>+ dial to start playback.

To turn off the player

Press [/1. The player enters standby mode.

z Hints

•You can have the player turn off automatically whenever you leave it in stop mode for more than 30 minutes. To turn on this function, set “AUTO POWER OFF” in “C USTOM SETUP” to “ON” (page 92).

•For details on the types of MP3 audio tracks that you can play on this player or on their playback order, see “Selecting and Playing an MP3 Audio Track” on page 43.

•When you want to play a certain disc immediately, place it in the EASY PLAY slot (page 19).

•You can view and select to play a disc from a list of all the discs inserted in the player displayed on a TV screen. For details, see “Displaying the Disc Information ” (page 52).

Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a CD

•When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive noise will be heard from the analog stereo jacks. To avoid possible damage to the audio system, the consumer should take proper precautions when the analog stereo jacks of the player are connected to an amplification system. To enjoy DTS Digital Surround™ playback, an external 5.1-channel decoder system must be connected to the digital jack of the player.

•Set the sound to “STEREO” using the AUDIO button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD (page 71).

•Do not play DTS sound tracks without first connecting the player to an audio component having a built-in DTS decoder. The player outputs the DTS signal via the DIGITAL OUTPUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) j ack even if “DTS” in “AUDIO SETUP” is set to “OFF” in the Setup Display (page 95), and may affect your ears or damage your speakers.

Notes on playing DVD VIDEOs with a DTS sound track

•DTS audio signals are output only through the DIGITAL OUTPUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) j ack.

•When you play a DVD VIDEO with DTS sound tracks, set “DTS” to “ON” in “AUDIO SETUP” (page 95).

•If you connect the player to audio equipment without a DTS decoder, do not set “DTS” to “ON” in “AUDIO SETUP” (page 95). The speaker may generate a loud noise, affecting your ears or damaging your speakers.

Additional operations

.–/>+ dial

To Operation

Select a disc On the player:

Press DISC CHANGE to turn the indicator on. Then turn the .–/>+ dial until the desired disc number appears on the front panel display. Press the .–/ >+ dial t o start playback.

c

continued

To Operation

Skip empty disc slots After sliding the TV/

Stop Press x Pause Press X

Resume play after pause

Go to th e next chapter, track, or scene in continuous play mode

Go back to the previous chapter, track, or scene in continuous play mode

Stop play and remove the disc

Replay the previous scene (DVD VIDEO only)

z Hint

The Replay function is useful when you want to review a scene or dialog that you missed.

Note

You may not be able to use the Replay function with some scenes.

DISC EXPLORER/ DVD switch to DISC EXPLORER or DVD, press DISC SKIP +/– on the remote.

Press X or H

On the player:

Press DIRECT SEARCH to turn the indicator on. Then turn the .–/>+ dial clockwise.

On the remote:

Press >

On the player:

Press DIRECT SEARCH to turn the indicator on. Then turn the .–/>+ dial counterclockwise.

On the remote:

Press .

On the player:

Press OPEN/CLOSE, followed by AEJECT.

On the remote:

Press ZOPEN/ CLOSE, followed by AEJECT on the player.

Press REPLAY

33

Playing Di scs

34

Locking the front cover (Child Lock)

You can lock the front cover to prevent children from opening it.

When the player is in standby mode, press O RETURN, ENTER, and then [/1 on the remote.

The player turns on and “LO CKED” appears on the front panel display. The OPEN/CLOSE and EASY PLAY buttons on the player and the Z and EASY PLAY buttons on the remote do not work while the Child Lock is set.

To unlock the front cover

When the player is in standby mode, press O RETURN, ENTER, and then [/1 again.

Note

Even if you select “RESET” under “SETUP” in the Control Menu (page 89), the front cover remains locked.

Playing Side B

You can play side B without ejecting the disc to turn it over. “Side B” is the side facing right when you insert the disc into the sl ot.

Press FLIP.

While side B is being played, appears on the TV.

(Flip)

PLAY DVD

35

36

1-8

To return to side A

Press FLIP again.

z Hints

•You can also flip the disc by pressing the FLIP button on the player.

•Once a disc has been flipped, appears in the Disc Explorer (except for DV D-RWs).

ALL DVD CD A B C D

Super Car Chase

1 2

For more infor mation about the Disc Explorer, see page 52.

Notes

•Playback does not continue from side A to side B.

•Side B contents are not played even if you select the “ALL DISCS” mode.

•Program Play, Repeat Play, Bookmark, Disc Explorer, or Shu ffle Play cannot be set with side B contents.

•Playback Memory settings are not effective for side B.

•When you flip the disc, Program Play, Repeat Play, and Shuffle Play settings for side A are cancelled.

Action DVD

CD

Searching for a Particular Point on a

(Search, Scan, Slow-motion

Disc

Play, Freeze Frame)

You can quickly locate a particular point on a disc by monitoring the picture or playing back slowly.

Note

Depending on the DVD/VIDEO CD, you may not be able to do some of the operations described.

Locating a point quickly (Search)

During playback, keep pressing C to locate a point in the playback direction at the “FF1M”* speed or keep pressing c to locate a point in the opposite direction at the “FR1m”* speed. When you find the point you want, release the button to return to normal playback speed. The “FF1M”/“FR1m” playback speed is the same as the scan speed and click shuttle speed described on page 38.

Locating a point quickly by playing a disc in fast forward or fast reverse (Scan)

Press m or M while playing a disc. When you find the point you want, press

Playing Di scs

H to return to normal speed. Each time you press m or M during scan, the playback speed changes. Three speeds are available. With each press the indication changes as follows:

Playback direction

×2B (DVD VIDEO/CD only)

r

FF1M

r

FF2M

Opposite direction

×2b (DVD VIDEO only)

r

FR1m

r

FR2m

The “

×2B”/“×2b” playback speed is about

twice the normal speed. The “FF2M”/ “FR2m” playback speed is faster than “FF1M”/“FR1m.”

Watching frame by frame (Slowmotion play)

You can use this function only for DVDs or VIDEO CDs. Press m or M when the player is in pause mode. To return to the normal speed, press H. Each time you press m or M during Slow-motion play, the playback speed changes. Two speeds are available. With each press the indication changes as follows:

Playback direction

SLOW2 y SLO W1

Opposite direction (DVD only)

SLOW2 y SLOW1

The “SLOW2 y”/“SLOW2 ” playback speed is slower than “SLOW1 y”/“SLOW1

.”

37

38

Playing one frame at a time (Freeze Frame)

You can use this function only for DVDs or VIDEO CDs. When the player is in the pause mode, press C to go to the next frame. Press c to go to the preceding frame (DVD only). If you hold the button down, you can view the frames in succession. To return to normal playback, press H.

Using the click shuttle on the player (Shuttle mode)

Click shuttle

Turn the click shuttle on the player. The playback speed changes depending on the turning direction and degree of rotation as follows:

During playback

FF2M Fast forw ard (faster than “FF1M”)

Y

FF1M Fast forward

Y

×2B (DVD VIDEO/CD only)

Y

PLAYN

Y

×2b (DVD VIDEO only)

Y

FR1m Fast reverse

Y

FR2m Fast reverse (faster than “FF1m”)

If you turn the click shuttle quickly, the playback speed goes to “FF2M” or “FR2m” at once.

During pause mode (DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW/ VIDEO CD only)

SLOW1 Slow (playback direction)

Y

SLOW2 Slow (playback direction – slower than “SLOW1 ”)

Y

PAUSEX Pause

Y

SLOW2 Slow (opposite direction – slower than “SLOW1 ”) (DVD only)

Y

SLOW1 Slow (opposite direction) (DVD only)

To return to continuous play

Press H.

To manually play the disc frame by frame using the click shuttle (Jog mode)

1

Press JOG.

The player ente rs the paus e mode.

2

Turn the click shuttle.

Depending on the turning speed, playback goes to frame-by-frame playback in the direction that the click shuttle is turned. Turn the click shuttle clockwise to go forward, and counter clockwise to rewind (DVD only). If you turn the click shuttle at a constant speed for a while, the playback speed goes to slow or normal.

To return to continuous play

Press H.

To turn off the Jog mode

Press JOG again so that the indicator turns off.

Resuming Playback from the Point Where You Stopped the Disc

Play/Multi-disc Resume)

The player remembers the point where you stopped the disc.

Resuming playback for the current disc (Resume Play)

The player remembers the point where you stopped the disc even if the player enters standby mode by pressing [/1.

1

While playing a disc, press x to stop playback.

“RESUME” appears on the front panel display.

2

Press H.

The player starts playback from the point where you stopped the disc in Step 1.

z Hint

To play from the beginning of the disc, press x twice, then press H.

(Resume

Notes

•The point where you stopped playing is cleared when:

–you change the play mode. –you change the settings o n the Setup Display. –you open the front cover. –you change the slot. –you disconnect the power cord.

Playing Di scs

•When playing a DAT A CD, the point where you stopped playing is cleared when the player enters standby mode.

•This function is not available for Program Play or Shuffle Play.

•This function may not work with some discs.

Using the DVD’s Menu

A DVD is divided into long sections of a picture or a music feature called “titles.” When you play a DVD which contains several titles, you can select the title you want using the TOP MENU button. When you play DVDs that allow you to select items such as the language for the subtitles and the language for the sound, select these items using the MENU button.

Storing the point where you stopped the disc (Multi-disc Resume)

You can use this function only for discs played in the EASY PLAY slot (page 19). The player stores the point where you stopped the disc and resumes playback from the same point the next time you insert the same disc. The player remembers the stopped point of the disc even after you play other discs in the EASY PLAY slot. Resume playback points for up to 6 different DVD VIDEO/VIDEO CD discs remain in memory even if you disconnect the power cord. When you store a resume playback point for the 7th disc, the resume playback point for the first disc is deleted.

z Hints

•To play from the beginning of the disc, press x twice, then press H.

•To turn off the Multi-disc Resume function, set “MULTI-DISC RESUME” in “CUSTOM SETUP” to “OFF” (page 93). Playback restarts at the resume point on ly for the currently loaded disc.

Notes

•This function is not available when playing side B of double-sided discs.

•This function may not work with some discs.

Number buttons

1

Select a disc (page 35).

2

Press TOP MENU or MENU.

The disc’s menu appears on the TV screen. The contents of the menu vary from disc to disc.

3

Press C/X/x/c or the number buttons to select the item you want to play or change.

4

Press ENTER.

z Hint

You can also display the disc’s menu by pressing the TOP MENU or MENU button on the player.

c

continued

39

40

1-9

Selecting “ORIGINAL” or “PLAY LIST” on a DVDRW Disc

Some DVD-RW discs in VR (Video Recording) mode have two types of titles for playback: originally recorded titles (ORIGINAL) and titles that can be created on recordable DVD players for editing (PLAY LIST). You can select the type of titles to be played.

1

Select a disc (page 35).

2

Press DISPLAY in stop mode.

The Control Menu appears.

3

Press X/x to select (ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST), then press ENTER.

The options for “ORIGINAL/PLAY LIST” appear.

ALL

1 2 3 1 2 ( 2 7 1 8 ( 3 4 PLAY LIST PLAY LIST ORIGINAL

) )

STOP DVD-RW

4

Press X/x to select the setting.

•PLA Y LIST: plays the titles created from “ ORIGINAL.”

•ORIGINAL: plays the titles originally recorded.

5

Press ENTER.

To turn off the Control Menu

Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

Note

Repeat Play and A-B Repeat Play do not work across “ORIGINAL” and “PLAY LIST” titles.

z Hint

Playing VIDEO CDs with PBC Functions

PBC (Playback Control) allows you to play

Playing Di scs

VIDEO CDs interactively by following the menu on the TV screen.

Number buttons

1

Start playing a VIDEO CD with PBC

(PBC Playback)

To play without using PBC, pr ess ./> while the player is stopped to select a track, then press H or ENTER. “Play without PBC.” appears on the TV screen and the player starts continuous play. You cannot play still pictures such as a menu. To return to PBC playback, press x twice then press H.

Note

Depending on the VIDEO CD, “Press ENTER” in Step 3 may appear as “Press SELECT” in the instructions supplied with the disc. In this case, press H.

functions.

A menu appears.

2

Select the item number and track you want using X/x or the number buttons.

3

Press ENTER.

4

Follow the instructions in the menu for interactive operations.

Refer to the instructions supplied with the disc, as the operating procedure may differ depending on the VIDEO CD.

To return to the menu

Press O RETURN.

Selecting and Playing an MP3 Audio Track

You can play back selected tracks on DATA CDs (CD-ROMs/CD-Rs/CD-RWs) recorded in MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer 3) format.

1

Select a disc (page 35).

2

Press MENU.

The list of MP3 albums recorded on the DATA CD appears.

(

)

1

3 0

ROCK BEST HIT KARAOKE JAZZ R&B MY FAVORITE SONGS CLASSICAL SALSA OF CUBA BOSSANOVA

3

Select an album using X/x and press ENTER.

The list of tracks contained in the album appears.

JAZZ

)

1 ( 90

01SHE IS SPECIAL 02ALL YOU NEED IS ... 03SPICY LIFE 04HAPPY HOUR 05RIVER SIDE 06

5

07TAKE TIME,TAKE TIME

4

Select a track using X/x and press ENTER.

The selected track starts playing. When a track or album is being played, its title is shaded.

To go to the next or previous page

Press c or C.

To return to the previous display

Press O RETURN.

To turn off the display

Press MENU.

z Hint

You also can display the lists with the MENU button on the player.

Notes

On playback

•This player can play MP3 audio tracks recorded in the follo wing sampling frequencies: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz.

•The player cannot play audio tracks in MP3PRO format.

• If you put the extension “.MP3” to data not in MP3 format, the player cannot recognize the data properly a nd will generate a loud noise which could damage your speaker system.

•The playback order may be different from the edited order. See “The playback order of MP3 audio tracks” (page 44) for details.

On the list display

•Only the letters in the alphabet and numbers can be used for album or track n ames. Anything e lse is displa yed as “*”.

•ID3 tags cannot be displayed.

41

Playing Di scs

42

About MP3 audio tracks

You can play MP3 audio tracks on CDROMs, CD-Rs, or CD-RWs. However, the discs must be recorded according to ISO9660 level 1, level 2, or Joliet format for the player to recognize the tracks. You can also play discs recorded in Multi Session. See the instructions of the C D-R/RW device or recording software ( not supplied ) for details on the recording format.

To play a Multi Session CD

This player can play Multi Session CDs when an MP3 audio track is located in the first session. Any subsequent MP3 audio tracks, recorded in the later sessions, can also be played back. When audio tracks and images in music CD format or Video CD format are recorded in the first session, only the first session will be played back.

The playback order of MP3 audio tracks

The playback order of albums and tracks recorded on a DATA CD is as follows.

◆Structure of disc contents

Tree 1 Tree 2 Tree 3 Tree 4 Tree 5

ROOT

album

track

When you play a DATA CD from its beginning (page 33), the numbered tracks are played sequentially, from sub-albums/tracks contained within a currently selected album take priority over the next album in the same tree. (Example: C contains D so When you press MENU and the list of MP3 albums appears (page 43), the albums are arranged in the following order: A t B t C t D t F t G. Albums that d o not contain tracks (such as album E) do not appear in the list.

z Hints

• If y ou add numbers (01, 02, 03, etc.) to the front of the track names, the tracks will be played in that order.

•Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start playback, it is recommended that you create the albums no more than two trees.

1

through 7. Any

4

is play ed before 5.)

43

44

1-10

Notes

•Depending on the software you use to create the DATA CD, the playback order may differ from the illustration above.

•The playback order above may not be applicable if there are more than a total of 999 albums and tracks in the DATA CD.

•The player can recognize up to 499 albums (the player will count just albums, including albums that do not contain MP3 audio tracks). The player will not play any albums beyond the first 499 albums. Of the first 499 albums, the player will play no more than a combined total of 999 albums and tracks.

Various Play Mode Functions

Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, A-B Repeat Play)

You can set the following play modes:

•Program Play (page 46)

•Shuffle Play (page 48)

•Repeat Play (page 49)

•A-B Repeat Play (page 50)

Note

The play mode is canceled when: –you open the front cover. –You press [/1 an d the player enters standby

mode.

Selecting the disc mode (One Disc or All Discs)

You can play one disc or all of the discs in the player. Before setting Program Play, Shuffle Play, or Repeat Play, you must select whether to apply these play m odes to one disc or to all of the discs.

1

Press DISPLAY twice (once for DATA CDs) during playback.

The Control Menu appears.

(Program Play,

2

Press X/x to select

(ONE/ALL DISCS) and press

ENTER.

The options for “ONE/ALL DISCS” appear.

)

1 2 ( 2 7

)

1 8 ( 3 4

Playing Di scs

ALL DISCS ALL DISCS ONE DISC

3

Press X/x to select the item.

•ALL DISCS: Continuously plays all discs.

•ONE DISC: Plays the selected disc.

4

Press ENTER.

z Hint

You can also select “ONE/ALL DISCS” by pressing the ONE/ALL DISCS button on the player.

PLAY DVD

or

Creating your own program (Program Play)

You can play the contents of a disc in the order you want by arranging the order of the titles, chapters, or tracks on the disc to create your own program. You can program up to 99 items. By selecting All Discs mode (page 45), you can create a program for all of the discs in the player.

Number buttons

1

Press DISPLAY twice (when playing a CD, press once).

The Control Menu appears.

2

Press X/x to select (PROGRAM), then press ENTER.

The options for “PROGRAM” appear.

)

1 2 ( 2 7

)

1 8 ( 3 4 OFF

OFF SET ON

3

Press X/x to select “ press ENTER.

The display for programming appears.

SET t

PLAY DVD

” then

PROGRAM

– – – : – – – –

ALL CLEAR

1. – – – –

2. – – – –

3. – – – –

4. – – – –

5. – – – –

6. – – – –

4

Press c.

The player is ready to program the first disc.

PROGRAM

– – – : – – – –

ALL CLEAR

1. – – – –

2. – – – –

3. – – – –

4. – – – –

5. – – – –

6. – – – –

5

Select the disc you want to program using the number buttons or X/x, then press ENTER.

The cursor move s to the title or track row “T” (in this case, “01”). To select the EASY PLAY disc, press “301,” then ENTER. “EZ” appears at the disc number.

Disc type

PROGRAM

003

: DVD

ALL CLEAR

1. – – – –

2. – – – –

3. – – – –

4. – – – –

5. – – – –

6. – – – –

Chapters recorded on a disc

“?” appears when the player has not loaded the disc information in the memory. If an empty slot i s l oaded, the disc type does not appear.

ALL

T ALL

ALL

T

ALL

Titles or tracks recorded on a disc

ALL

T

ALL

01 02 03 04 05 06

c

continued

45

6

Select the title, chapter, or track you want to program .

◆ When playing a DVD VIDEO

For example, select chap ter “03” of title “02.” Press X/x or the number buttons to select “02” under “T,” then press ENTER.

PROGRAM

003

: DVD

ALL CLEAR

1. – – – –

2. – – – –

3. – – – –

4. – – – –

5. – – – –

6. – – – –

Next, press X/x or the number buttons to select “03” under “C ,” then press ENTER.

PROGRAM

– – – : – – – –

ALL CLEAR

1. 1D –T02 –C03

2. – – – –

3. – – – –

4. – – – –

5. – – – –

6. – – – –

Selected disc, title and chapter

◆ When playing a VIDEO CD or CD

C

01 02 03 04 05 06

For example, select track “04.” Press X/x or the number b uttons to select “04” under “T,” then press ENTER.

PROGRAM

– – – : – – – –

ALL CLEAR

1. 1D –T02 –C03

1. 10V –T04

3. – – – –

4. – – – –

5. – – – –

6. – – – –

Selected disc and track

7

To program other discs, titles, chapters, or tracks, repeat Steps 3 to

6.

The programmed discs, titles, chapters, and tracks are displayed in the selected order.

ALL

T ALL

01 02 03 04 05 06

ALL

T ALL

ALL

T ALL

Playing Di scs

C

ALL

01 02 03 04 05 06

46

8

Press H to start Program Pla y.

Program Play begins. When the program ends, you can restart the same program again by pressing H.

To stop Program Play

Press CLEAR.

To turn off the display

Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the display is turned off.

To cancel or change a program

1

Follow Steps 1 to 3 of “Creating your own program (Program Play).”

2

Select the program number of the disc, title, chapter, or track you want to cancel or change using X/ buttons.

3

Perform the following.

◆ To cancel the program

Press CLEAR.

◆ To change the program

Press c and follow Step 5 for new programming.

To cancel all the discs, titles, chapters, or tracks in the program

1

Follow Steps 1 through 3 of “Creating your own program (Program Play).”

2

Press X and select “ALL CLEAR.”

3

Press ENTER.

z Hints

•You can set Repeat Play or Shuffle Play for the programmed titles, chapters, or tracks. During Program Play, follow the steps of “Repeat Play” (page 49) or “Shuffle Play” (page 48).

•You can also select “PROGRAM” by pressing the PROGRAM button on the player.

Note

You cannot use this function with DATA CDs and DVD-RWs in VR mode.

x

or the number

Playing in random order (Shuffl e Play)

You can have th e player “shuffle” titles, chapters, or tracks. Subsequent “shuffling” may produce a different playing order. By selecting All Discs mode (page 45), you can shuffle all of the discs in the player.

1

Press DISPLAY twice during playback.

The Control Menu appears.

2

Press X/x to select (

SHUFFLE

), then press ENTER.

The options for “SHUFFLE” appear.

)

1 2 ( 2 7

)

1 8 ( 3 4

OFF OFF DISC TITLE CHAPTER

PLAY DVD

c

continued

47

48

1-11

3

DISC

Press X/x to select the item to be shuffled.

◆ When playing a DVD VIDEO

• DISC*

• TITLE

• CHAPTER

◆ When playing a VIDEO CD or CD

• DISC*

• TRACK

◆ When playing a DVD-RW or DATA CD

• DISC*

◆ When Program Play is activated

• ON: shuffles titles, chapters, or tracks

selected in Program Play.

4

Press ENTER.

*You can select “DISC” in All Discs mode only.

To return to normal play

Press CLEAR, or select “OFF” in Step 3.

z Hints

•You can set Shuffle Play while the player is stopped. After selecting the “SHUFFLE” option, press H. Shuffle Play starts.

•Up to 96 chapters in a disc can be played in random order when “CHAPTER” is selected.

•You can also select “SHUFFLE” by pressing the SHUFFLE button on the player.

Playing repeatedly (Repeat P lay)

You can play all of the titles, albums or tracks on a disc or a single title, chapter, album, or track repeatedly. You can use a combination of Shuffle or Program Play modes. By selecting All Discs mode (page 45), you can repeat all of the discs in the player.

1

Press REPEAT during playback.

The following display appears.

2

Press REPEAT repeatedly to select the item to be repeated.

◆ When playing a DVD VIDEO

• DISC: repeats all of the titles on the

current disc in One Disc mode, or all of the discs in All Discs mode.

• TITLE: repeats the current title on a

disc.

• CHAPTER: repeats the current

chapter .

◆ When playing a DVD-RW

• DISC: repeats all of the titles on the

selected type in One Disc mode, or all of the discs in All Discs mode.

• TITLE: repeats the current title on a

disc.

• CHAPTER: repeats the current

chapter.

Playing Di scs

◆ When playing a VIDEO CD or CD

• DISC: repea ts all of the tracks on the

current disc in One Disc mode, or all of the discs in All Discs mode.

• TRACK: repeats the current track.

◆ When playing a DATA CD (MP3 audio)

• DISC: repeats all of the albums on the

current disc in One Disc mode, or all of the discs in All Discs mode.

• ALBUM: repeats the current album.

• TRACK: repeats the current track.

◆ When Program Play or Shuffle Play is activated

• ON: repeats Program Play or Shuffle

Play.

To return to normal play

Press CLEAR, or select “OFF” in Step 2.

z Hints

•You can set Repeat Play while the player is stopped. After selecting the “REPEAT” option, press H. Repeat Play starts.

•You can also select “REPEAT” by pressing the REPEAT button on the player.

•You can also select “REPEAT” from the Control Menu (page 13).

Repeating a specific portion (AB Repeat Play)

You can play a specific portion of a title, chapter or track repeatedly. (This function is useful when you want to memorize lyrics, etc.)

1

Press DISPLAY twice during playback.

The Control Menu appears.

2

Press X/x to select (A-B REPEAT), then press ENTER.

The options for “A-B REPEAT” appear.

1 2 ( 2 7 1 8 ( 3 4

OFF SET OFF

) )

PLAY DVD

3

Press X/x to select “S ET t,” then press ENTER.

The “A-B REPEAT” setting display appears.

A-B REPEAT

4

During playback, when you find the starting point (point A) of the portion to be played repeatedly, press ENTER.

The starting point (point A) is set.

A-B REPEAT

Set point B with .

5

When you reach the ending point (point B), press ENTER again.

The set points are displayed and the player starts repeating this specific portion.

1 2 ( 2 7 1 8 ( 3 4

ON

Set point A with

) )

ENTER

.

ENTER

CHAPTER

TIME

A: 18 – 1 : 32 : 55

CHAPTER A: 18 – 1 : 32 : 55 B: 18 – 1 : 34 : 30

PLAY DVD

TIME

c

continued

Notes

•When you set A-B Repeat Play, the settings for Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, and Program Play are canceled.

•A-B Repeat Play does not work for titles containing still pictures on a DVD-RW in VR mode.

•A-B Repeat Play does not work across multiple titles ( “ORIGINAL” or “PLAY L IST”) on a DVD-RW in VR mode.

49

Playing Di scs

50

Searching for and Managi ng Discs (Disc Explorer)

Displaying the Disc Information

You can search for a disc by checking the contents of all the discs loaded in the player on the TV screen.

Loading the disc information

Press LOAD when the player is in stop or standby mode.

The player reads the disc information of all the discs and loads it into memory so that the disc type, titles and other text information can be displayed.

To cancel loading

Press x.

z Hint

The player can load the disc information even when the power is in standby mode. Press LOAD before turning on the player.

Displaying the information of the loaded discs

You can look at the loaded disc information on the Disc Explorer. The player has 7 folders (“ALL”, “DVD”, “CD”, “A” to “D”) and can display the Disc Explorer of each folder. All the discs in the player are filed in the “ALL” folder. At the same time, DVDs are automatically filed in the “DVD” folder, and CDs, VIDEO CDs, and DATA CDs are filed in the “CD” folder. You can file your discs as you like in the “A” to “D” folders (page 56).

Press FOLDER.

The Disc Explorer of the “ALL” folder appears.

To return to normal play

Press CLEAR.

To turn off the Control Menu

Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

51

52

1-12

Disc Explorer display ◆ Jacket picture

Disc slot number (“EZ”: Easy Play slot)

Jacket picture Genre

Current folder is highlighted

ALL DVD CD A B C D

Super Car Chase

1 2

Skiing the World

3

Music Madness

4 5

Text information (DVD text, CD text, Disc Memo)

Action

VIDEO CD

The jacket picture recorded on the disc appears automatically. If there is no picture, you can capture one from the disc (page 55).

Current

If there is no jacket picture and you do not

disc

capture one, the genre picture recorded in the memory of the player is displayed if you select a genre.

DVD

◆ Text information (DVD text, CD text or Disc Memo)

CD

The text information (DVD text or CD text)

DVD

recorded on the disc appears automatically. If no text information is recorded, you can store

CD

the text information (Disc Memo) yourself (page 58).

◆ Genre

You can select the genre of the disc yourself

Disc type

(page 60).

◆ Disc type

The disc type, such as DVD, appears automatically. If the slot does not contain a disc, the disc type row is blank.“?” appears when the player has not loaded the disc information in the memory.

z Hint

You can also display the Disc Explorer by pressing the FOLDER button on the player.

Note

Even if you have removed the disc from the player, the disc information of the disc remains on the Disc Explorer until you load the disc information again by pressing LOAD or place a new disc in the same slot and play it.

2

Searching for a disc on the Disc Explorer

.–/>+

dial

Number buttons

Searching for and Managing Discs (Disc Explorer)

1

Press FOLDER repeatedly to select the folder with the disc you want to play.

With each press, the folder indication in the Disc Explorer display changes as follows:

ALL t DVD t CD t A t B t C t D

Select the disc by one of the following operations.

•press

X/x

•after sliding the TV/DISC EXPLORER /DVD switch to DISC EXPLORER or DVD, press the number buttons a nd ENTER

•after sliding the TV/DISC EXPLORER /DVD switch to DISC EXPLORER or DVD, press DISC SKIP +/–

• press DISC CHANGE on the player to turn the indicator on, followed by turning the

.–/>+ dial on the

player a nd then pressing it.

3

Press ENTER.

The Disc Explorer disappears and playback starts.

To turn off t he Disc Explorer

Press ORETURN.

z Hint

When you select the disc with the number buttons in Step 2, yo u can use it to jump through the Disc Explorer display. For example, you can press number button 6 and then press ENTER to view the Disc Explorer for disc slot numbers 6 to 10, then press 11 and ENTER to view the Disc Explorer for the next five disc slots (number 11 to 15).

.

Notes

• If y ou press the FOLDER button during playback, the playback stops and the Disc Explorer appears. In this case, the Resume Play is not available.

• If y ou have inserted a disc whose disc infor mation has not bee n loaded yet, you cannot select and play the dis c on the Disc Explorer. The player skips the disc whose information differs from the loaded disc information, and plays the next loaded disc.

• If y ou load or try to play an empty slot, it appears as a blank in the Disc Explorer. You cannot select this.

•Even if the disc has a jacket picture recorded on it, the jacket picture may not appear on the Disc Explorer.

Capturing a scene for a jacket picture

You can capture your favorite scene in a disc to create a personal jacket picture. A personalized jacket picture will make spotting the disc in the Disc Explorer easier.

1

Select a disc and play it.

2

Slide the TV/DISC EXPLORER/DVD switch to DISC EXPLORER.

3

Press PICTURE MEM ORY at your favorite scene.

The scene is captured as a still image, and is set as the jacket picture for the Disc Explorer.

To erase a stored jacket picture

1

Perform Steps 1 and 2 in “Searching for a disc on the Disc Explorer” on page 54 and select the disc you want to edit.

2

After sliding the TV/DISC EXPLORER/ DVD switch to DISC EXPLORER, press EDIT.

appears at the bottom right corner.

EDIT

3

Press C/c to select the disc number.

Select the disc number.

ALL DVD CD ABCD

Super Car Chase

1 2

Skiing the World

3

Music Madness

4 5

4

Press CLEAR. The stored jacket picture is deleted. If a jacket picture is recorded on the disc, it is displayed automatically.

To cancel the edit mode

Press ORETURN un til disappea rs from the Disc Explorer. If you press

ORETURN again, the Disc

Explorer turns off.

EDIT

Action

DVD

Classical

Action

DVD

VIDEO CD

53

CD

54

Filing Discs in the Folder

(File Mode)

You can file your discs as you like in four individual folders, “A” to “D.” Even if you file discs from folders “ALL,” “DVD,” or “CD” to folders “A” to “D,” those discs are not deleted from the “ALL,” “DVD,” or “CD” folders. You can file up to 301 discs in one folder, and the sa me disc in different folders. If you file your favorite discs in a folder ( “A” to “D”), you can play only those discs, or set Program Play, Shuffle Play and Repeat Play for the discs within the folder.

4

Press ENTER.

The disc to be filed (in this case, the disc in slot no.1) is selected. To file more than one disc, repeat Steps 3 and 4.

ALL DVD CD A B C D

Super Car Chase

1 2

Skiing the World

3

Music Madness

4 5

5

Press FOLDER repeatedly to select

Selected disc

Cursor moves to the next disc.

Action DVD

Classical

CD

Action DVD

CD

VIDEO CD

the “A” folder.

Searching for and Managing Discs (Disc Explorer)

For example, to file DVDs in the no.1 and no.3 slots to the “A” folder:

1

Press FOLDER.

The Disc Explorer appears.

2

After

sliding the TV/DISC EXPLORER/

DVD switch to DISC EXPLORER, press

FILE.

appears at the bottom right

FILE

corner.

3

Press

X/x

to select the disc (in this

6

Press FILE.

disappears from the Disc

FILE

Explorer. Then the Disc Explorer for the “A” folder containing the selected discs appears.

ALL DVD CD A B C D

Super Car Chase

1

Skiing the World

3

To cancel the file mode

Press ORETURN. To turn off the Disc Explorer, press

O

RETURN again.

Filed disc

Action

DVD

Action

DVD

case, the disc in slot no.1).

55

56

1-13

z Hints

•You can sort the discs by genre or text information. The discs are listed first by slot number in the Disc Explorer. You can then sort the discs by desired genre or text and store them (page 61).

•You can also select the file mode by pressing the FILE button on the player.

Deleting discs from a folder

You can delete unnecessary discs from folders “A” to “D.” You cannot delete discs from folders “ALL,” “DVD,” or “CD” unless you remove the disc from the player.

1

Press FOLDER repeatedly to select the folder with the disc you want to delete.

The Disc Exploer of the selected folder appears.

2

After sliding th e TV/DISC EXPLORE R/ DVD switch to DISC EXPLORER, press FILE.

appears at the bottom right

FILE

corner.

3

Press

X/x

to select the disc.

4

Press ENTER.

The disc to be deleted is selected. To delete other discs, repeat Steps 3 and

4.

ALL DVD CD A B C D

2

Music Madness

4 11 23

Selected disc

CD

Cursor moves to the next disc.

5

Press CLEAR.

The disc disappears from the folder.

disappears from the Disc

FILE

Explorer.

ALL DVD CD A B C D

2

Music Madness

4

23

To cancel the file mode

Press ORETURN. To turn off the Disc Explorer, press

O

RETURN again.

z Hint

You can also select the file mode by pressing the FILE button on the player.

CD

Labeling Discs and Folders

You can label the disc with a personal title of 16 characters (Disc Memo) (when DVD text or CD text is not recorded on the disc) and the folders “A” to “D” with a title of 3 characters. The Disc Memo can be anything you like, such as a title, musician’s name, category or date of purchase. You can also assign a genre label to the disc. This will help you keep your discs organized.

Searching for and Managing Discs (Disc Explorer)

(Edit Mode)

Labeling a disc or folder

1

Select the disc or folder you want to label.

◆ To label a disc

Select the disc on the Disc Explorer (for details, see Steps 1 and 2 of “Searching for a disc on the Disc Explorer” on page 54). After sliding the TV/DISC EXPLORER/DVD switch to DISC EXPLORER, press EDIT. The selected disc’s text only is highlighted and appears at the bottom right corner.

ALL DVD CD A B C D

2 4

23

◆ To label a folder

Press FOLDER. After sliding the TV/ DISC EXPLORER/DVD switch to DISC EXPLORER, press EDIT. Then, p ress

X

. Select the folder you want to label by

pressing

ALL DVD CD A B C D

2 4

23

EDIT

Music Madness

C/X/x/c

Select from her e

Music Madness

.

Classical

CD

Classical

CD

2

Press ENTER.

The “DISC MEMO INPUT” displa y appears when you have selected a disc. The “FOLDER NAME INPUT” display appears when you have selected a folder.

DISC MEMO INPUT

3

Select a character by pressing C/X/x/ c.

The selected character changes color.

DISC MEMO INPUT B

4

Press ENTER.

The selected character is input.

5

Repeat Steps 3 and 4 to input other characters.

6

When you have entered all the characters for the Disc Memo or folder name, press EDIT.

The “DISC MEMO INPUT” displa y or the “FOLDER NAME INPUT” display disappears and the Disc Memo or folder name is stored.

The entered Dis c M em o

ALL DVD CD A B C D

BRAHMS SYMPHONY4

2

Music Madness

4

23

To cancel the edit mode

Press ORETURN u ntil disappe ars from the Disc Explorer.

O

If you press Explorer turns off.

To erase a character

1

In Step 3 of “Labeling a disc or folder” (page 58), press the cursor to the character you want to erase.

2

Press CLEAR.

To insert or overwrite a character

1

In Step 3 of “Labeling a disc or folder” (page 58), press the cursor to the insertion point or the character you want to correct.

2

Select a correct character by pressing

X/x/c

or turning the click shuttle.

3

Perform the following.

◆ To insert the character

Press ENTER.

◆ To overwrite the character

Press

>

z Hint

You can also select the edit mode by pressing the EDIT button on the player.

Note

You can label up to 301 discs. When you have the player store a new disc in memory, the data for the old disc is erased.

Classical

CD

EDIT

RETURN again, the Disc

.

or > to move

.

or > to move

or . and move the cursor.

57

C/

Searching for and Managing Discs (Disc Explorer)

58

Labeling a disc or folder using a keyboard

To label the disc or folder, you can use an IBM compatible PC keyboard of the USA model* (not supplied) on the “DISC MEMO INPUT” or “FOLDER NAME INPUT” display.

*Power consumption must be 120mA or less.

KEYBOARD jack

1

Connect a keyboard to the KEYBOARD jack on the front panel when the player is in standby mode.

2

Press [/1 to turn on the player.

3

Perform Steps 1 and 2 of “Labeling a disc or folder” (page 58).

4

Input the characters on the keyboard.

5

Press ENTER on the keyboard to store the Disc Memo or folder name.

The Disc Memo or folder name is stored.

To turn off the Disc Explorer

Press ORETURN.

Notes

• If t he cursor keys do not work correctly and you cannot complete the task using the keyboard, disconnect the keyboard. Then, reconnect it to the player and try again.

• If the keyboard is not the USA model, the characters may be input differently from those on the keys. The USA k eyboard layout i s shown below.

~

'

1!2@3#4$5%6^7&89(0)-

WER TY U I OPQ

SDFGHJK LA

Caps Lock

XCVBNM<>Z

Shift

Ctrl Alt Alt Ctrl

+

=

{

} ]

[

Enter

?

Shift

Selecting a genre

You can assign a genre to your disc.

1

Select the disc on the Disc Explorer (Steps 1 and 2 of “Searching for a disc on the Disc Explorer” (page 54) ).

2

After sliding the TV/DISC EXPLORER/ DVD switch to DISC EXPLORER, press EDIT.

The selected disc’s text only is highlighted and appears at the bottom right corner.

EDIT

59

60

1-14

ALL DVD CD A B C D

TITLE VIEWER

1

Skiing the World

2

Music Madness

3 4 5

3

Press c, then ENTER.

The “GENRE SELECTION” display appears.

GENRE SELECTION

Action

Classics

Drama

Family

Non Feature

Sci-fi

Western

Country

Classical

Rock

Pop

4

Select the genre using C/X/x/c , then press ENTER.

The genre for the selected disc is stored in memory. If no jacket picture is recorded in the disc, or if you do not have a scene captured from that disc as a jacket picture (page 55), the genre picture in the memory of the player is displa yed.

ALL DVD CD A B C D

1

Skiing the World

2

Music Madness

3 4 5

To cancel the edit mode

Press ORETURN until disappears from the Disc Explorer. If you press

O

Explorer turns off .

RETURN again, the Disc

Comedy Horror Thriller

Jazz/R&B Others

Selected genre

EDIT

CD

Action

DVD

CD

VIDEO CD

Classical

CD

Action

DVD

CD

VIDEO CD

Sorting Discs

(Sort Mode)

You can sort the discs in the folder by the disc slot number, text information (DVD TEXT/ CD TEXT/ Disc Memo) or genre. The text information is sorted alphabetically. In the case of genre, the selected genre comes first.

1

Press FOLDER repeatedly to select the folder you want to sort.

The Disc Explorer of the selected folder appears.

2

If you want to sort by text information or genre, select the disc which has the desired text information or the genre by pressing

X/x

.

3

After sliding the TV/ DISC EXPLORER/DVD switch to DIS C EXPLORER, press SORT.

The selected disc only is highlighted and

appears at the bottom right corner.

SORT

ALL DVD CD A B C D

Super Car Chase

1

MONACO BRAHMS SYMPHONY4

2

Skiing the World

3

Music Madness

4 5

Sorting item indicator (green)

4

Searching for and Managing Discs (Disc Explorer)

Select the item you want to sort by pressing

C/X/x/c

You can select the disc number, text information or genre. You can also sort the text information by the text in the second line.

Select the sorting item from among here.

ALL DVD CD A B C D

Super Car Chase

1

MONACO BRAHMS SYMPHONY4

2

Skiing the World

3

Music Madness

4 5

Sorting item indicator position when you sort by genre

.

Selected disc

Action

DVD

Classical

Action

DVD

VIDEO CD

Classical

VIDEO CD

5

Press ENTER.

disappears from the Disc

SORT

Explorer. Then the discs are sorted and redisplayed. The sorted order remains even if the power of the player is turned off.

ALL DVD CD A B C D

Super Car Chase

1

MONACO Skiing the World

3

Highway Touring

CD

Action DVD

CD

Action DVD

CD

198

BRAHMS SYMPHONY4

2

Music Madness

4

To cancel the sort mode

Press ORETURN. disappears from the Disc Explorer. If you press

O

Explorer turns off.

z Hints

•The discs in the same genre are sorted by numerial order of the disc slot number.

•You can also select the sort mode by pressing the SORT button on t he player.

Action

DVD

Action

DVD

Action

DVD

Classical

CD

SORT

RETURN again, the Disc

Searching for a Scene

Searching for a Title/ Chapter/Track/Index/ Scene

You can search a DVD by title or by chapter, and you can search a VIDEO CD/CD by track, index, or scene. As titles and tracks are assigned unique num bers on the disc, you can select the desired one by entering its number. Or, you can search for a scene using the time code.

Number buttons

1

Select a disc (page 35).

2

Press DISPLAY during playback.

The Control Menu appears.

3

Press X/x to select the search method.

c

continued

◆ When playing a DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW

(DISC)

(TITLE)

(CHAPTER)

(TIME/TEXT) or

(TIME/MEMO)

Select “TIME/TEXT” to search for a starting point by inputting the time code.

◆ When playing a VIDEO CD

(DISC)

(TRACK)

(INDEX)

◆ When playing a VIDEO CD with PBC Playback

(DISC)

(SCENE )

(INDEX)

◆ When playing a CD

(DISC)

(TRACK)

(INDEX)

◆ When playing a DATA CD (MP3 audio)

(DISC)

(ALBUM)

(TRACK)

Example: when you select (CHAPTER) “

)” is selected (** refers to a

** (**

number). The number in parentheses indicates the total number of titles, tracks, indexes, scenes, etc. of the disc.

ALL

1 2 3 1 2 ( 2 7 1 8 ( 3 4 T

) )

1 : 3 2 : 5 5

Selected item

PLAY DVD

61

Searching for a Scene

62

4

Press ENTER.

“

)” changes to “

** (**

ALL

1 2 3

)

1 2 ( 2 7

)

- - ( 3 4 T

1 : 3 2 : 5 5

5

Select the number of the title,

-- (**

).”

PLAY DVD

Searching by Scene

(PICTURE NAVIGATION)

You can divide the screen into 9 subscreens and find the desired sc ene quickl y.

track, scene, time code, etc. you want using the number buttons.

For example, to find the scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes, and 20 seconds after the beginning, select “TIME/TEXT” in Step 2 and enter “21020.”

If you make a mistake

Cancel the number by pressing CLEAR, then select another number.

1

6

Press ENTER.

The player starts playback from the selected number.

To turn off the display

Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the display is turned off.

z Hint

You can display the first scene of titles, chapters or tracks recorded on the disc on a screen divided into 9 sections. You can start playback directly by selecting one of the scenes. For details, see “Searching by Scene (PICTURE NAVIGATION)” (page 64).

Note

You cannot search for a still picture on a DVD-RW in VR mode.

Press PICTURE NAVI during playback.

The following display appears.

ENTER

2

Press PICTURE NAVI repeatedly to select the item.

Refer to the explanations given for each item in the following sections.

•TIT LE VIEWER (for DVD VIDEO only)

•CHAPTER VIEWER (for DVD VIDEO only)

•TRACK VIEWER (for VIDEO CD only)

•BOOKMARK (for DVD VIDEO, VIDEO CD only)

•STROBE PLAY BACK (for DVD VIDEO, VIDE O CD only)

•ANGLE VIEWER (for DVD VIDEO only)

c

continued

63

64

1-15

3

PLAYT 1:01:57

BRAHMS SYMPHONY

Press ENTER.

To return to normal play

Press O RETURN.

z Hint

You can also select “PICTURE NAVIGATION” from the Control Menu (page 13).

Notes

•Depending on the disc, you m ay not be able to select all functions.

•The sound is muted when using this function.

Scanning the title, chapter, or track (TITLE VIEWER, CHAPTER VIEWER, TRACK VIEWER)

You can divide the screen into 9 subscreens and display the first scene o f titles, chapters, or tracks.

You can also start playback from the selected title, chapter, or track. After performing Step 3 of “Searching by Scene” above, select the scene using C/X/x/c and press ENTER.

z Hint

If there are more than 9 titles, chapters, or tracks, V is displayed at the bottom right of the screen. To display the additional titles, chapters, or tracks, select the bottom right scene (located at box 9) and press x. To return to the previous scene, select th e top left scene (located at box 1) and press X.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Setting and selecting a favorite scene (Bookmark)

You can have th e player store specific portions of the disc in memory and play them immediately whenever you want (Bookmark). Up to 9 bookmarks per disc for a total of 301 discs can be stored in memory. The bookmarked scenes are displayed on a screen divided into 9 sections.

To set a bookmark

During playback, press BOOKMARK when you find a scene to be bookmarked.

To start playback from the bookmarked scene

Select the bookmark using press ENTER.

To reset the bookmark

Select the bookmark you want to reset using

C/X/x/c

, then press CLEAR.

To reset all bookmarks for the player

Select “BOOKMARK RESET t” of “CUSTOM SETUP” in the Setup Display (page 93).

z Hint

The number of the bookmark you selected is displayed on the front panel display.

Note

The player can store the bookmarks of up to 301 discs in memory. When you have the player store over 301 discs in memory, bookmarks of the oldest disc are erased.

C/X/x/c

, then

Dividing a scene into 9 sections (STROBE PLAYBACK)

You can display 9 consecutive moving pictures on the screen.

When you press X after performing Step 3 of “Searching by Scene”(page 64), the moving pictures pause.

Searching for a Scene

Displaying different angles simultaneously (ANGLE VIEWER)

If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are recorded on the DVD VIDEO, you can display all of the angles recorded on the disc on the screen divided into 9 sections.

You can also start playback from the selected angle. After performing Step 3 of “Searching by Scene”(page 64), select the angle using C/ X/x/c and press ENTER.

7

Viewing Information About the Disc

9

8

Checking the Playing Time and Remaining Time

You can check the playing time and remaining time of the current title, chapter, or track. Also, you can check the DVD/CD text or track name (MP3 audio) recorded on the disc.

To check the DVD/CD text or track and album names (MP3 audio)

Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly in Step 2 to

1

Press TIME/TEXT during playback.

The following display appears.

Time information

2

Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly to change the time information.

The time information available depends on the disc you are playing.

display text recorded on the DVD VIDEO/ CD/DATA CD. The DVD/CD text appears only when text is recorded in the disc. You cannot change the text. If the disc does not contain text, “NO TEXT” appears.

For DATA CDs, the track and album names of the MP3 audio track appears (page 70).

z Hint

You can also check the DVD/CD text with the Disc Explorer (page 53).

◆ When playing a DVD VIDEO or DVDRW

(hours: minutes: seconds)

•T

*:*:*

Playing time of the current title

•T–

*:*:*

Remaining time of the current title

•C

*:*:*

Playing time of the current chapter

•C–

*:*:*

Remaining time of the current chapter

◆ When playing a VIDEO CD (with PBC functions)

•

(minutes: seconds)

*:*

Playing time of the current scene

◆ When playing a VIDEO CD (without PBC functions) or CD

•T

(minutes: seconds)

*:*

Playing time of the current track

•T–

*:*

Remaining time of the current track

•D

*:*

Playing time of the current disc

•D–

*:*

Remaining time of the current disc

◆ When playing a DATA CD (MP3 audio)

(minutes: seconds)

•

*:*

Playing time of the current track

65

Viewing Information About the Dis c

66

Checking the information on the front panel display

You can view the time information and text on the front panel display as well as on the TV screen. The information on the front panel display changes as follows when you change the time information on your TV screen.

When playing a DVD VIDEO or DVD-RW

Title playing time and current disc, title and chapter numb er

Remaining time of the current title

Playing time and number of the current chapter

Remaining time of the current chap te r

When playing a VI DEO CD (without PBC functions) or CD

Track playing time an d current disc, track and index number

Remaining time of the current track

Playing time of the disc

Remaining time of the disc

Text

When playing a DATA CD (MP3 audio)

Text

Track playing time and current disc, album and track number

Track name

67

1-16

68

z Hints

1

:

TVS DYNAMIC

•When playing VIDEO CDs with PBC functions, the disc number, scene number and the playing time are displayed.

•Long text that does not fit in a single line will scroll across the front panel display.

•You can also check the time information and text by press ing the TIME/TEXT button on the player.

•You can also check the time information and text using t he Control Menu (page 14).

Notes

•Depending on the type of disc being played, the DVD/CD text or track name may not be displayed.

•The player can only display the first level of the DVD/CD text, such as the disc name or title.

•Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be displayed correctly.

Checking the Play Information

You can check information such as the bit rate or the disc layer that is being played.

Checking the play information of DVD (ADVANCED)

1

Press DISPLAY during playback.

The Control Menu is displayed.

2

Press X/x to select (ADVANCED), then press ENTER.

The options for “ADVANCED” appear.

ALL

1 2 3

)

1 2 ( 2 7

)

1 8 ( 3 4 T

1 : 3 2 : 5 5

OFF BIT RATE LAYER BIT RATE

3

Press X/x to select it ems.

For details on each item, refer to “Play information display.”

• BIT RA TE: displays the bit rate.

• LAYER: displays the layer and the

pick-up point.

4

Press ENTER.

PLAY DVD

BIT RATE

05

384

kbps Mbps

10

To close the ADVANCED window

Select “OFF” in Step 3.

To turn off the Control Menu

Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

Play information display

By pressing DISPLAY repeatedly, you can display either “BIT RATE” or “LAYER,” whichever was selected in “ADVANCED.”

◆BIT RATE

Viewing Information About the Dis c

BIT RATE

05

Bit rate refers to the amount of video/audio data per second in a disc. While playing a disc, an approximate bit rate of the playback picture is displayed as Mbps (Mega bit per second) and the audio as kbps (kilo bit per second). The higher the bit rate, the larger the amount of data. However, this does not always mean that you can get higher quality pictures or sounds.

◆LAYER

Indicates the approximate point where the disc is playing. If it is a dual-layer DVD, the player indicates which layer is being read (“Layer 0” or “Layer 1”). For details on the layers, see page 99 (DVD VIDEO).

384

10

Appears when the D VD has dual layers

kbps Mbps

Audio

Video

Checking the play information of DATA CD

By pressing TIME/TEXT while playing MP3 audio track on a DATA CD, you can display the audio bit rate (the amount of data per second of the current audio).

Bit rate

128k PLAY

17:30T

JAZZ RIVER SIDE

Album name

Track name

Sound Adjustments

Changing the Sound

When playing a DVD recorded in multiple audio formats (PCM, Dolby Digital, or DTS), you can change the audio format. If the DVD is recorded with multilingual tracks, you can also change the language. With CDs, DATA CDs, or VIDE O CDs, you can select the sound from the right or left channel and listen to the sound of the selected channel through both the right and left speakers. For example, when playing a disc containing a song with the vocals on the right channel and the instruments on the left channel, you can hear the instruments from both speakers by selecting the left channel.

1

Press AUDIO during playback.

The following display appears.

ENGLISH

c

continued

2

Press AUDIO repeatedly to select the desired audio signal.

◆ When playing a DVD VIDEO

Depending on the DV D VIDEO, the choice of language varies. When 4 digits are displayed, they indicate a language code. Refer to “Language Code List” on page 102 to see which language the code represents. When the same language is displayed two or more times, the DVD VIDEO is recorded in multiple audio formats.

◆ When playing a DVD-RW

The types of sound tracks recorded on a disc are displayed. The default setting is underlined. Example:

•1:

MAIN (main sound)

•1: SUB (sub sound)

•1: MAIN+SUB (main and sub sound)

◆ When playing a VIDEO CD, CD, or DATA CD (MP3 audio)

The default setting is underlined.

•STEREO

: The standard stereo sound

•1/L: The sound of the left channel (monau ral)

•2/R : The sound of the right channel (monau ral)

z Hints

You can also select “AUDIO” from the Control Menu (page 14).

Displaying the audio information of the disc

Press DISPLAY during playback to display the Control Menu. Select “AUDIO” using X/ x. The channels being played are displayed on the screen. For example, in Dolby Digital format, multiple signals ranging from monaural to 5.1 channel signals can be recorded on a DVD VIDEO. Depending on the DVD VIDEO, the number of the recorded channels may differ.

c

continued

69

Sound Adjustments

70

Current audio format*

ALL

1 2 3

)

1 2 ( 2 7

)

1 8 ( 3 4 T

1 : 3 2 : 5 5

1: ENGLISH

Currently pla ying program format **

* “PCM,” “DTS,” or “DOLBY DIGITAL” is

displaye d. In the case of “DOLBY DIGITAL,” the channels in the playing track are displayed by number s as follows:

For Dolby Digital 5.1 ch:

PLAY DVD

PROGRAM FORMAT DOLBY DIGITAL 3/2.1

LRC

LFE

LS RS

Rear component 2

TV Virtual Surround

(TVS)

Settings

When you connect a stereo TV or 2 front speakers, TVS (TV Virtual Surround) lets you enjoy surround sound effects by using sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L: left, R: right) without using actual rear speakers. TVS was developed by Sony to produce surround sound for home use using just a stereo TV.

DOLBY DIGITAL 3 / 2 . 1

Front component 2 + Center component 1

**The letters in the program format display

mean the following sound component:

L: Front (left) R: Front (right) C: Center LS: Rear (left) RS:Rear (right) S: Rear (monaural): The rear

component of the Dolby Surround processed signal and the Dolby Digital signal

LFE: Low Frequency Effect signal

z Hint

For Dolby Digital and DTS, “LFE” is always enclosed in a solid line regardless of the LFE signal component being output.

Note

If “DTS” is set to “OFF” in “AUDIO SETUP” (page 95), the DTS track selection option will not appear on the screen even if the disc contains DTS tracks.

71

72

LFE (Low Frequency Effect) component 1

1

Press SURROUND during playback.

The following display appears.

2

Press SURROUND repeatedly to select one of the TVS sounds.

Refer to the following explanations given for each item.

•TVS DYNAMIC

•TVS WIDE

•TVS NIGHT

•TVS STANDARD

1-17

To cancel the setting

2

1:ENGLISH

Select “OFF” in Step 2.

◆TVS DYNAMIC

Creates virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L, R) without using actual rear speakers (shown below). This mode is effective when the distance between the front L and R speakers is short, such as with built-in speakers on a stereo TV.

TV

◆TVS WIDE

Creates virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L, R) without using actual rear speakers. The virtual speakers are reproduced as shown in the illu stration below. This mode is effective when the distance between the front L and R speakers is short, such as with built-in speakers on a stereo TV.

TV

◆TVS NIGHT

Large sounds, such as explosions, are suppressed, but the quieter sounds are unaffected. This feature is useful when you want to hear the dialog and enjoy the surround sound effects of “TVS WIDE” at low volume.

◆TVS STANDARD

Creates virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L, R) without using actual rear speakers. The virtual speakers are reproduced as shown in the illustration below. Use this setting when you want to use TVS with 2 separate speakers.

z Hints

•You can also select “TVS” by pressing the

•You can also select “TVS” from the Control

•When the playing signal does not contain a signal

•When you select one of the TVS modes, turn off

•Make sure that your listening position is between

•“TVS NIGHT” only works with Dolby Digital

L R

L : Front speaker (left) R : Front speaker (right)

: Virtual speaker

SURROUND button on the player.

Menu (page 14).

Notes

for the rear speakers, the surround effects cannot be heard.

the surro und setting of the connected TV or amplifier (receiver).

and at an equal distance from your speakers, and that the speakers are located in similar surroundings.

discs. Howeve r, not all discs will respond to the “TVS NI GHT” function in the same way.

Note

Enjoying Movies

Changing the Angles

If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are recorded on the DVD VIDEO, “ANGLE” appears in the front panel display. This means that you can change the viewing angle.

Sound Adjustments

1

Press ANGLE during playback.

The number of the angle appears on the display.

2

Press ANGLE repeatedly to select

Depending on the DVD VIDEO, you may not be able to change the angles even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD VIDEO.

the angle number.

The scene changes to the selected angle.

z Hints

•You can display all the angles recorded on the disc on the same screen, and start playback directly from the chosen angle. The angles are displayed on a screen divided into 9 sections. For details, see page 64.

•You can also select “ANGLE” from the Control Menu (page 14).

Displaying the Subtitles

If subtitles are recorded on the discs, you can change the subtitles or turn them on and off whenever you want while playing a DVD.

1

Press SUBTITLE during playback.

The following display appears.

2

Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select the language.

◆ When playing a DVD VIDEO

Select the language. Depending on the DVD VIDEO, the choice of language varies. When 4 digits are displayed, they indicate a language code. Refer to “Language Code List” on page 102 to see which language the code represents.

◆ When playing a DVD-RW

Select “ON.”

To turn off the subtitles

Select “OFF” in Step 2.

z Hint

You can also select “SUBTITLE” from the Control Menu (page 14).

Note

Depending on the DVD VIDEO, you may not be able to change the subtitles even if multilingual subtitles are recorded on it. You also may not be able to turn them off.

73

Enjoying Movies

74

Adjusting the Picture

(BNR)

Quality

The Block Noise Reduction (BNR) function adjusts the picture quality by reducing the “block noise” or mosaic like patterns that appear on your TV screen.

1

Press DISPLAY twice during

4

Press ENTER.

The disc plays with the setting you selected.

To cancel the “BNR” setting

Select “OFF” in Step 3.

To turn off the Control Menu

Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

Notes

• If t he outlines of the images on your screen become bl urred, set “BNR” to “OFF.”

•Depending on the disc or the scene being played, the “BN R” effect may be hard to discern.

playback.

The Control Me nu appear.

2

Press X/x to select (BNR), then press ENTER.

The options for “BNR” appears.

)

1 2 ( 2 7

)

1 8 ( 3 4 OFF

1 2 3 OFF

3

Press X/x to select a level.

•1: reduces the “block noise.”

•2: reduces the “block noise” m ore than

1.

•3: reduces the “block noise” m ore than

2.

PLAY

DVD

75

76

1-18

Adjusting the Playback

DYNAMIC 1

(CUSTOM PICTURE MODE)

Picture

You can adjust the video signal of the DVD or VIDEO CD from the player to obtain the picture quality you want. Choose the setting that best suits the program you are watching. When you select “MEMORY,” you can make further adjustments to each element of the picture (color, brightness, etc.).

1

Press PICTURE MODE during playback.

The following display appears.

2

Press PICTURE MODE repeatedly to select the setting you want.

The default setting is underlined.

•STANDARD: picture.

•DYNAMIC 1: produces a bold dynamic picture by increasing the picture contrast and the color intensity.

•DYNAMIC 2: produces a more dynamic picture than DYNAMIC 1 by further increasing the picture contrast and the color intensity.

•CINEMA 1: enhances details in dark areas by increasing the black level.

•CINEMA 2: White colors become brighter and black colors become richer, and the color contrast is increased.

•MEMORY: adjusts the picture in greater detail.

z Hints

•When you watch a movie, “CINEMA 1” or “CINEM A 2” is recomm ended.

•The picture can be adjusted by pressing the PICTURE MODE button on the player as well.

•You can also select the “CUSTOM PICTURE MODE” fr om the Control Menu (page 13).

displays a standa rd

Adjusting the picture items in “MEMORY”

You can adjust each element of the picture individually.

•PICTURE: changes the contrast

•BRIGHTNESS: changes the overall brightn ess

•COLOR: makes the colors deeper or lighter

•HUE: changes the color balance

1

Press PICTURE MODE repeatedly to select “MEMORY” and press ENTER.

The “PICTURE” adjustment bar appears.

C

0 1 : 3 2 : 5 5

PICTURE

0

2

Press C/c to adjust the picture contrast, then press ENTER.

The adjustment is saved, and “BRIGHTNESS” adjustment bar appears.

3

Repeat Step 2 to adjust “BRIGHTNESS,” “COLOR,” and “HUE.”

The Custom Picture Mode display appears. You can check each adjustm ent.

C

0 1 : 3 2 : 5 5

PICTURE BRIGHTNESS COLOR HUE

RETURN

Enjoying Movies

To turn off the display

Press O RETURN, or select “RETURN” in Step 3 and press ENTER.

z Hints

•To reset the picture items to the default values,

press c after Step 3 to select “RESET” and press ENTER.

•When “PLAYBACK MEMORY” in “CUSTOM SETUP” is set to “ON,” the player will save a single setting for up to 301 individual discs. (This does not apply to DVD-RWs in VR mode.)

•If you do not want to save your adjustment in Step 2, you can go to the next picture item by pressing X/x without saving.

RESET

Enhancing the Playback Picture

ENHANCER)

The Digital Video Enhancer (DVE) function makes the picture appear clear and crisp by enhancing the outlines of images on your TV screen. Also, this function can soften the images on the screen.

+1 –3

+3

–1

1

2

(DIGITAL VIDEO

Press DISPLAY twice during playback.

The Control Menu appears.

Press X/x to select (DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER), then press ENTER.

The options for “DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER” appear.

)

1 2 ( 2 7 1 8 ( 3 4

OFF 1 2 3 SOFT OFF

)

PLAY

DVD

3

Press X/x to select a level.

•1: enhances the outline.

•2: enhances the outline mo re than 1 .

•3: enhances the outline mo re than 2 .

•SOFT: softens the image (DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW only)

4

Press ENTER.

The disc plays with the setting you selected.

To cancel the “DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER” setting

Select “OFF” in Step 3.

To turn off the Control Menu

Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

Note

Depending on the disc or the scene being played, noise found in the disc may become more apparent. If this happens, it is recommended that you use the BNR function (page 76) with the DVE function. If the condition still does not improve, reduce the Digital Video Enhancer level, or select “SOFT” (DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW only) in Step 3 above.

c

continued

77

Enjoying Movies

78

Using Various Additional Functions

Locking Discs

(CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL, PARENTAL CONTROL)

You can set two kinds of playback restrictions for the desired disc.

•Custom Parental Control

You can set playback restrictions so that the player will not play inappropriate discs.

•Parental Control

Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be limited according to a predetermined level such as the age of the users. Scenes may be

blocked or replaced with different scenes. The same password is used for bo th Parental Control and Custom Parental Control.

2

Press DISPLAY while the player i s in stop mode.

The Control Menu appears.

3

Press X/x to select (PARENTAL CONTROL), then press ENTER.

The options for “PARENTAL CONTROL” appear.

ALL

1 2 3

)

1 2 ( 2 7

)

1 8 ( 3 4 T

1 : 3 2 : 5 5

ON PLAYER PASSWORD OFF

4

Press X/x to select “ON t,” then press ENTER.

◆ If you have not entered a password

The display for registering a new password appears.

STOP DVD

Custom Parental Control

You can set the same Custom Parental Control password for up to 602 discs. When you set the 603rd disc, the first disc is canceled.

Number buttons

PARENTAL CONTROL

Enter a new 4-digit password, then

ENTER

press

.

Enter a 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display for confirming the password appears.

◆ When you have already registered a password

The display for entering the password appears.

PARENTAL CONTROL

Enter password, then press

1

Select a disc you want to lock (page

35).

If the disc is playing, press x to stop

79

playback.

80

ENTER

.

1-19

5

Enter or re-enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER.

“Custom parental control is set.” appears and the screen returns to the Control Menu.

To turn off the Custom Parental Control function

1

Follow Steps 1 through 3 of “Custom Parental Control.”

2

Press X/x to se lect “OFF t,” then press ENTER.

3

Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER.

To play a disc for which Custom Parental Control is set

1

Select the disc for which Custom Parental Control is set. The “CUSTOM PARENTA L CONTROL” display appears.

CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL

Custom parental control is already set. To play, enter your password

ENTER

and press

.

2

Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The player is ready for playback.

z Hint

If you forget your passwor d, enter the 6-di git number “199703” using the number buttons when the “CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL” display asks you for your password, then press ENTER. The display will ask you to enter a new 4-digit password.

Parental Control (limited playback)

Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be limited according to a predetermined level such as the age of the users. The “PARENTAL CONTROL” function allows you to set a playback limitation level.

Number buttons

1

Press DISPLAY while the player i s in stop mode.

The Control Menu appears.

2

Press X/x to select (PARENTAL CONTROL), then press ENTER.

The options for “PARENTAL CONTROL” appear.

1 2 3

1 2 ( 2 7 1 8 ( 3 4 T

1 : 3 2 : 5 5

ON PLAYER PASSWORD OFF

ALL

) )

STOP DVD

3

Press X/x to select “PLAYER t,” then press ENTER.

◆ If you have not entered a password

The display for registering a new password appears.

PARENTAL CONTROL

Enter a new 4-digit password, then

ENTER

.

press

Enter a 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display for confirming the password appears.

◆ When you have already registered a password

The display for entering the password appears.

Using Various Addition al Functions

PARENTAL CONTROL

Enter password, then press

4

Enter or re-enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER.

The display for setting the playback limitation level appears.

PARENTAL CONTROL

LEVEL: OFF STANDARD:

5

Press X/x to select “STANDARD,” then press ENTER.

The selection items for “STANDARD” are displayed.

ENTER

.

USA

PARENTAL CONTROL

LEVEL: OFF STANDARD:

6

Press X/x to select a geographic area as the playback limitation level, then press ENTER.

The area is selected. When you select “OTHERS t,” select and enter a standard code in the table on page 83.

7

Press X/x to select “LEVEL,” then press ENTER.

The selection items for “LEVEL” are displayed.

PARENTAL CONTROL

LEVEL: OFF STANDARD:

8

Select the level you want using X/x, then press ENTER.

Parental Control setting is complete.

PARENTAL CONTROL

LEVEL: STANDARD: USA

The lower the value, the stricter the limitation.

To turn off the Parental Control function

Set “LEVEL” to “OFF” in Step 8.

USA USA

OTHERS

OFF

8:

NC17

7: 6: 5:

4: PG13

R

To play a disc for which Parental Control is set

1

Select the disc and press H. The display for entering your password appears.

2

Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The player starts playback.

z Hint

If you forget your password , press OPEN/CLOSE to open the front cover and repeat Steps 1 to 3 of “Parental Control (limited playback).” When you are asked to enter your password, enter “199703” using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display will ask you to enter a new 4-digit password. After you ente r a new 4-digit pas sword, press OPEN/CLOSE to close the front cover and press H. When the display for entering your password appears, enter your new password.

Notes

•When you play discs which do not have the Parental Control function, playback cannot be limited on this player.

•Depending on the disc, you m ay be asked to change the parental control level while playing the disc. In this case, enter your password, then change the level. If the Resume Play mode is cancelled, the level returns to the previous level.

c

continued

Area Code

Standard Code

Argentina2044

Australia 2047

Austria 2046

Belgium 2057

Brazil 2070

Canada 2079

Chile 2090

China 2092

Denmark 2115

Finland 2165

France 2174

Germany 2109

India 2248

Indonesi a 2238

Italy 2254

Japan 2276

Korea 2304

number

Standard Code

Malaysia 2363

Mexico 2362

Netherlands 2376

New Zealand

Norway 2379

Pakistan 2427

Philippines2424

Portugal 2436

Russia 2489

Singapore2501

Spain 2149

Sweden 2499

Switzerland 2086

Thailand 2528

United Kingdom

Changing the password

1

Press DISPLAY while the player i s in stop mode.

The Control Menu appears.

2

Press X/x to select (PARENTAL CONTROL), then press ENTER.

The options for “PARENTAL CONTROL” appear.

3

Press X/x to select “PASSWORD t,” then press ENTER.

The display for entering the password appears.

4

Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER.

5

Enter a new 4-di git password u sing the number buttons, then press ENTER.

6

To confirm your password, re-enter it using the number buttons, then press ENTER.

number

2390

2184

81

82

If you make a mistake entering your password

Press C before you press ENTER and input the correct number.

If you make a mistake

Press O RETURN.

To turn off the display

Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the display is turned off.

Operation Sound Effects

(Sound Feedback)

The player beeps when the following operations are performed. The default setting of the Sound Feedback function is set to off.

Operation Operation sound

Power is turned on One beep

Power is turned offTwo beeps

H is pressed One beep X is pressed Two beeps

Playback is stopped One long beep

Operation is not possible

Three beeps

To set Sound Feedback

Using Various Addition al Functions

Power indicator

1

Press ?/1 on the player or the remote.

The power indicator lights up in green.

2

Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the front cover.

3

Press and hold X on the player for more than two seconds.

You will hear one beep and the Sound Feedback function is turned on.

c

continued

83

84

1-20

To turn off the Sound Feedback function

When the front cover is open, press and hold X on the player for more than two seconds. You will hear two beeps and the Sound Feedback function is turned off.

Controlling Your TV with the Supplied Remote

By adjusting the remote signal, you can control your TV with the supplied remote.

Notes

•Depending on the unit being connected, you may not be abl e to control your TV using some of the buttons below.

• If you enter a new code number, the code number previously entered will be erased.

•When you replace the batteries of the remote, the code number you have set may be reset to the default setting. Set the appropriate code number again.

Controlling TVs with the remote

Number buttons

1

Slide the TV/DISC EXPLORER/DVD switch to TV.

2

Hold down [/1, and enter your TV’s manufacturer’s code (s ee the table below) using the number buttons.

3

Release [/1.

Code numbers of controllable TVs

If more than one code number is listed, try entering them one at a time until you find the one that works with your TV.

Manufacturer

Code

Manufacturer

number

Sony (default) 01

Akai 04

AOC 04

Centurion 12

Coronado 03

Curtis-Mathe s 12

Daytron 12

Emerson 03,04,

Fisher 11

General Electric 06,10

Gold Star 03,04,

Hitachi02,03

Using Various Addition al Functions

J.C.Penney04,12

JVC 09

KMC 03

Magnavox 03,0 8,

Marantz04,13

MGA/ Mitsubishi

NEC 04,12

Panasonic06,19

14

17

12

04,12, 13,17

Philco 03, 04

Philips 08,21

Pioneer 16

Portland 03

Proscan 10

Quasar 06,18

Radio Shack 05,14

RCA 04,10

Sampo 12

Samsung 20,3,12

Sanyo 11,14

Scott 12

Sears 07,10,

Sharp 03,05 ,

Sylvania 08,12

Teknika 03,08,

Toshiba 07

Wards 03, 04,

Yorx 1 2

Zenith 15

To control the TV

You can control the following items with the supplied remote.

By pressing You can

Code number

[/1 Turn the TV on or off

VOL +/– Adjust the volume of the TV

Number buttons and ENTER

WIDE MODE Switch to or from the wide

TV/VIDEO S witch the TV’s input source

11

18

14

12

Select the channel of the TV

mode of a Sony’s wide TV

between the TV and other input sources

Controlling the volume of your AV amplifier (receiver) with the remote

Number buttons

1

Slide the TV/DISC EXPLORER/DVD switch to DVD.

2

Hold down [/1, and enter your AV amplifier (receiver)’s manufacturer’s code (see the table below) using the number buttons.

3

Release [/1.

The VOL +/

– buttons co ntrol the AV

amplifier’s volume.

◆ If you want to control the TV volume

Slide the TV/DISC EXPLORER/DVD switch to TV.

Code numbers of controllable AV amplifiers(receivers)

If more than one code number is listed, try entering them one at a time until you find the one that works with your AV amplifier (receiver).

Manufacturer Code n umber

Sony 80, 88, 89, 91

Denon 84, 85, 86

Kenwood 92, 93

Onkyo 81, 82, 83

Pioneer 99

Sansui 87

Technics 97, 98

Yamaha 94, 95, 96

c

continued

z Hint

If you want to control the TV’s volume even when the TV/DISC EXPLORER/D VD switch is set to DVD, repeat Steps 1 and 2 and enter the code number 90 (default).

85

86

Settings and Adjustments

Using the Setup Display

By using the Setup Display, you can make various adjustments to items such as picture and sound. You can also set a language for the subtitles and the Setup Display, among other things. For details on each Setup Display item, see pages from 89 to 95.

Note

Playback settings stored in the disc take priority over the Setup Display settings and not all the functions described may work.

3

Press X/x to select “CUSTOM,” then press ENTER.

The Setup Display appears.

LANGUAGE SETUP

OSD: MENU: AUDIO: SUBTITLE:

4

Press X/x to se lect the setup item

ENGLISH

ENGLISH ORIGINAL ENGLISH

from the displayed list: “LANGUAGE SETUP,” “SCREEN SETUP,” “CUSTOM SETUP,” or “AUDIO SETUP.” Then press ENTER.

The Setup item is selected. Example: “SCREEN SETUP”

Selected item

Using Various Addition al Functions

1

Press DISPLAY when the player is in stop mode.

The Control Me nu appears.

2

Press X/x to select (SETUP), then press ENTER.

The options for “SETUP” appear.

ALL

3 5

)

( 4 7

: :

QUICK CUSTOM RESET QUICK

STOP DVD

SCREEN SETUP

TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: STARTUP SCREEN: STANDARD

COMPONENT OUT:

MODE:

Setup items

5

Select an item using X/x, then

4:3 LETTER BOX

JACKET PICTURE

INTERLACE

press ENTER.

The options for the selected item appear. Example: “TV TYPE”

SCREEN SETUP

TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: STARTUP SCREEN: COMPONENT OUT: MODE:

4:3 LETTER BOX

4:3 PAN SCAN

INTERLACE

Options

ON

AUTO

16:9

AUTO

87

88

1-21

6

Select a setting using X/x, then press ENTER.

The setting is selected and setup is complete. Example: “16:9”

SCREEN SETUP

TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: STARTUP SCREEN

COMPONENT OUT:

MODE:

To turn off the display

Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the display is turned off.

To enter the Quick Setup mode

Select “QUICK” in Step 3. Follow from Step 5 of the Quick Setup explanation to make basic adjustments (page 29).

Selected setting

16:9

JACKET PICTURE

STANDARD

INTERLACE

AUTO

ON

To reset all of the “SETUP” settings

1

Select “RESET” in Step 3 and press ENTER

2

Select “YES” using X/x.

3

Press ENTER. All the settings explained on pages 89 to 95 return to the default settings. Do not press [/1 while resetting the player as it takes a few seconds to complete.

Setting the Display or Sound Track Language

(LANGUAGE SETUP)

“LANGUAGE SETUP” allows you to set various languages for the on-screen display or sound track.

Select “LANGUAGE SETUP” in the Setup Display. To use the display, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 88).

LANGUAGE SETUP

OSD: MENU: AUDIO: SUBTITLE:

◆ OSD (On-Screen Display)

Switches the display language on the screen.

◆ MENU (DVD VIDEO only)

You can select the desired language for the disc’s menu.

◆ AUDIO (DVD VIDEO only)

Switches the language of the sound track. When you select “ORIGINAL,” the language given priority in the disc is selected.

◆ SUBTITLE (DVD VIDEO only)

Switches the language of the subtitle recorded on the DVD VIDEO. When you select “AUDIO FOLLOW,” the language for the subtitles changes according to the language you selected for the sound track.

z Hint

If you select “OTHERS t” in “MENU,” “SUBTITLE,” and “AUDIO,” select and enter a language code f rom “Language Code List” on page 102 using the number buttons.

Note

When you select a language in “MENU,” “SUBTITLE,” or “AUDIO” that is not recorded on the DVD VIDEO, one of the recorded languages will be automatically selected.

ENGLISH ENGLISH

ORIGINAL

ENGLISH

Settings for the Display

(SCREEN SETUP)

Choose settings according to the TV to be connected.

Select “SCREEN SETUP” in the Setup Display. To use the display, see “Using the Setup Display” on page 88. The default settings are underlined.

SCREEN SETUP

TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: STARTUP SCREEN: STANDARD COMPONENT OUT: INTERLACE

MODE: AUTO

◆ TV TYPE

Selects the aspect ratio of the connected TV (4:3 standard or wide).

4:3 LETTER BOX

Settings and Adjustments

4:3 PAN SCAN

16:9 Select this when you connect a

Select this when you connect a 4:3 screen TV. Displays a wide picture with bands on the upper and lower portions of the screen.

Select this when you connect a 4:3 screen TV. Automatically displays the wide picture on the entire screen and cuts off the portions that do not fit.

wide-screen TV or a TV with a wide mode function.

4:3 LETTER BO X

4:3 PAN SCAN

16:9

4:3 LETTER BOX

JACKET PICTURE

Note

Depending on the DVD, “4:3 LETTER BOX” may be selected automatically instead of “4:3 PAN SCAN” or vice versa.

◆ SCREEN SAVER

The screen saver image appears when you leave the player in pause or stop mode for 15 minutes, or when you play back a CD or DATA CD (MP3 audio) for more than 15 minutes. The screen saver will help prevent your display device from becoming damaged (ghosting). Press H to turn off the screen saver.

ON

ON Turns on the screen saver. OFF Turns off the screen saver.

◆ BACKGROUND

Selects the background color or picture on the TV screen in stop mode or while playing a CD or DATA CD (MP3 audio).

JACKET PICTURE

PICTURE MEMORY

GRAPHICS

BLUE The background color is blue. BLACK The backgro und color is black.

◆ STARTUP SCREEN

Selects the startup screen. The startup screen image you selected appears on the TV screen when you turn on the player.

STANDARD

PICTURE MEMORY

The jacket pic ture (still pictur e) appears, but only when the jacket picture is already recorded on the disc (CDEXTRA, etc.). If the disc does not contain a jacket picture, the “GRAPHICS” picture appears.

Your favorite picture appears in the background. To store a scene in memory, see “Storing a picture in memory” (page 91).

A preset picture stored in the player appears.

The standard startup screen in the playe r’s memory appears.

Your favorite picture appears in the startup screen. To store a scene in memory, see “Storing a picture i n memory” (page 91).

Storing a picture in memory

The player can store one scene in memory for both the background and startup screen. During playback, when you find a scene to be stored in memory, slide the TV/DISC EXPLORER/DVD switch to TV or DVD and press PICTURE MEMORY. The picture is stored in memory.

Note

If you operate the player while the picture is being stored in memory, the player will fail to store the picture.

◆ COMPONENT OUT

This will change the type of signal output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks on the player. See page 100 for more information about the different types.

INTERLACE Select this when you are

PROGRESSIVE Select this when you have

z Hint

When the player outputs progressive signals, the PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up.

Note

If you select “PROGRESSIVE” when you connect the player to a TV that cann ot accept the signal in progressive format (480p), the image quality will deteriorate. In this case, set the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT/SCAN SELECT switch on the back panel of the player to INTERLACE. When you can see the TV screen correctly, set “COMPONENT OUT” to “INTERLACE” and reset the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT/SCAN SELECT switch to SELECTABLE.

connected to a standard (interlace format) TV.

a TV that can accept progressive signals.

When “PROGRESSIVE” is selected in “COMPONENT OUT”

You can fine-tune the Progressive (480p) video signal output when you select “PROGRESSIVE” in “COMPONENT OUT” of the “SCREEN SETUP” display and connect the player to the TV that is able to accept the video signal in progressive format (480p).

◆ MODE (Conversion Modes)

DVD software can be divided into two types: film based software and video based software. Video based software is derived from TV, such as dramas and sit-coms, and displays images at 30 fram es/60 fields per second. Film based software is derived from film and displays images at 24 frames per second. Some DVD software contains both Video and Film. In order for these images to appear natural on your screen when output in PROGRESSIVE mode (60 frames per second), the progressive video signal needs to be converted to m atch the type of DVD software that you are watching.

AUTO This will automa tically detect

VIDEO Th is will set the conversi on

When you play video based software with progressive signals, sections of some types of images may appear unnatural due to the conversion process when output through the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT jacks. Im ages from the S VIDE O OUTPUT 1/2 and VIDEO OUTPUT 1/2 jacks are unaffected as they are output in the interlace format.

if you are pl aying Film based or Video bas ed software and convert the signal to the appropriate conversion mo de. Normally select this position .

mode for Video based software, regardless of the type of softwa re that you are playing.

Note

89

Settings and A djustments

91

90

Custom Settings

(CUSTOM

SETUP)

Use this to make playback related adjustments and other settings.

Select “CUSTOM SETUP” in the Setup Display. To use the display, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 88). The default settings are underlined.

CUSTOM SETUP

AUTO POWER OFF: AUTO PLAY: DIMMER: PAUSE MODE: PLAYBACK MEMORY: TRACK SELECTION: MULTI-DISC RESUME: BOOKMARK RESET:

◆ AUTO POWER OFF

Switches the Auto Power Off setting on or off.

OFF Switches this function off. ON The player enters standby mode

◆ AUTO PLAY

Switches the Auto Play setting on or off. This function is useful when the player is connected to a timer (not supplied).

OFF ON Automatically starts pla yback

◆ DIMMER

Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display.

BRIGHT DARK Makes the lighting dark. AUTO

DARK

AUTO OFF Turns off the lighting of the

OFF Turns off the lighting.

when left in stop mode for more than 30 minutes.

Switches this function off.

when the player is turned on.

Makes the lighting bri ght.

Makes the front panel display dark if you do not operate the player or remote for a short while.

front pan el display if you do not operate the player or remote for a short while.

92

◆ PAUSE MODE (DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW only)

Selects the picture in pause mode.

AUTO The picture, including subjects

FRAME The picture, including subjects

◆ PLAYBACK MEMORY

The player can store “SUBTITLE” and other

OFF

settings of each disc for up to 301 discs

OFF

BRIGHT

(Playback Memory). For double-sided

AUTO

DVDs, the settings for both sides of the disc

ON

OFF

are memorized.

ON

Set this function “ON” or “OFF.”

The following settings are stored in memory. –ANGLE (page 74)* –AUDIO (page 71)* –BNR (page 76)** –BOOKMARK (page 65)** –CUSTOM PICTURE MODE (p age 77)** –DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER (page

–DISC MEMO (page 58)*** –SUBTITLE (page 75)*

*DVD VIDEO only **DVD VIDEO/VIDEO CD only ***DVD VIDEO/VIDEO CD/CD only

•The player can store the settings of up to 301discs.

•The Playback Memory function cannot be used

that move dynamically, is output with no jitter. Normally select this position.

that do not move dynamically, is output in h igh resolution.

ON

OFF Does not store the settings in

Stores the settings in memory when you eject the di sc.

memory.

78)**

Notes

When you store the setting of disc number 302, the first di sc setting is canceled.

for DVD-RWs i n VR mode.

1-22

◆ TRACK SELECTION (DVD VIDEO only)

Gives the sound track which contains the highest number of channels priority when you play a DVD VIDEO on which multiple audio formats (PCM, DTS, or Dolby Digital format) are recorded.

OFF No priority given. AUTO Priority given.

Notes

•When you set the item to “AUTO,” the language may change. The “TRACK SELECTION” setting has highe r priority than the “AUDIO” settings in “LANGUAGE SETUP” (page 89).

•If you set “DTS” to “OFF” (page 95), the DTS sound track is not played even if you set “TRACK SELECTION” to “AUTO.”

•If PCM, DTS, and Dolby Digital sound tracks have the sa me number of channels, the player selects PCM, DTS, and Dolby Digital sound tracks in this order.

◆ MULTI-DISC RESUME (DVD VIDEO/

VIDEO CD only)

Switches the Multi-disc Resume setting on or off. Resume playback point can be stored in memory for up to 6 different DVD VIDEO/ VIDEO CD discs (page 40) so long as they are placed in the EASY PLAY slot.

ON

OFF Doe s not store the resume

◆ BOOKMARK RESET t

Resets the bookmarks. Select this and press ENTER. The “BOOKMARK RESET” display appears. Press ENTER again to erase all of the bookmarks in all of the discs.

Stores the resume settings in memory for up to 6 discs (The settings remain in m emory even if you select “OFF.”)

settings in memory. Playba ck restarts at the resume point only for the current disc in the player.

Settings for the Sound

(AUDIO SETUP)

“AUDIO SETUP” allows you to set the sound according to the playback and connection conditions.

Select “AUDIO SETUP” in the Setup Display. To use the display, see “Using the Setup Display” (page 88). The default settings are underlined.

◆ AUDIO ATT (attenuation)

If the playback sound is distorted, set this item to “ON.” The player reduces the audio output level. This function affects the output of the AUDIO OUTPUT L/R 1/2 jacks.

◆ AUDIO DRC (Dynamic Range Control) (DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW only)

Makes the sound clear when the volume is turned down when playing a DVD that conforms to “AUDIO DRC.” This affects the output from the following jacks: –AUDIO OUTP UT L/R 1/2 jacks –DIGITAL OUTPUT (COAXIAL or

AUDIO SETUP

AUDIO ATT: AUDIO DRC: DOWNMIX: DIGITAL OUT:

DOLBY DIGITAL: DTS:

OFF Normally, select this position. ON Select this when the playback so und

from the speakers is dis torted.

OPTICAL) j ack only when “DOLBY DIGITAL” i s set to “D-PCM” (page 94).

STANDARD TV MODE Makes the low sounds clear

WIDE RANGE

Normally select this position.

even if you turn the volume down.

Gives you the feeling of being at a live performance.

STANDARD

DOLBY SURROUND

D-PCM

OFF

◆ DOWNMIX (DVD only)

Switches the method for mixing down to 2 channels when you play a DVD which has rear sound elements (channels) or is recorded in Dolby Digital format. For details on the rear signal components, see “Displaying the audio information of the disc” (page 71). This function affects the output of th e following jacks: –AUDIO OUTPUT L/R 1/2 jacks –DIGITAL OUTPUT (COAXIAL or

OPTICAL) jack when “DOLB Y DIGITAL” i s set to “D-PCM” (pag e 94).

DOLBY

Select this when the player is connected to an audio

SUR-

component that conforms to

ROUND

ON

Settings and A djustments

Dolby Surround (Pro Logic).

NORMAL Select this when the player is

connected to an audio component that does not conform to Dolby Surround (Pro Logic).

◆ DIGITAL OUT

Selects if audio signals are output via the DIGITAL OUTPUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) jack.

ON

Normally select th is position. When you select “ON,” see “Setting the digital output signal” for further settings.

OFF The influence of the digital circuit

upon the analog circuit is minimal.

Setting the digital output signal

Switches the method of outputting audio signals when you connect a component such as an amplifier (receiver) or MD deck with a digital input jack. For connection details, see page 24. Select “DOLBY DIGITAL” and “DTS” after setting “DIGITAL OUT” to “ON.”

AUDIO SETUP

AUDIO ATT: AUDIO DRC: DOWNMIX: DIGITAL OUT:

DOLBY DIGITAL: DTS:

If you connect a com ponent that does not conform to the selected audio signal, a loud noise (or no sound) w ill come out from the speakers, affecting your ears or damaging the speakers.

◆ DOLBY DIGITAL (DVD VIDEO/DVD-RW only)

Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal.

D-PCM Select this when the player is

DOLBY DIGITAL

connected to an audio component lacking a built-in Dolby Digital decoder. You can select whether the signals conform to Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) or not by making adjustments to the “DOWNMIX” item in “AUDIO SETUP” (page 94).

Select this when the player is connected to an audio component with a built-in Dolby Digital decoder.

OFF

STANDARD

DOLBY SURROUND

ON

D-PCM

OFF

◆ DTS (DVD VIDEO only)

Selects whether or not to output DTS signal.

OFF Select this when th e player is

ON Selec t this when the player is

connected to an audio component lacking a built-in DTS decoder.

connected to an audio component with a built-in DTS decoder.

c

continued

93

Settings and A djustments

94

Additional Information

Troubleshooting

If you experience any of the following difficulties while using the player, use this troubleshooting guide to help remedy the problem before requesting repairs. Should any problem persist, consult your nearest Sony dealer.

Power

The power is not turned on.

, Check that the AC power cord is connected

securely.

Picture

There is no picture/picture noise appears.

, Re-connect the connecting cord securely. , The connecting cord is damaged. , Check the connection to your TV (page 21)

and switch the input sele ctor on your TV so that the signal from the player appears on the TV screen.

, The disc is dirty or flawed. , If the picture output from your player goes

through your VCR to get to your TV or if you are connected to a combination TV/ VIDEO player, the copy-protection signal applied to some DVD programs could affect picture quality. If you still experience problems even when you connect your player directly to your TV, try connecting your player to your TV’s S VIDEO input (page 21).

, You have selected “PROGRESSIVE” in

“COMPONENT OUT” even though your TV cannot accept the signal in progressive format. In this case, set the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT/SCAN SELECT switch on the back panel of the player to INTERLACE. When you can see the TV screen correctly, set “COMPONENT OUT” to “INTERLACE” and reset the COMPONENT VIDEO OUTPUT/SCAN SELECT switch to SELECTABLE.

, Eve n if your TV is compati ble with

progressive format (480p) signals, the image may be affected when you set “COMPONENT OUT” to “PROGRESSIVE.” In this case, set “COMPONENT OUT” to “INTERLACE.”

Even though you set the aspect ratio in “TV TYPE” of “SCREEN SETUP,” the picture does not fill the screen.

, The aspect ratio of the disc is fixed on your

DVD.

Sound

There is no sound.

, Re-connect the connecting cord securely. , The connecting cord is damaged. , The player is connected to the wrong input

jack on the amplifier (receiver) (page 26, 27, 28).

, The amplifier (receiver) inp ut is not

correctly set.

, The player is in pause mode or in Slow-

motion Play mode.

, The player is in fast forward or fast reverse

mode.

, If the audio signal does not come through

the DIGITAL OUTPUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) jack, check the audio settings (page 94).

Sound is noisy.

, When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks,

noise will come from the AUDIO OUTPUT L/R 1/2 jacks or DIGITAL OUTPUT (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) jack (page 34).

Sound distortion occurs.

, Set “AUDIO ATT” in “AUDIO SETUP” to

“ON” (page 93).

The sound volume is low.

, The so und volume is low on some DVDs.

The sound volume may improve if you set “AUDIO DRC” to “TV MODE” (page 93).

, Set “AUDIO ATT” in “AUDIO SETUP” to

“OFF” (page 93).

95

96

1-23

Operation

The remote does not function.

, The batteries in the remot e are weak. , There are obstacles between the remote and

the player.

, The distance between the remote and the

player is too far.

, The remote is not pointed at the remote

sensor on the player.

, The COMMAND MODE switch setting on

the remote does not mat ch the setting on the player (page 17).

The disc does not play.

, The disc is skewed. , The player cannot play certain discs (page

6).

, The region code on the DVD does not match

the player.

, Moisture has condensed inside the play er

(page 3).

, The player cannot play CD-Rs, CD-RWs,

DVD-Rs, or DVD-RWs (video mode) that are not finalized (page 7).

The MP3 audio t rack cannot be played (page 43).

, The DATA CD is not recorded in the MP3

format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1/ Level 2 or Joliet.

, The MP3 audio track does not have the

extension “.MP3.”

, The data is not formatte d in MP3 even

though it has the extension “.MP3.”

, The data is not MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 data. , The player cannot play audio tracks in

MP3PRO format.

“Copyright lock” appears and the screen turns blue when playing a DVD-RW disc.

, Images taken from digital broadcasts, etc.,

may contain copy protection signals, such as complete copy protection signals, single copy signals, and restriction-free signals. When images that contain copy protection signals are played, a blue screen may appear instead of the images. It may take awhile while the player looks for playable images.

The title of the MP3 audio album or track is not correctly displayed.

, The player can only display numbers and

alphabet. Other characters are displayed as “*.”

The disc does not start playing from the beginning.

, Program Play, Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, or

A-B Repeat Play has been selected (page

45).

, Resume play has taken effec t (page 39) .

The player starts playing the disc automatically.

, The disc features an auto playback function. , “AUTO PLAY” in “CUSTOM SETUP” is

set to “ON” (page 92).

Playback stops automatically.

, While playing discs with an auto pause

signal, the player stops playback at the auto pause signal.

The FLIP button does not operate.

, The disc you are trying to flip does not have

a side B.

You cannot perform some functions such as Stop, Search, Slow-motion Play, Repeat Play, Shuffle Play, or Program Play.

, Depending on the disc, you may not be able

to do some of the above operations. See the operating manual that comes with the disc.

The language for the sound track cannot be changed.

, Try using the DVD’s menu instead of the

direct selection button on the remote (page

40).

, Multilingual tracks a re not recorded on the

DVD being played.

, The DVD prohibits the changing of the

language for the sound trac k.

The subtitle language cannot be changed or turned off.

, Try using the DVD’s menu instead of the

direct selection button on the remote (page

40).

c

continued

, Multil ingual subtitles are not recor ded on

the DVD being played.

, The DVD prohibits the changi ng of the

subtitles.

The angles cannot be changed.

, Try us ing the DVD’s menu instead of the

direct selection button on the remote (page

40).

, Multi- angles are not recorded on the DVD

being played.

, The angle can only be changed when the

“ANGLE” indicator lights up on the front panel display (page 10).

, The DVD prohibits changing of the angles.

The player does not operate properly.

, When static electricity, etc., causes the

player to operate abnormally, unplug the player.

Nothing is displayed on th e front pane l display.

, “DIMMER” in “CUSTOM SETUP” is set

to “OFF” or “AUTO OFF.” Set “DIMMER” to any setting other than “OFF” or “AUTO OFF” (page 92).

5 numbers or letters are displayed on the screen and on the front panel display.

Additional Info rmation

97

, The self-diagnosis function was acti vated.

(See the table on page 98.)

The front cover does not open and “LOCKED” appears on the front panel display.

, Child Lock is set (page 36).

The front cover does not open and “TRAY LOCKED” appears on the front panel display.

, Contact your Sony dealer or local

authorized Sony service facility.

“Data error” appears on the TV screen when playing a DATA CD.

, The MP3 audio track you want to play is

broken.

, The data is not MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 data.

98

Self-diagnosis Function

(When letters/numbers appear in the display)

When the self-diagnosis function is activated to prevent the player from malfunctioning, a five-character service number (e.g., C 13 50) with a combination of a letter and four digits appears on the screen and the front panel display. In this case, check the following table.

First three characters of the service number

C 13 The d isc is dirty.

C 31 The d isc is not inserted

C 32 The f ront cover

E XX

(xx is a number)

Cause and/or corrective action

, Clean the disc with a soft

cloth (page 8).

correctly. , Re-insert the disc

correctly.

automatically opens and the player enters standby mode. , Check that there is

nothing wrong inside the rotary table, such as a fallen disc. After you have checked the inside of the rotary table and resolved any possible problems, press H.

To prevent a m alfunction, the player has performed the self-diagnosis funct ion. , Contact your nearest

Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility and give the 5character service nu mber. Example: E 61 10

Glossary

Chapter (page 10, 14, 63)

Sections of a picture or a music feature that are smaller than titles. A title is composed of several chapters. Depending on the dis c, no chapters may be re corded.

Dolby Digital (page 28, 94)

Digital audio compression technology developed by Dolb y Laboratories. This technology conforms to 5.1-channel surround sound. The rear channel is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel in this format. Dolby Digital provides the same 5.1 discrete channels of high quality digital audio found in Dolby Digital cinema audio systems. Good channel separation is realized because all of the channel data are recorded discretely and little deterioration is realized because all channel data processing is digital.

Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) (page 27, 94)

Audio signal processing technology that Dolby Laboratories developed for surround sound. When the input signal cont ains a surround component, the Pro Logi c process outputs the front, center and rear signals. The rear channel is monaural.

DTS (page 28, 71, 95)

Digital audio compression technology that Digital Theater Systems, Inc. developed. This technology conforms to 5.1-channel surround sound. The rear channel is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel in this format. DTS provides the same 5.1 discrete channels of high quality digital audio. Good channel separation is realized because all of the channel data is recorded discretely and little deterioration is realized because all channel data processing is digital.

DVD VIDEO (page 6)

A disc that contains up to 8 hours of moving pictures even though its diameter is the same as a CD. The data capacity of a single-layer and singlesided DVD is 4.7 GB (Giga Byte), which is 7 times that of a CD. The data capacity of a double-layer and single-sided DVD is 8.5 GB, a single-layer and double-sided DVD is

9.4 GB, and double-layer and double-sided DVD is 17 GB. The picture data uses the MPEG 2 format, one of the worldwide standards of digital compression technology. The picture data is compressed to about 1/40 (average) of its original size. The DVD al so uses a variabl e rate coding technology that changes the data to be allocated according to the status of the picture. Audio information is recorded in a multi-channel format, such as Dolby Digital, allowing you to enjoy a more real audio presence. Furthermore, various adva nced funct ions such as the multi-angle, multilingual, and Parental Control functions are provided with the DVD.

DVD-RW (page 6, 41)

A DVD-RW is a recordable and rewritable disc with the same size as the DVD VIDEO. The DVD-RW can be recorded in two different modes: VR mode and Video mode. VR (Video Recording) mode enables various programming and ed iting functions, some of which are limited in the case of Video mode. Video mode complies with DVD VIDEO format and can be played on other DVD players while a DVD-RW recorded in VR mode can only be played on DVD-RW compliant players. The “DVD-RW” appearing in this manual, and the on-screen displays refer to DVD-RWs in VR mode.

Film based software, Video based software (page 91)

DVDs can be classified as Film based or Video based software. Film based DVDs contain the same images (24 frames per second) that are shown at movie theaters. Video based DVDs, such as television dramas or sit-coms, displays images at 30 frames (or 60 fields) per second.

c

continued

Interlace format (page 91)

Interlace format shows every other line of an image as a single “field” and is the standard method for displaying images on television. The even number field sho ws the even numbered lines of an image, and the odd numbered field shows the odd numbered lines of an image.

Index (CD)/Video Index (VIDEO CD) (page 10, 14, 63)

A number that divides a track into sections to easily locate the point you want on a CD or VIDEO CD. Depending on the disc, no index may be recorded.

Progressive format (page 91)

Compared to the Interlace format that alternately shows every other line of an image (field) to create one frame, the Progressive format shows the entire image at once as a single frame. This means that while the Interlace format can show 30 frames (60 fields) in one second, the Progressive format can show 60 frames in one second. The overall picture quality increases and still images, text, and horizontal lines appear sharper. This player is compatible with the 480 progressive format.

Additional Informatio n

99

Scene (page 10)

On a VIDEO CD with PBC (playback control) functions, the menu screens, moving pictures and still pictures are divided into sections called “scenes.”

Title (page 10, 14, 63)

The longest section of a picture or music feature on a DVD, movie, etc., in video software, or the entire album in audio software.

Track (page 10, 14, 63)

Sections of a picture or a music feature on a CD or VIDEO CD (the length of a song).

100

1-24

Language Code List

For details, see pages 71, 75, 89. The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.

Code Language Code Language Code Langu age Code Language

1027 Afar 1028 Abkhazian 1032 Afrikaans 1039 Amharic 1044 Arabic 1045 Assamese 1051 Aymara 1052 Azerbaijani 1053 Bashkir 1057 Byelorussian 1059 Bulgarian 1060 Bihari 1061 Bislama 1066 Bengali;

Bangla 1067 Tibetan 1070 Breton 1079 Catalan 1093 Corsican 1097 Czech 1103 Welsh 1105 Danish 1109 German 1130 Bhutani 1142 Greek 1144 English 1145 Esperanto 1149 Spanish 1150 Estonian 1151 Basque 1157 Persian 1165 Finnish 1166 Fiji 1171 Faroese 1174 French 1181 Frisian

1183 Irish 1186 Scots Gaelic 1194 Galician 1196 Guarani 1203 Gujarati 1209 Hausa 1217 Hindi 1226 Croatian 1229 Hungarian 1233 Armenian 1235 Interlingua 1239 Interlingue 1245 Inupiak 1248 Indonesian 1253 Icelandic 1254 Italian 1257 Hebrew 1261 Japanese 1269 Yiddish 1283 Javanese 1287 Georgian 1297 Kazakh 1298 Greenlandic 1299 Cambodian 1300 Kannada 1301 Korean 1305 Kashmiri 1307 Kurdish 1311 Kirghiz 1313 Latin 1326 Lingala 1327 Laothian 1332 Lithuanian 1334 Latvian;

Lettish

1345 Malagasy

1347 Maori 1349 Macedonian 1350 Malayalam 1352 Mongolian 1353 Moldavian 1356 Marathi 1357 Malay 1358 Maltese 1363 Burmese 1365 Nauru 1369 Nepali 1376 Dutch 1379 Norwegian 1393 Occitan 1403 (Afan)Oromo 1408 Oriya 1417 Punjabi 1428 Polish 1435 Pashto;

Pushto 1436 Portuguese 1463 Quechua 1481 Rhaeto-

Romance 1482 Kirundi 1483 Romanian 1489 Russian 1491 Kinyarwanda 1495 Sanskrit 1498 Sindhi 1501 Sangho 1502 Serbo-

Croatian 1503 Singhalese 1505 Slovak 1506 Slovenian

1507 Samoan 1508 Shona 1509 Somali 1511 Albanian 1512 Serbian 1513 Siswati 1514 Sesotho 1515 Sundanese 1516 Swedish 1517 Swahili 1521 Tamil 1525 Telugu 1527 Tajik 1528 Thai 1529 Tigrinya 1531 Turkmen 1532 Tagalog 1534 Setswana 1535 Tonga 1538 Turkish 1539 Tsonga 1540 Tatar 1543 Twi 1557 Ukrainian 1564 Urdu 1572 Uzbek 1581 Vietnamese 1587 Volapük 1613 Wolof 1632 Xhosa 1665 Yoruba 1684 Chinese 1697 Zulu

1703 Not specified

102

1-25 E

1-25

SECTION 2

)

DISASSEMBLY

Note: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.

DVP-CX875P

2-1. UPPER CASE REMOVAL

3 Three screws

2 Two screws

(tapping)

4 Upper case

(tapping)

1 Two screws

(tapping)

2-3. POWER BLOCK REMOVAL

7 Two screws

(+BV3

×

8)

8 Power block

3 Two screws

(+BV3

×

10)

5

4

6 Connector

2 Two screws

(+BV3

1 Screw

(CN201)

×

10)

(+BV3 × 10)

2-2. FRONT PANEL BLOCK REMOVAL

4 Two screws

(+BV3 × 6

)

3 Two screws

(+BV3 × 10

5 Front panel block

)

1 Flexible flat cable

(CN307)

2-4. MECHANISM DECK ASSEMBLY

REMOVAL

4 Four screws

(+BV3

7 Mechanical

deck assembly

× 6)

5 Two screws

(+BV3

× 10)

1 Flexible

flat cable (CN003)

6 Screw

2 Flexible

3 Flexible

flat cable (CN204)

(+BV3

flatcable (CN203)

×

6

2 Flexible flat cable

(CN103)

Note: After installing the mechanism deck assembly,

perform disc sensor adjust and turn table adjust. (Refer to “6-5-8. 300 CHG Mecha Con Menu 2”.)

2-1

2-5. AV-66 BOARD REMOVAL 2-7. MB-107 BOARD REMOVAL

4 AV-66 board

1 Flexible flat cable

(CN201)

3 Three screws

(+BV3

×

10)

2 Connector

(CN202)

2 Flexible flat cable

(CN501)

4 Connector (CN101)

1 Flexible flat cable

(CN103)

5 Six screws

(+BV3

×

8)

3 Flexible flat cable

(CN601)

6 MB-107 board

2-6. VD-33 BOARD REMOVAL 2-8. T DRIVING BLOCK REMOVAL

4 VD-33 board

1 Flexible flat cable (CN103)

3 Five screws

(+BV3

×

2 Connector

(CN101)

10)

2 Three screws

(cushion stopper)

1 Flexible flat cable

(CN101)

3 T Driving block

2-2

2-9. AI-25 BOARD REMOVAL

1 Two screws

(+BV3

×

10)

CN001

CN002

2 Mechanism deck block

2-11. MECHANISM DECK BLOCK REMOVAL

1 Four screws

(+BVTP3

×

8)

2 AI-25 board

2-10. CENTER GUIDE ASSEMBL Y REMO VAL

4 Three screws

1 Two flexible flat cables

(CN002, CN004)

(+BV3

×

10)

2 Screw

×

(+BV3

6)

3 Chuck driving link

5 Center guide assembly

2-12. OPTICAL PICK-UP REMOVAL

1Slider (U)

8Optical pick-up

6Insulator (BR)

4Three step screws (M)

5

3Two flexible flat cables

2

7Two insulators (BR)

2-3

2-13. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

ZSSR113M (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

LC-78 (LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR)

LL-12 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

TK-63 (RELAY)

LS-62 (LOADING SENSOR)

CK-118 (DISC SENSOR)

LR-17 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

FR-189 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

CS-58 (CHUCKING SENSOR)

SW-374 (EJECT SWITCH)

DA-32 (DOOR SENSOR)

TS-154 (TURN TABLE SENSOR)

DM-105

(DOOR MOTOR) FL-128 (FUNCTION SWITCH)

AV-66 (AUDIO AMP)

VD-33 (VIDEO BUFFER)

AI-25 (LOADING/TURN TABLE/ DOOR MOTOR DRIVE,

MB-107

INTERFACE)

(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) TM-129 (TURN TABLE MOTOR)

2-4 E

2-4

SECTION 3

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

DVP-CX875P

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM

MB-107 BOARD

BASE UNIT

KHM-270AAA/

SERVICE ASSY

OPTICAL DEVICE

DVD/CD

PD IC

FOCUS

COIL

TRACKING

COIL

INLIMIT

SW

SPINDLE

MM

MOTOR

SLED

MM

MOTOR

(SEE PAGE 4-13 to 4-32)

RF

IC201

DVD/CD RF AMP,

SERVO ERROR

PROCESS

IC202

FOCUS/

TRACKING

COIL DRIVE,

SPINDLE/

SLED/

LOADING

MOTOR DRIVE

SIGO

16M DRAM

SERVO DSP

IC702

64M

NAND

FLASH

IC303

IC301

ARP,

SDI 0 – 7

CDDOUT, CDDATA,

CDBCK, CDLRCK

IC701

NAND FLASH I/F,

EXTENSION I/O

IC106

32M FLASH

PARALLEL BUS

or

IC108

1M SRAM

IC404, 405

16M SDRAM

IC107

OTP

IC403

AV DECODER

IC104

SYSTEM

CONTROL

CDDOUT, ACH12,

ACH34, ACH56,

BCK, LRCK

SERIAL BUS

IIC BUS

IC602

I/P CONVERTER

16M SDRAM

IC501

AUDIO DSP

IC101

EEPROM

IC603

IC604

VIDEO

ENCORDER

SPDIF

IC503

AUDIO

D/A CONVERTER

SW+5V

1.8V

SW+3.3V

M+11V

VD-33 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-39)

SW+5V

Y, Cb, Cr

V, Y, C

SW–10V

AV-66 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-43)

IC102

VIDEO

BUFFER

+5V

J102 (1/2)

J101

J102

IC203

Y

COMPONENT

P

B

VIDEO OUT

P

R

J104

S-LINK

S102

COMMAND MODE

1

2

3

S101

SCAN SELECT

SELECTABLE

INTERLACE

PROGRESSIVE

J301

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

LINE OUTVIDEO 1VIDEO 2

2

1

DIGITAL

OUT

S VIDEO OUT

TM-129 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-59)

M131 TURN

MM

TABLE

MOTOR

LC-78 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

M202

CHUCKING

LOADING

MOTOR

M201

MOTOR

MM

TK-63 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-8)

SW-374 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-56)

JOG SHUTTLE

PUSH

ENTER

S301

EJECT

LL-12 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

DISC

LIGHT L

DISC

LIGHT R

LR-17 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

FL-128 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-55)

FUNCTION

LED

FUNCTION

KEY

D241

D281

CS-58 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

PH261, 262

CHUCKING

SENSOR 1, 2

DA-32 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-60)

PH161, 162

DOOR

SENSOR

ND101

FLUORESCENT

INDICATOR

TUBE

FR-189 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-47)

05

IC103

LED

DRIVE

FUNCTION

KEY

LS-62 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

PH221, 222

LOADING

SENSOR 1, 2

DM-105 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-66)

M191

MM

DOOR

MOTOR

IC106

IF CON

BZ101

S-LINK

SW–10V

EVER+5V

SW+5V

IC101

REMOTE

COMMANDER

RECEIVER

CK-118 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

D001, Q003

DISC

SENSOR

PH001

TURN TABLE

SENSOR 1

SW+5V

TS-154 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-59)

PH101 TURN TABLE SENSOR 2, 3

KEY BOARD

J101

IC301

LOADING/

TURN

TABLE MOTOR DRIVER

IC302

DOOR

MOTOR

DRIVE

AI-25 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-35)

SW+5V

REG

P-CONT

–10V

SW

SW–10V

EVER+5V

EVER+11V

IC202

AUDIO

AMP

SWITCHING

REG.

POWER BLOCK

(ZSSR113M) (SEE PAGE 4-63)

J102 (2/2)

D101 – 104

L

AUDIO 2

R

F101

L

AUDIO 1

R

LINE OUT

AC IN

3-1 3-2

DVP-CX875P

3-2. RF/SERVO BLOCK DIAGRAM

BASE UNIT

KHM-270AAA/SERVICE ASSY

OPTICAL DEVICE

DVD/CD

PD IC

DVD/CD

LD MODULE

RF

A – D

E – H

VC

PD

DVD LD

CD LD

VR

TK-63 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-8)

CN001

22

24 25 17 16

15 23 18 26

20

13

8

6

12

CN002

IC201 2 (DVD play) 200 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV

570 mVp-p

RF

5

3

A – D

2 10 11

12

E – H

4

9

1

VC

7

14

19

21

15

PD

DVD LD

CD LD

VR

IC201 2 (CD play) 200 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV

MB-107 BOARD (1/6)

(SEE PAGE 4-13, 15, 19)

CN203

22

24 25 17 16

15 23 18 26

20

13

8

6

12

550 mVp-p

Q201

DVD LD DRIVE

Q202

CD LD DRIVE

+3.3V

IC201 tl (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV

IC201

DVD/CD RF AMP,

DIGITAL ERROR PROCESS

2

RF IN

14

ı

A – D

11

7

ı

A2 – D2

10

15

ı

E – H

18

19

VC

21

DVDPD

22

CDPD

25

DVD LD

CD LD

26

IC202

1.4 Vp-p

SIGO

FE TE PI

MIRR

TZC

SRD

SWD SCLK SDEN

DFT

MON

LDON

IC201 tl (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV

1.4 Vp-p

59

42 41 36

33 37

45

ı

48

38 44

39VCI

27

SSDFCTI SS MON

IC201 rs (DVD play) 100 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

IC201 ra (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

FE TE PI

180 mVp-p

1.5 Vp-p

ADC1

125

ADC0

124

ADC2

126

148

MIRR

152

TZC

GIO6/SDI

159

GIO7/SDO

161

GIO8/SCK

162

GIO13

167

DFCTI

147

ADC7

131

129

ADC5, 6

130

GIO0/INT2

153

IC201 rs (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

860 mVp-p

IC201 ra (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ms/DIV

1.7 Vp-p

IC301

(1/2)

SERVO DSP

SIGO

IC301 <zxb (DVD play) 100 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

160 mVp-p

IC301 <zxv (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

1.4 Vp-p

SIGNAL PROCESSOR

(SEE PAGE 3-5)

IC301 <zxb (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

860 mVp-p

IC301 <zxv (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 mV/DIV

1.7 Vp-p

FOCUS

COIL

TRACKING

COIL

INLIMIT

SPINDLE

MOTOR

SLED

MOTOR

SW

4042

VREF

43

FCS±

4 3

TRK±

2 1

3

1 2

9

ı

6

CN003

INLIM

MM

SPM±

SLA±, SLB±

CN004

23 24

25 26

3

1 2

9

ı

6

FCS±

TRK±

INLIM

SPM±

SLA±, SLB±

4 3

2 1

7

9 8

1

ı

4

CN204

NAND FLASH/

300 CHG MECHA

CONTROL

(SEE PAGE 3-13)

LDM+

LDM–

37 36

35 34

47 46

27 28

32

ı

29

25 24

FOCUS

COIL

DRIVE

TRACKING

COIL

DRIVE

SPINDLE

MOTOR

DRIVE

SLED

MOTOR

DRIVE

LOADING

MOTOR

DRIVE

TSD-M

48

1

19

3 4

5

45

PS

39

13

21

7

10

20

22

16 17

15

FDRV±

TDRV±

SLE

SPFG

MDSO, MDPO

SPMUTE

SLDA, SLDB

TSD

LMP, LMM

LMCTL

20

PDM 2, 3

22

15

PDM 0, 1

17

127 A D C 3

ADC4

128

MDSO

MDPO

GIO1/INT3

PWM0, 1

154 146

155

143 14432 33

GIO9/GREF

GIO2/INT4

163 164

XRESET

GIO10/FGIN

PWM2

HINT

HCS

11

12

61

XSDPIT

XSDPCS

XRST

XDRVMUTE

XLDON

SYSTEM CONTROL

(SEE PAGE 3-7)

05

3-3 3-4

3-3. SIGNAL PROCESSOR BLOCK DIAGRAM

MB-107 BOARD (2/6)

(SEE PAGE 4-15 to 4-17)

IC301 <zzz (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 100 ns/DIV

RF/SERVO

(SEE PAGE 3-4)

IC301 <zzc (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV

1.4 Vp-p

SIG0

1.4 Vp-p

111

113

RAMA 0 – 9

65 – 74

MA 0 – 9

RFIN1

RFIN2

IC303

16M DRAM

36 – 43 46 – 53

MD 0 – 15

IC301

ARP

RAMD 0 – 15

(2/2)

WE, RAS

LCAS, UCAS

29 31

30

SD 0 – 7

SDCK XSHD XSRQ XSAK

SDEF

DATA/EMU1

BCLK/EMU0

LRCK/TDO

D OUT

DVP-CX875P

IC404, 405

16M SDRAM

TDIKT TDIGA TCK TMS XFRRST

77

ı

84

57

ı 59 63 64

169 170 175

SDI 0 – 7

XSRQ, XSAK, SDEF

SDCK, XSHD,

NAND FLASH/

300 CHG MECHA

CONTROL

(SEE PAGE 3-13)

37

ı

40

DTI 0 – 7

42

ı

45

ICLKI IERRIn

47

ı

ISTARTIn

51

IVALIn IREQON

32 CDIN1I 34 CDBCKI 35 CDLRKI

31 CDIN2I56

ADAD 0 – 11

105-108 110-113 115 116 118 120

ADDT 0 – 15

135-138 140-143

145-148 150 151 153 154

SDDQ 0 – 15

CS

121

SD CS1On

CLK, CKE,

DQML, DQMU

122 124 125 127 129 130

132 133

CS, WE,

CAS, RAS

05

SYSTEM CONTROL

(SEE PAGE 3-7)

XARPIT

XARPCS

XWAIT

33MARP

XWRH

XRD

XFRRST

HA 0 – 21

XRST

512FSAVD

XAVDCS2 XAVDCS3

27MAVD

XAVDIT

DREQ0

DACK0

DREQ1

DACK1

HA 0 – 21

HD 0 – 15HD 0 – 15

168 169

XRD

XWRH

171-174 176-179 181-184 186-189 191-194

7 – 10 12 – 15 17 – 20

97 99

98 101 102TRST

196 197

207

22

166 167

158 160 200 199

2 – 5

TDI TCK TDO TMS TRST

HCSn HRWn

RSTn ACLK

HAD23I HAD22I

CLKI SCLKIN HWAIT0n HIRQ0n

HAD 0 – 21HA 0 – 21

H DATA 0 – 15

IC403

AV DECODER

DM ACK1In

DM RQ1On

DM ACK0In

202 – 205

DM RQ0On

DVDO – 7

D1CLKO

ACH12O

LRCKO

BCKO

84

ı

87 89

ı

92

95

24 28 29 30DO

DVDO – 7

27M CLK

ACH12 LRCK BCK SPDIF1

VIDEO

(SEE PAGE 3-9)

AUDIO

(SEE PAGE 3-11)

26

XINT

27

XCS

28

XWAT

150

CLKIN

24

XWR

25

XRD

2 ı

A 0 – 7 HA 0 – 7

9

134

ı

HD 8 – 15

141

174

TCK

TDI

173 172

TMS

171

LAND

(FOR J TAG)

HD 0 – 15D 0 – 7

3-5 3-6

DVP-CX875P

3-4. SYSTEM CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM

MB-107 BOARD (3/6)

(SEE PAGE 4-21, 23)

SIGNAL PROCESSOR

(SEE PAGE 3-5)

NAND FLASH/

300 CHG MECHA

CONROL

(SEE PAGE 3-13)

RF/SERVO

(SEE PAGE 3-4)

HA 0 – 21

HD 0 – 15

XRD

XWRH

XARPIT

XARPCS

XWAIT

XRST

HA 0 – 4, 19

HD 8 – 15

XRD

XWRH

XRST

XFRRST

XRST

XSDPIT

XSDPCS

XDRVMUTE

XLDON

XAVDIT

DREQ0 DACK0 DREQ1

DACK1 XAVDCS2 XAVDCS3

HA 0 – 21

HD 0 – 15

HA 0 – 4, 19

HD 8 – 15

XRD

XWRH

XRD

XWRH

IC106

32M FLASH

1 – 5 102 – 109 111 – 118 120

17

INT1

62

CS4X XWAIT

67 35

XRST

INT2

18

CS5X

63 48

XDRVMUTE XLDON

82

INTO

16

DREQ0

46

DACK0

47

DREQ1

49 50

DACK1 CS2X

60

CS3X

61

IC107

or

OTP

HA 0 – 21 HA 1 – 21

HA 0 – 21 HD 0 – 15

1.7 Vp-p (16.5 MHz)

85 – 100

IC104 tf

HD 0 – 15 HD 0 – 15

SYSTEM

CONTROL

IC104

CSOX

7058 71 72

XRD

XWRH

XWRL

XSRWE

84 17 WE

CS1X

59 6 CS

X1

SDA SCL

WP

AN3

WIDE

SI0 SO0 SCO

XIFCS

INT4

XFRRST

INT3

CS6X

CPUCK

MA_MUTE

SO1 SC1

XDACS

53

X2

54

38 39

7

15

36

25 26 27 51 20 76 19 65 77 83 29 30 79

X101

16.5MHz

5 6 7

SDA SCL WP

IC101

EEPROM

HA 1 – 16

HD 0 – 15

XWRH XRD

1 – 5 18 – 21 24 – 27 42 – 44

7 – 10 13 – 16 29 – 32 35 – 38

39

LB

40

UB

41

OE

A 0 – 15

I/O 0 – 15

IC108

1M SRAM

XFRRST

SI0 SO0 SC0

XIFCS IFBSY

IPSW

WIDE

SCL SDA XRST

XGAIT XGACS CPUCK MA_MUTE SO1 SC1 XDACS

VIDEO

(SEE PAGE 3-10)

VIDEO

(SEE PAGE 3-9)

NAND FLASH/

300 CHG MECHA

CONROL

(SEE PAGE 3-13)

CN103

(1/2)

5 6 7 4 3 2

SI0 SO0 SC0 XIFCS IFBSY XFRRST

INTERFACE

CONTROL

(SEE PAGE 3-15)

AUDIO

48/44.1k

81

XFRRST

XRST

SIGNAL PROCESSOR

(SEE PAGE 3-5)

33MARP

27MAVD

512FSAVD

05

IC103 8

1.5 Vp-p (27 MHz) IC103 4

3.5 Vp-p (27 MHz)

X102

27MHz

14

FSEL

IC103

XTI

7

8

XTO

PLL

512-2OUT

512-1OUT

9

10

427-2OUT

1533-1OUT

IC103 qg

3.2 Vp-p (33.87 MHz)

IC103 9, 0

DVD: 3.3 Vp-p (24.57 MHz) CD: 3.3 Vp-p (22.58 MHz)

512FS2CH

(SEE PAGE 3-11)

3-7 3-8

3-5. VIDEO BLOCK DIAGRAM

MB-107 BOARD (4/6)

(SEE PAGE 4-25, 27)

1.6 Vp-p (66 MHz)

DVP-CX875P

IC602 <z/c

(SEE PAGE 3-8)

05

SIGNAL

PROCESSOR

(SEE PAGE 3-6)

SYSTEM

CONTROL

DVD 0 – 7

27M CLK

SDA

SCL

XRST

DVD 0 – 7

7

ı

PI 2 – 9

14

CLKI

2

SDA

135

SCL

136

137

SRN

440PLL_EN

MA 0 – 11

MD 0 – 15

IC602

I/P CONVERTOR

YO 0 – 9

CO 0 – 9

PO 2 – 9

80 – 83 86 – 89 94 – 97

110 – 113 116 – 119 122 – 125 129 – 132

41 – 45 48 – 52

56 – 60 63 – 67

22 – 25 28 – 31

CLKO

104WE

103MCLK

100RAS 102CAS

A 0 – 11

DQ 0 – 15

Y 0 – 9

CBCR 0 – 9

PO 0 – 7

16M SDRAM

2 – 9

12 13

14 – 18 26 – 30

53 – 55 58 – 62

IC604 es

3.4 Vp-p (27 MHz)

32

CLKIN

63

CLKIN_2

21

SDA

SCLK

22

RESET B33

IC603

P_Y (0) – (9)

P_C (0) – (9)

S (2) – (9)

IC604 rs

850m Vp-p (H)

IC604

VIDEO ENCORDER

IC604 el

950mVp-p (H)

IC604 ek

650mVp-p (H)

IC604 rd

950mVp-p (H)

44DAC A

43DAC B

42DAC C

39DAC D

38DAC E

37DAC F

47RSET 1

35RSET 2

IC604 rf

1.1 Vp-p (H)

IC604 ej

650mVp-p (H)

SYSTEM

CONTROL

(SEE PAGE 3-8)

RV601

VIDEO LEVEL

RV602

COMP OUT

WIDE

IPSW

CN601

13

7

11

5

3

1

15

9

INTERFACE

CONTROL

(SEE PAGE 3-15)

V

Y

SC

Y

Cb

Cr

WIDE

IP_SW

V_MUTE

S_LINK

CSEL2

CSEL1

VD-33 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-39)

CN103

3

9

5

11

13

15

1

7

CN101

6

5

3

1

IC102 ed

IC102

VIDEO BUFFER

V

Y

C

Y

Cb

Cr

+5V

VIDEO IN

3

8

6

7

16

12

15

17

WIDE SWITCH

VIDEO OUT

Y IN

C IN

MUTE1

MUTE2

Y IN

Cb IN

Cr IN

Q105 – 107

IC102 w; IC102 ws

1.3 Vp-p (H)

Y OUT

C OUT

Y OUT

Cb OUT

Cr OUT

33

29

31

24

22

20

COMMAND MODE

2.4 Vp-p (H)

2.0 Vp-p (H)

IC102 ea

1.8 Vp-p (H)

1.3 Vp-p (H)

S101

SCAN SELECT

SELECTABLE

INTERLACE

PROGRESSIVE

J104

S-LINK

S102

1

2

3

IC102 wl

IC102 wf

2.0 Vp-p (H)

J101

J103

J102

VIDEO 1

LINE OUT

VIDEO 2

Y

1

C

S VIDEO OUT

Y

2

C

Y

COMPONENT

P

B

VIDEO OUT

P

R

3-9 3-10

DVP-CX875P

3-6. AUDIO BLOCK DIAGRAM

MB-107 BOARD (5/6)

(SEE PAGE 4-29)

SIGNAL PROCESSOR

(SEE PAGE 3-6)

SYSTEM

CONTROL

(SEE PAGE 3-8)

05

SPDIF1

ACH12

BCK

LRCK

XRST

IC503 2

DVD: 4.4 Vp-p (3.1 MHz) CD: 4.4 Vp-p (2.9 MHz)

SO1 SC1

XDACS

512FS2CH

MA_MUTE

SC1

SO1

SDTI

3

BICK2 LRCK4

MCLK1 CSN6 PDN5

DVD: 4.3 Vp-p (48 .1 kHz) CD: 4.3 Vp-p (44.1 kHz)

CCLK7 CDTI

8

DVD: 3.3 Vp-p (24 .57 MHz) CD: 3.3 Vp-p (22.58 MHz)

IC503

AUDIO

D/A CONVERTER

IC503 4

IC503 1

AOUTL+ AOUTL–

AOUTR+ AOUTR–

AV-66 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-43)

CN501

16 15

14 13

D501

20DZFL

12

5 3

7 9

6

SPDIF

ALT+ ALT–

ART+ ART–

MUTE_2CH

CN201

2

9

11

7 5

8

POWER 2

(SEE PAGE 3-19)

AUDIO AMP

5 6

3 2

MUTE V

IC202

+ –

7

1

Q202, 206, 208

MUTE DRIVE

Q211

MUTE

Q210

MUTE

Q212

BUFFER

1

D IN

J202

CN202

3

OPTICAL

J201

COAXIAL

L

R

L

R

IC203

AUDIO 1

AUDIO 2

A_MUTE

DIGITAL

LINE OUT

(SEE PAGE 3-15)

OUT

INTERFACE

CONTROL

3-11 3-12

3-7. NAND FLASH/300 CHG MECHA CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM

DVP-CX875P

MB-107 BOARD (6/6)

(SEE PAGE 4-31)

SYSTEM

CONTROL

(SEE PAGE 3-7)

SIGNAL

PROCESSOR

(SEE PAGE 3-6)

05

HA0 – 4, 19

HD8 – 15

XWRH

XRD

XRST

XFRRST

TCK

TMS

TDIGA

TDIKT

HA0 – 4, 19

HD8 – 15

18 – 21 24 – 27

HD8 – 15

IC702

64M NAND FLASH

10 11

13 – 16

1 3 – 9

40GND

4XWE

42XRE

5XWP 3ALE

2CLE 43XCE 41R/B

HA0 – 4, 19

HD8 – 15

NAND FLASH I/F,

EXTENSION I/O

55 NFTEST 54 NFWE 53 NFRE 51 NFWP 50 NFALE 49 NFCLE 48 NFCE 46 NFBSY

18 XWR

19 XRD

34 XRST

41 TRST

43 TCK

44 TMS

45 TDI

79 TDO

IC701

XGAIT

DRSW2

17 XGAIT

20XGACS

XGACS

24CPUCK

CPUCK

25LDSW1 26LDSW2

29DSENS

30TSENS 36CKSW1 37CKSW2 74DIMM

75DSADJ

69LDMP 70LDMM 77TRMM 78TRMP

76TSCTL

71DRMP 72DRMM

31TSW2

32TSW3

38DRSW1 39

RF/SERVO

(SEE PAGE 3-3)

SYSTEM

CONTROL

(SEE PAGE 3-8)

CN103

(2/2)

LDM+ LDM–

LT

TM+

TM–

DM+

DM–

LS-62 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

CN221

1 2

7 8

6

CN201

2 1 3 4

1 2

3

6

CN131

DM-105 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-66)

CN191

MM

4

2 1

PH221

LOADING

SENSOR 1

PH222

LOADING

SENSOR 2

CN223

CN222

M201

LOADING

MOTOR

M202

CHUCKING

MOTOR

M131

TURN TABLE

MOTOR

M191

DOOR MOTOR

CKSW1

3

CKSW2

1

LTR

5

LTL

1

LC-78 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

TM-129 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-59)

CN192

DRSW1

1

DRSW2

2

AI-25 BOARD (1/2)

(SEE PAGE 4-35)

CN305

LDSW1

18

LDSW2

20

DSENS

22

TSW1

24

CKSW1

26

CKSW2

28

DIMM

12

DSADJ

10

LDMP

21

LDMM

13

TRMM

15

TRMP

19

TSCTL

17

DRMP

9

DRMM

11

TSW2

23

TSW3

25

DRSW1

27

DRSW2

29

CM+

14

CM–

16

(1/2)

12 10

8

6 4 2

18

20

Q308

IC301

LOADING/

TURN TABLE

MOTOR DRIVE

9 17 15 11

13

21 19

7

5

3

1 16 14

Q302

TURN

TABLE

CONTROL

5 IN3 8 IN4

11 IN1

2 IN2

DOOR MOTOR

7F IN 9R IN

4OUT3 9OUT4

10OUT1

3OUT2

VZ1

2

IC302

DRIVE

2OUT2 4OUT1

CN309

CN308

LDSW1

4

LDSW2

6

DSENS

8

TSW1

14

CKSW1

9

CKSW2

7

DIMM

11

DSPW

10

LM+

5

LM–

3

CM+

1

CM–

2

TM+

8

TM–

10

DM+

9

DM–

11

TSW2

1

TSW3

5

DRSW1

6

DRSW2

4

CK-118 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

CN003

12 10

8

2 7 9 5 6

Q001

11 13 15 14

TS-154 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-59)

CN101

4

2 3 1

11

INVERTER

7

INVERTER

6 8

Q102

Q101

Q004

INVERTER

Q002

INVERTER

SW+5V

PH101

TURN

TABLE

SENSOR

2, 3

D001

Q003

DISC SENSOR

PH001

TURN

TABLE

SENSOR 1

CN001

CN002

CN102

CN103

LDSW1

1

LDSW2

2

CKSW1

7

CKSW2

8

6

LM+

2

LM–

1

CM+

3

CM–

4

1 2

3

6

4

DRSW1

2

DRSW2

1

CS-58 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

CN261

CHUCKING

3

SENSOR 1

CHUCKING

5

SENSOR 2

1

DA-32 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-60)

1

SENSOR 1

2

SENSOR 2

PH261

PH262

PH161

DOOR

PH162

DOOR

CN262

LR-17 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

CN281

LTR

1

D281 DISC

LIGHT R

LL-12 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

CN241

1

D241

DISC

LIGHT L

3-13 3-14

DVP-CX875P

3-8. INTERFACE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM

SYSTEM CONTROL

(SEE PAGE 3-8)

AUDIO

(SEE PAGE 3-12)

VIDEO

(SEE PAGE 3-10)

SO0

XIFCS IFBSY

XFRRST

A_MUTE

V_MUTE

S_LINK

CSEL 2

CSEL 1

SI0

SC0

AI-25 BOARD (2/2)

(SEE PAGE 4-35)

CN305

(2/2)

25

24

23

26 27

28

CN304

3

CN302

6

5

3

1

J101

KEY BOARD

CN307

16

17

14

19 18

21

11

4

2

1

3

5

3

SI0

SO0

SC0

XIFCS

XIFBUSY

XFRRST

A MUTE

11

V MUTE

18

S LINK

20

CSEL 2

21

CSEL 1

19

ND101

FLUORESCENT

INDICATOR TUBE

6

4

21

FR-189 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-47)

CN103

6

5

8

3 4

1

S-LINK

3

1

25

ı

42

6 ı

20

SW+5V

IC104

9 10 12 13

5

4

IC102

LEVEL SHIFT

4

IC107

RESET

SI0

8

SO0

11

SC0

6

XIFCS

XIFBUSY

XFRRST

IC101

REMOTE

COMMANDER

RECEIVER

OUT

Q108, 109

IR

BUFFER

VOUT

4

FL-128 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-55)

CN401

2116

SO

15

SI

17

SC

14

CS

BUSY

27

7

XFRST

23

AMUTE

24

VMUTE

STATUS25

IC106

IF CON

11

8

44

ı

61

63

ı

77

18

19

IR

CSEL 222

CSEL 120

IFRST

SEG 1 – 18

DIG 1 – 15

KB_CK

KB_DT

1

BUZ

JOG_CW

XIN

XOUT

BZ101

BUZZER

Q105, 106

79LED_CONT

LED

CONTROL

41LED_CK

42LED_D

33AD3

31AD2 35AD6 36AD7 28ACS_CCW 29ACS_CW 34AD5

S101

I/

37AD8

13

12JOG_CCW 33AD4

2

3

X101

16MHz

16

3

2

S104

PICTURE

MODE

S103

FILE

IC103

LED DRIVE

VDD

CLOCK

DATA

S105

EDIT

4Q0 5Q1 6Q2 7Q3 8Q4 9Q5

11Q7

12Q8

PICTURE MODE

SURROUND

IC106 3

D103

SURROUND

(AMBER)

D102

(AMBER)

S106

S107 SORT

LED+5V

S108

FOLDER

JOG_CW

JOG_CCW

AD4

CN102

1 3 4 5 6

10

7

18 16 17 11 13 12

14

15

9

L_FLIP L_LOAD L_DSRC L_EASY L_DCHG L_JOG

AD3

AD2 AD6 AD7 ACS_CCW ACS_CW AD5

JOG_CW

JOG_CCW

AD4

18

16

15

14

13

9

S410

FLIP

12

S401

TOP MENU

1

S405 LOAD

3

S414 S415 S416

2

8

6

7

5

4

10

LED+5V

FLIP (AMBER)

LOAD (AMBER)

DIRECT SEARCH (AMBER)

EASY PLAY (AMBER)

DISC CHANGE (GREEN)

JOG (AMBER)

S411

DISC

CHANGE

S402

DISPLAY

S406

REPEAT

S419

OPEN/CLOSE

S412

DIRECT

SEARCH

S403

MENU

S407

TIME/TEXT

CN403

JOG_CW

JOG_CCW

RIGHT

ENTER

DOWN

LEFT

UP

S420

PROGRAM

2

1

4

6

7

9

8

S404

RETURN

S408

SHUFFLE

S417

JOG

S409

ONE/ALL

DISCS

PREV / NEXT

PUSH ENTER

S421

EASY PLAY

JOG SHUTTLE

S418

PUSH

ENTER

CN402

SW-374 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-56)

S301

EJECT

CN301

AD5

2

05

4 Vp-p (16 MHz)

3-15 3-16

3-9. POWER (1) BLOCK DIAGRAM

POWER BLOCK

(ZSSR113M)

AC IN

(SEE PAGE 4-63)

CN101

1 2

LL-12 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

LR-17 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

DA-32 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-60)

05

F101

D241

DISC

LIGHT L

D281 DISC

LIGHT R

DOOR

SENSOR 1

L101 LINE

FILTER

CN241

CN281

2

4

DOOR

SENSOR 2

SW+5V

CN161

D101 – 104

IC101

SWITCHING

CONTROL

3

T101

D108

PC101

PHOTO COUPLER

LS-62 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

CN222

2

LOADING

SENSOR 2

PH222

CS-58 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

CN262

2

CHUCKING

SENSOR 2

PH262

3

D201

D202

D301

D302

D401

IC301

SHUNT REG

LOADING

SENSOR 1

PH221

CHUCKING

SENSOR 1

PH261

DM-105 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-66)

CN192

L302

L402

CN221

CN223

CN261

CN191

L202

L203

DVP-CX875P

VD-33 BOARD

AI-25 BOARD

CN201

IP201

Q201

IP301

SW+5V

SW+5VSW+5V

4

SW+5V

5

4

2

5

Q302

Q303

SHUNT REG

IP401

CK-118 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

CN001

D001

(DISC SENSOR)

TS-154 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-59)

CN103

IC302

Q301

POWER

CONTROL

SENSOR 1

TURN TABLE

SENSOR

2, 3

PH101

IP302

TURN

TABLE

PH001

CN101

CN003

4

7 8

11

12

5

1

6

1

5

EVER+11V

•

EVER–11V

M+11V

SW+5V

SW+3.3V

EVER+5V

P-CONT

EVER–11V

EVER+11V

EVER+5V

P-CONT

M+11V

SW+5V

SW+3.3V

SW+5V

(SEE PAGE 4-35)

CN301

1

4

5

6

7 8

11

TURN TABLE

12

CN309

15

CN308

7

FL-128 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-55)

Q303, 304

IC302

DOOR

MOTOR

DRIVE

IC301

LOADING/

MOTOR

DRIVE

D403

FLIP (AMBER)

D402

LOAD (AMBER)

D404

DIRECT SEARCH (AMBER)

D401

EASY PLAY (AMBER)

D405

DISC CHANGE (GREEN)

D406

JOG (AMBER)

+1.8V REG

1

IN 3OUT

IC303

CN302

CN304

CN305

CN303

CN307

CN401

SW–10V

7

SW+5V

4

SW–10V

2

EVER+11V

7

EVER+5V

1

3.3V_MNT

29

9

M+11V

10

SW+5V

4

+1.8V

6

1

SW+3.3V

2

PCONT

13

EVER+5V

9

SW+5V

7 8

SW–10V

5

3.3V_MNT

20

17

LED+5V

(SEE PAGE 4-39)

CN101 7 4

SW+5V

POWER 2

(SEE PAGE 3-19)

POWER 2

(SEE PAGE 3-19)

CN103

9 13

14 15

17

2

CN102

2

IC101

−

5V REG

2

IN 3OUT

(RED)

(GRN)

D101

(ON/STANDBY)

BUFFER

FR-189 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-47)

Q103, 104

T101

DC/DC

CONVERTER

IC106

IF CON

30

PONCHK

PCONT26LED

-CONT

Q102

LED

DRIVE

IC102

VIDEO

79

Q101

LED

DRIVE

PICTURE MODE

VKK

D102

(AMBER)

D103

SURROUND

(AMBER)

D104 – 107

D109, Q107

–30V REG

Q105, 106

F1

F2

IC107

RESET

IC101

REMOTE

COMMANDER

RECEIVER

IC104

S-LINK

IC102

LEVEL SHIFT

IC103

LED

DRIVE

12

Q8

11

Q7

TH101

ND101

FLUORESCENT

INDICATOR

TUBE

3

5

1

2

6

4

J101

KEY BOARD

3-17 3-18

DVP-CX875P

3-10. POWER (2) BLOCK DIAGRAM

AV-66 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-43)

POWER 1

(SEE PAGE 3-18)

DIGITAL

POWER 1

(SEE PAGE 3-18)

OUT

EVER+11V

SW–10V

EVER+5V

OPTICAL

3.3V_MNT

SW+3.3V

SW +5V

+1.8V

M +11V

A+5V

CN202

7

2

1

OPTICAL DIGITAL

CN201

3 4

MB-107 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-13 to 4-32)

CN501

10 11

CN103

1

CN101

9

10

7

5

1 2

05

Q201

IC203

OUT

D/A CONVERTER

FL108

FILTER

FL103

FILTER

FL104

FILTER

FL107

FILTER

Q203, 204

IC503

AUDIO

IC202

AUDIO AMP

IC201

+5V REG

3

IN

D201

MUTE V

IC202

FOCUS/TRACKING

COIL DRIVE,

SPINDLE/SLED/LOADING

MOTOR DRIVE

1OUT

AUDIO

(SEE PAGE 3-12)

FL109

FILTER

FL106

FILTER

FL102

FILTER

5

IC108

1M SRAM

IC104

SYSTEM

CONTROL

IC101

EEPROM

IC605

+2.5V REG

VIN

IC601

+2.5V REG

VIN

4VOUT

FL105

FILTER

FL101

FILTER

FL404

FILTER

IC604

VIDEO

ENCORDER

IC603

16M SDRAM

IC602

I/P CONVERTER

IC103

PLL

IC404

16M SDRAM

IC405

16M SDRAM

IC106

32M FLASH

FL701

FILTER

or

NAND FLASH I/F,

EXTENSION I/O

NAND FLASH

IC107

OTP

IC702

IC701

64M

FL403

FILTER

IC401

+1.8V REG

5

VIN

FL402

FILTER

DVD/CD RF AMP,

IC302

+3.3V REG

5

VIN

IC201

DIGITAL

SERVO

IC403

AV DECODER

4VOUT

CN204

5

FL201

FILTER

16M DRAM

4VOUT

SERVO DSP

CN203

19

11

IC303

IC301

ARP,

LED

VCC

MOD

INLIMIT

SENSOR

OPTICAL

DEVICE

3-19 3-20 E

SECTION 4

PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

DVP-CX875P

THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS.

For printed wiring boards:

• X : indicates a lead wire mounted on the component side.

• x : indicates a lead wire mounted on the printed side.

• a : Through hole.

• b : Pattern from the side which enables seeing.

(The other layers’ patterns are not indicated.)

Caution: Pattern face side: Parts on the pattern face side seen from (Side A) the pattern face are indicated. Parts face side: Parts on the parts face side seen from (Side B) the parts face are indicated.

For schematic diagram:

• Caution when replacing chip parts. New parts must be attached after removal of chip. Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, because it is damaged by the heat.

• All resistors are in ohms, 1/ less otherwise specified. kΩ : 1000Ω, MΩ : 1000kΩ.

• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µµF 50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums.

• All variable and adjustable resistors hav e characteristic curve B, unless otherwise noted.

• 2 : nonflammable resistor.

• 5 : fusible resistor.

• C : panel designation.

• f : internal component.

• C : adjustment for repair.

• U : B+ Line.

• V : B– Line.

• Circled numbers refer to wa veforms.

•Voltages are dc between measurement point.

• Readings are taken with a color-bar signal on DVD reference disc and when playing CD reference disc.

• Readings are taken with a digital multimeter (DC 10MΩ).

•Voltage variations may be noted due to normal production tolerances.

Note:

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

4

W (Chip resistors : 1/

Note:

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont cr itiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

10

W) un-

When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name.

4-1

4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

FRAME (1)

DVP-CX875P

A_MUTE

174

SW-10V

EVER+5V

1234567

SW-10V

EVER+5V

MUTE_2CH

P_GND

SPDIF

A+5V

ART-

ART+

ALT+

183 151 112

13PCN201

GND

1

2

3

4

5

6

N.C

7

8

9

10

N.C

ALT-

11

12

13

5

A

HARNESS

B

C

D

E

(AP-155)

ZSSR113M BOARD

12P

EVER-11V

1

2

GND

3

GND

EVER+11V

4

EVER+5V

5

PCONT

6

M+11V

7

M+11V

8

M_GND

9

M_GND

10

SW+5V

11

SW+3.3V

12

2P

AC_IN(L)

1

AC_IN(N)

2

12PCN301

EVER-11V

1

GND

2

GND

3

EVER+11V

4

EVER+5V

5

PCONT

6

M+11V

7

M+11V

8

M_GND

9

M_GND

10

SW+5V

11

SW+3.3V

12

F

G

KHM-270AAA/

TK-63 BOARD

76 16

7PCN302

7PCN101

VD-33

BOARD

81410

10PCN303

S_LINK

V_MUTE

SW+5V

SW-10V

GND

CSEL1

CSEL2

1234567

B to B B to B

1234567

V_MUTE

S_LINK

SW+5V

CSEL2

GND

CSEL1

15PCN103

1

WIDE

2

GND

3

V

4

GND

5

SC

6

GND

7

IPSW

8

GND

9

SY

GND

10

FFC (FAM-011)

Y

11

GND

12

Cb

13

GND

14

Cr

15

10PCN101

WIDE

15

GND

14

13

V

12

GND

SC

11

GND

10

IPSW

9

GND

8

SY

7

GND

6

5

Y/G

GND

4

Cb/B

3

GND

2

Cr/R

1

15PCN601

M+11V

10

M+11V

2

M+11V

M_GND

HARNESS

(AM-131)

415103

M_GND

1.8V

+1.8V

SW+3.3V

SW+5V

GND

8

9

6

7

GND

SW+5V

SW+3.3V

29PCN305

SW+3.3V

123456789

29PCN103

SW+3.3V

12

AI-25 BOARD (1/2)

TSW2

DRSW1

CKSW2

DRSW1

CKSW1

TSW3

TSW1

TSW2

DRSW2

1234567

29

DRSW2

139

LDMP

DSENS

TRMP

LDSW2

9

8

10111213141516171819202122

LDMP

TRMP

DSENS

LDSW2

LDSW1

TSCTL

CM-

(FIM-002)

CM-

TSCTL

CM+

LDMM

TRMM

FFC

CM+

TRMM

LDMM

DIMM

DRMM

DSADJ

10111213141516171819202122232425262728

DSADJ

SO0

DRMP

GND

SC0

23242526272829

SC0

SO0

GND

DRMP

7PCN304

EVER+11V

GND

7PCN202

GND

EVER+11V

GND

IFBSY

3.3V_MNT

SI0

XIFCS

XFRRST

123456789

SI0

XIFCS

IFBSY

XFRRST

3.3V_MNT

AV-66 BOARD

SERVICE ASSY

26P

26

TRK-

25

TRK+

24

FCS-

23

H

I

OPTICAL DEVICE

J

CD LD/N.C

DVD LD

LD GND

SW/N.C

FCS+

22

N.C

21

20

N.C

19

18

17

16

MOD

15

VR

14

PD

13

GND

12

E

FFC (FOT-002)FFC (FOT-003)

11

D

10

C

9

G

8

VCC

7

VC

6

GND

RF

5

4

F

3

A

B

2

1

H

26PCN001

1

TRK-

TRK+

2

FCS-

3

4

FCS+

N.C

5

CD LD/N.C

6

N.C

7

DVD LD

8

LD GND

9

SW/N.C

10

MOD

11

VR

12

PD

13

GND

14

E

15

D

16

C

17

G

18

VCC

19

VC

20

GND

21

RF

22

F

23

A

24

B

25

H

26

CD LD

DVD LD

LD GND

26PCN002

26

TRK-

25

TRK+

24

FCS-

23

FCS+

22

N.C

21

20

N.C

19

18

17

SW

16

MOD

15

VR

14

PD

13

GND

12

E

FFC (FTM-010)FFC (FTM-011)

11

D

10

C

9

G

VCC

8

7

VC

6

GND

5

RF

4

F

3

A

B

2

H

1

26PCN203

1

TRK-

2

TRK+

FCS-

3

4

FCS+

5

N.C

6

CD LD

7

N.C

DVD LD

8

9

LD GND

SW

10

MOD

11

12

VR

PD

13

GND

14

E

15

16

D

C

17

G

18

VCC

19

VC

20

GND

21

RF

22

F

23

A

24

B

25

H

26

MB-107 BOARD

DIAG

6PCN104

TXD

6

RXD

5

GND

4

+3.3V

3

GND

2

RF MON

1

CN501

MUTE_2CH

P_GND

SPDIF

ART+

A+5V

13P

1

2

3

ALT-

4

N.C

ALT+

5

6

7

N.C

8

ART-

9

10

11

12

GND

13

FFC

(FAM-012)

K

9P

SLA+

9

SLB+

INLIM

SPM+

8

SLB-

7

SLA-

6

LED

5

GND

4

3

SPM-

2

1

SLED

M

MOTOR

INLIMIT

L

05

SPINDLE MOTOR

SW

M

9PCN003

SLA+

9

SLB+

8

7

SLB-

6

SLA-

5

LED

4

GND

3

INLIM

2

SPM-

1

SPM+

INLIM

SPM+

9PCN004

SLA+

9

SLB+

8

SLB-

7

SLA-

6

LED

5

GND

4

3

SPM-

2

1

9PCN204

1

SLA+

2

SLB+

3

SLB-

4

SLA-

5

LED

6

GND

7

INLIM

8

SPM-

9

SPM+

4-3 4-4

FRAME (1)

DVP-CX875P

FRAME (2)

5

76 16

81410

A

B

AI-25 BOARD (2/2)

12

DOWNLOAD

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

(JIG)

3.3V_MNT

XFRRST

XIFBUSY

XIFCS

SI0

SO0

SC0

GND

IFRST

PCONT

C

15PCN309

LM-

CM+

CM-

123456789

D

15

15PCN003

LM-

CM-

CM+

E

LDSW1

LM+

LDSW2

CKSW2

FFC

(FIC-001)

1011121314

LDSW2

CKSW2

DSENS

CKSW1

GND

DSPW

DIMM

GND

1011121314

GND

DIMM

DSPW

TSW1

SW+5V

15

123456789

TSW1

SW+5V

8PCN221

LDSW1

1

LDSW2

2

GND

3

SW+5V

4

GND

5

LT

6

CKSW1

7

CKSW2

8

LS-62 BOARD

SW+5V

3PCN222

LTL

1

2

B to B

N.C

3

LL-12 BOARD

LTL

1

SW+5V

2

N.C

3

3PCN241

F

5PCN223

11PCN308

GND

DRSW2

TSW2

GND

123456789

(FIT-001)

10

11

11PCN101

GND

TSW2

DRSW2

TS-154 BOARD

TSW3

10

11

TM-

TM+

DM-

DM+

DRSW1

SW+5V

FFC

123456789

TM-

DM-

TM+

DM+

TSW3

SW+5V

DRSW1

6PCN103

139

21PCN307

CSEL2

1

SLINK

2

3

10PCN306

VMUTE

SW-10V

SWGND

SW+5V

EVER+5V

AMUTE

PCONT

XIFBUSY

3.3V_MNT

XFRRST

CSEL1

IFRST

XIFCS

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

GND

11

12

GND

13

FFC (FIF-003)

14

SC0

15

16

SI0

17

SO0

18

19

20

21

21PCN103

CSEL2

21

SLINK

20

CSEL1

19

VMUTE

18

SW-10V

17

SWGND

16

SW+5V

15

SW+5V

14

EVER+5V

13

GND

12

AMUTE

11

GND

10

PCONT

9

SC0

8

IFRST

7

SI0

6

SO0

5

XIFBUSY

4

3

XIFCS

2

3.3V_MNT

1

XFRRST

174

FR-189 BOARD

DM-105

BOARD

DRSW2

DRSW1

SW+5V

6PCN191

FFC

1

2

3

4

5

(FTD-001)

6

DRSW2

DRSW1

GND

DM-

SW+5V

DM+

1

2

GND

3

DM-

4

5

DM+

6

18PCN102

AD7

AD6

AD2

JOG_CW

ACS_CW

L_JOG

AD4

GND

AD5

101112131415161718

AD3

ACS_CCW

JOG_CCW

L_DCHG

L_EASY

L_DSRC

L_LOAD

183 15 191 112

LED+5V

L_FLIP

123456789

CKSW2

GND

CKSW1

SW+5V

CK-118 BOARD

B to B

G

8PCN001

1

LDSW1

2

H

I

4P

CN002

CM+

LM+

LM-

CM-

123

4

LDSW2

SW+5V

CKSW1

CKSW2

3

GND

4

5

GND

6

LT

7

8

CS-58 BOARD

5PCN261

B to B

J

4P

CN201

123

LM-

LM+

4

CM-

CM+

SW-374 BOARD

K

LC-78 BOARD

L

12345

FFC

(FLC-002)

GND

SW+5V

CKSW1

CKSW2

LTR

12345

LTR

3PCN262

LTR

1

SW+5V

2

B to B

N.C

3

3PCN301

3

GND

2

AN4

1

GND

1

2

3

FFC

(FLS-003)

LR-17 BOARD

3PCN281

LTR

SW+5V

N.C

1

2

3

CN402 3P

GND

AD5

GND

3PCN102

TM+

TM-

TM+

123

B to B

123

3PCN131

TM-

TM+

TM-129 BOARD

FL-128 BOARD

4P

SW+5V

DRSW2

CN192

4

FFC

(FDD-003)

4

4P

GND GND

SW+5V

DRSW2

CN161

DA-32 BOARD

DRSW1

123

DRSW1

18P

CN401

L_FLIP

LED+5V

L_LOAD

L_DSRC

L_EASY

L_DCHG

FFC

(FFF-017)

AD3

GND

JOG_CW

JOG_CCW

123456789

AD2

AD7

AD6

9P

CN403

9

DOWN

8

LEFT

7

ENTER

6

COMMON

JOG_CW

JOG_CCW

RIGHT

UP

5

GND

4

3

JOG SHUTTLE

2

1

PUSH ENTER

101112131415161718

AD5

AD4

L_JOG

ACS_CW

ACS_CCW

05

FRAME (2)

4-5 4-6

4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

TK-63 (RELAY) PRINTED WIRING BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

– Ref. No.: TK-63 board; 2,000 series –

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

DVP-CX875P

TK-63 BOARD

1

CN001

312

CN004

8

TK-63 BOARD

9

A

B

C

1-685-707-

11

(11)

D

BASE UNIT

KHM-270AAA/

SERVICE ASSY

OPTICAL

DEVICE

TRACKING

COIL

FOCUS

COIL

DVD/CD

LD MODULE

DVD/CD

PD IN

26PCN001

CD LD/N.C

TRK-

TRK+

FCS+

DVD LD

LD GND

SW/N.C

MOD

FCS-

GND

VCC

1

2

3

4

N.C

5

6

N.C

7

8

9

10

11

VR

12

PD

13

14

E

15

D

16

C

17

G

18

B+ B+

19

VC

20

21

RF

22

F

23

A

24

B

25

H

26

226

CN002

2

1

125

26

C006

1

CN003

9

05

4

5

26PCN002

26

TRK-

25

TRK+

24

FCS-

23

FCS+

22

N.C

21

CD LD

20

N.C

19

DVD LD

18

LD GND

17

SW

16

MOD

15

VR

14

PD

13

GND

12

E

11

D

10

C

9

G

8

VCC

7

VC

6

GND

5

RF

4

F

3

A

2

B

1

H

6

MB-107 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-9)

(1/10)

CN203,204

LL-12

TK-63 (RELAY)

ZSSR113M (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

LC-78 (LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR)

LR-17 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

(LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

LS-62 (LOADING SENSOR)

CK-118 (DISC SENSOR)

AV-66 (AUDIO AMP)

VD-33 (VIDEO BUFFER)

E

SPINDLE

M

MOTOR

INLIMIT

SW

F

SLED

MOTOR

M

9PCN003

SPM+

SPM-

INLIM

GND

SLA-

SLB-

SLB+

SLA+

1

2

3

4

B+ B+

5

LED

6

7

8

9

INLIM

GND2

SLA-

SLB-

SLB+

SLA+

C006

0.1u

INLIM

GND2

LED

SLA-

SLB-

SLB+

SLA+

9PCN004

1

SPM+

2

SPM-

3

INLIM

4

GND

5

LED

6

SLA-

7

SLB-

8

SLB+

9

SLA+

FR-189 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

CS-58 (CHUCKING SENSOR)

SW-374 (EJECT SWITCH)

DA-32 (DOOR SENSOR)

4-7 4-8

DM-105

(DOOR MOTOR) FL-128 (FUNCTION SWITCH)

MB-107

(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) TM-129 (TURN T ABLE MO T OR)

TS-154 (TURN T ABLE SENSOR)

AI-25 (LOADING/TURN TABLE/ DOOR MOTOR DRIVE, INTERFACE)

SIGNAL PATH

G

05

PB

VIDEO SIGNAL

Y/CHROMA

AUDIO

SIGNAL

SPINDLE SERVO(SPEED AND PHASE)

TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV

SLED SERVO DVD/CD

FOCUS SERVO

RELAY

TK-63

DVP-CX875P

KJ001KJ004

R187

R407

C408

HA001

C411

C415

52

53

105

104

156 157

1

208

IC403

ZU004

122

23 44

IC108

21

78

RB104

21

78

RB106

21

78

RB109

21

78 RB111

CN101

110

IC501

45

89 132

44

88

133

1

176

PG003

HA002

#PC00037

ZU003

R106

R107

R112

R113

R114

R115

R118

R124

R125

R131

R134

R138

KJ003

KJ002

#PC00074

KA004

R148

#PC00080

KA006

PG001

R151

R178

R179

R183

C816

R196

C817

123

45

IC803

C113

C122

C701

CL102

C109

1

10

CN102

IC104

1

30

31

60

61

90

91

120

X101

21

78

RB103

21

78

RB105

21

78

RB107

21

7

8

RB108

21

7

8

RB110

R204

R205

R208

R215

R259

R261

CL401

R304

R309

R311

R312

R313

R314

R315

R316

R317

R318

R319

R320

R321

R322

R323

R324

R325

R326

R327

R955

R328

R329 R330 R331

R332

R333

R334

FL106

#PC00253

R358

R359

1

2

29

CN103

R511

R514

R515

R524

R525

R526

R529

R531

R532

R533

R535

R536

R537 R538

R541

R547

L101

R083

R570

R571

R572

CL402

R432

C413

C414

C437

C407

R956 R957

PG002

KA005

HA003

#PC00377

R931

CL403

CL404

CL405

CL406

R415

R416

R418

R419

R420

R421

R423

R426

R604

R609

C206

C207

C208

C209

R614

C258

C268

C304

C305

C310

C311

C312

C313

C314

C315

C316

C317

C318

C319

C320

C324

C326

C328

R958

C329

C330

R616

C336

C337

C339

C341

R801

R802

R803

R804

R805

R806

R807

R808

R809

R810

R811

R812

R813

R917

R918

R959

R639

R960

R640

R937

R942

R943

R944

R946

R947

R948

R641

R642

R643

R644

R645

R646

R647

R648

R649

R650

R651

R652

CL201

CL202

CL203

CL204

CL205

CL301

CL302

R653

CL306

R961

CL307

CL308

R654

CL310

R655

R656

R657

R658

R659

R660

R661

R662

R663

R664

R665

R666

R667

R082

R210

R212

R668

R669

R670

R671

R672

R247

R265

R673

R674

R675

R676

R678

R680

R681

R682

R683

R684

C271

1

10

CN301

CN201

17

R699

1

5

2

CN202

C416

C418

C419

C420

C421

C422

C425

C426

C428

C430

C608

#PC00733

C501

C502

C505

C508

C511

C513

C518

C521

C522

C532

C539

C543

C620

C621

C622

C623

C624

KA003

C625

C627

C628

C629

C630

C633

C634

C636

C808

C812

C814

C914

C915

C916

C917

C919

CL601

C921

CL602

C923

C924

C925

C926

C927

C928

C930

C931

C933

CL603

CL609

CL611

C202

CL613

CL615

CL617

C210

C211 C212

C213

R962

R963

C236

C239

CL619

C247

C248

CL621

C253

C255

C256

C257

CL623

CL625

C261

C262

CL628

CL629

CL631

CL633

CL637

CL638

CL639

CL640

C309

CL641

R964

CL644

CL646

CL647

CL648

CL649

CL650

CL651

CL652

CL653

CL654

CL655

C626

C635

C604

C607

C609

C610

C611

C619

16

17

32

33

48

49

1

64

IC604

RV601

RV602

1

2

22

23

CN601

1

25 26

50

IC603

R422

R424

R425

R429

R430

R433

C429

C431 C432

C433

C434 C435 C436

R402

C401

C405

C124

C127

45

89132

44

88

133

1

176

IC301

FB110FB111

C125

R108

R109

R110

R116

R119

R120

R121

R122

R129

C507

R141

R142

R143

R144

R146

R147

R184

R185

C810

C903

R738

C126

R186

R336

R337

R338

C910

C911

C913

C938

R346

R347

R348

FB501

R360

KA001

R703

1

2

13

CN501

R704

R706

1

9

CN502

R708

KA002

R711

C535

R713

D201

D202

C308

L201

L202

C221

C234

C238

C242

C263

C302

R724

R728

R729

R730 R732 R735

44

45

88

89

132

133

1

176

IC905

C104

C105

C106

FL108

C107

C110

16

CN104

CN204

1

2

9

C112

C114

C116

FL502

C117

226

125

CN203

16

CN503

C119

R816

R817

C331

C335

C338

C340

C342

C344

C345

C702

C703

C704

C705

C706

C707

C708

C709

C710

C711

C712

C713

CL101

CL305

CL309

R590

C714

C103

1

16

8

9

IC103

120

21

40

4160

61

80

IC701

X102

1

4

58

IC105

R192

R194

R350

R501

R502

R503

R512

R513

R516

R517

R522

R523

R528

R569

R573

R930

C514

C517

C920

C506

C538

FL501

R825

R827

R833

R834

R841

R842

R843

R844

R845

R846

R847

R848

R902

#PC01479

#PC01481

#PC01482

#PC01484

#PC01485

R850

12

CL642

CL643

CL645

8

4

28

MB-107 BOARD (SIDE A)

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

05

1-685-712-

11

MB-107 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

– Ref. No.: MB-107 board; 3,000 series –

: Uses unleaded solder.

MB-107 BOARD (A SIDE) CN101 A-11

CN104 A-4 CN203 A-8 CN501 D-15 CN601 F-15

IC103 D-6 IC104 H-3 IC108 I-6 IC301 E-3 IC403 G-9 IC603 I-11 IC604 H-13 IC701 G-6

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

LC-78 (LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR)

LR-17 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

FR-189 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

CS-58 (CHUCKING SENSOR)

SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO

SW-374 (EJECT SWITCH)

ZSSR113M (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

DA-32 (DOOR SENSOR)

TK-63 (RELAY)

DM-105

(DOOR MOTOR) FL-128 (FUNCTION SWITCH)

MB-107

LL-12 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

LS-62

TS-154 (TURN T ABLE SENSOR)

(LOADING SENSOR)

MB-107

(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) TM-129 (TURN T ABLE MO T OR)

CK-118 (DISC SENSOR)

AV-66 (AUDIO AMP)

VD-33 (VIDEO BUFFER)

AI-25 (LOADING/TURN TABLE/ DOOR MOTOR DRIVE, INTERFACE)

4-9 4-10

MB-107 BOARD (SIDE B)

KB006

#PC00021

JL523

JL524

JL525

JL526

JL527

JL528

IC504

D502

JL520

5

JL518

JL516

D501

JL514

R509

05

JL512

JL617

JL619

JL621

JL517

D503

R508

JL511

R560

R566

JL614

JL615

JL616

R686

JL618

R687

JL620

R688

R689

KB005

KB003

JL521

JL522

41

C530

JL515 JL519 JL513

KB002

R546

JL613

DVP-CX875P

MB-107 BOARD (B SIDE)

C536

JL119

JL118

JL530

JL534

HB001

JL533

JL532

JL531

37

48

1

IC502

C528

12

13 24

R854

R852

R587

8

11

10

FB502

IC503

1

20

C537

JL608

R021

JL607

JL605

JL609

R618

R679

C631

JL612

C637

JL611 JL610

R677

C632

R685

IC605

3

4

2

C638

1

5

C640

IC601

1 2

C601

3

HB003

JL529

R552

FL503

36

C525

R861 R860

R857

R863 R862

25

R853

R859

R858

R520

JL501

R540

R815

36

C612

37

JL606

C615

JL603

C639

C616

73

72

5

4

R637

R638

C602

R856

C509

R527

R530

JL502

C512

R521

C503

R510

C504

R507

R518

R519

C515

JL503

R505

R504

JL504

C510

JL604

JL602

JL601

IC602

C618

R635

R636

FB105

JL117

FB104

FL103

C813

IC802

26 50

R838 R839

R840

JL802

JL507

JL506

JL508

JL505

C520

R534

C516

R603

C603

1

108

C523

C519

R601

C606

R605

#PC01486

C805 C806

#PC00378

C613

R615

144

R617

R613

C605

R612

R619

R621

R623

R625

C614

R627

R629

R631

109

R633

C617

JL120

R836

R837

26

50

R620 R622

R624 R626

R628 R630

R632 R634 R697 R698 R022

JL121

FL107

FB109

JL122

FB107

C123

FB106

125

IC801

C802

JL411 JL412 JL413 JL414 JL415

#PC00039

FB108

FL901

C811

R828

R821

R830

R832

R829

R831

C809

C803

#PC01002

#PC01003

#PC01004

#PC01005

#PC01006

R403

FL403

C801

R820

R818

R814

#PC01105

FL903

C815

JL925 JL928

JL930

R823

R819

R822

R826

JL934

R849

JL935

1

R824

JL936

100

JL939

JL940

C807

R949

JL942

JL801

C932

R951

JL945

76

JL943 JL944 JL927

JL919

JL941

75

JL924

JL926

JL922

4

C912

6

IC901

C440

JL410

C446

JL409

27

JL408

JL407

26

#PC01468

JL403

JL404

28

26 50

FL404

FL402

FL104

R835

25

51

R855

R851

JL202

JL204

JL234 JL233

JL231

JL201

JL205

JL203

FL905

R909

4

IC906

5

C936

R916

R915

R938

R945

JL921

R941

JL916

R934

R940

JL923

1

C909

C929

JL929

JL932

JL931

JL937

C904

JL933

JL938

R950 R953

R954

FL902

C901

R952

25

JL917

JL918

JL920

C443

JL912

R939

JL915

C907

JL914

R935

R936

3

JL913

1

C905

R345

R434

IC404

R435

C442

IC406

IC405

C450

C412

R405

JL228

JL225

#PC01472

C934 3 2

R910

R921

1

R913

C935

C937

R922

R927

R932

R933

R929

50

IC903

JL905

JL903

JL904

C922

JL906

JL910

R925

JL909

R919

JL907

JL911

JL908

R926

C438C439

125

C444

C445

1

50

C441

C448

125

54

C449

R414

C410

C409

JL223

C908

43

2 1

5

IC902

R914 R912 R911

R908

R907

R904

R903

C902

26

R920

R924

C404

FL401

C427

JL401

C424

C423

C417

C201

R206

JL902

JL211

FL201

JL235

JL210

#PC01349

R211

#PC01384

R235

R244

#PC01350

#PC01363

C232

#PC01390

C906

JL222

R236 R234

#PC01374

JL229

JL232

C245

Q201

#PC01376

C237

#PC01404

#PC01377

JL227

JL221

JL220

16

JL230

JL226

E

C

B

C

JL224

R905

Q202

JL102 JL103 JL104

JL105

C131

FL101

IC401

R705

321

JL402

R712

54

R716

R721

R717

R719

R723

R720

R734

R722

R731

R714

R718

1101322

R740

R163

FL109

C130

#PC01385

C233

1

#PC01387

#PC01367

E

B

IC702

#PC01304

#PC01383

JL219

#PC01399

R104

4

5

C244

C241

#PC01366

#PC01379

17

R249 R248

IC102

C111

64

#PC01368

JL709

#PC01375

C129

2

#PC01391

IC201

R246

C235

R245

R251

JL101

3

1

C251

#PC01380

C252

R256

C243

#PC01389

#PC01388

JL708

C254

JL707

C260

49

R263

#PC01401

#PC01402

R301

C101

#PC00278

RB102

32

R302

#PC01394

#PC01395

23323544

#PC00260

#PC00261

#PC01346

#PC01405

#PC01397

#PC01398

#PC00219

#PC00277

#PC01344

48

33

JL704

JL702

RB101

R260

C265

C266

C264

#PC01403

R264

FL301

C215 R230 C217

JL703

JL331

R195

JL128

#PC01347

C303

JL705

C121

C267

IC302

JL340 JL342

JL706

#PC00347

#PC00271

#PC00272#PC00273

22

R158

JL126 JL127

#PC01469

#PC01392

#PC01393 #PC00790

C269

54

JL308

R228

JL701

#PC00350

#PC00270

1

R101

JL124

#PC01467

C225 R238 R237

25 48

#PC00866

R268

#PC00867

321

R352

R267

JL334

FL701

#PC00349

JL321

JL320 JL319

#PC00860 #PC00038

C321

JL313

1

#PC00297

R152

#PC00257

#PC00865

R232

R310

R218

JL333

JL309

50

C332

R366

R165

IC107 IC106

#PC00280

#PC00873

R250

#PC00879

#PC00567

#PC00566

C343

#PC00304

#PC00300

JL109

R175

JL129

C270

R262

R255

R253

C216

R219

C322

#PC00299

#PC00303

#PC00269

C249

#PC00874

JL247

R254

C120

R181

JL123

C323

C259

C240C246

#PC00770

C226

C325

R349

#PC00264

#PC00266

124

JL213

37

#PC00876

#PC00898

#PC00877

#PC00878

R239

40

11

JL343

#PC00265

44

R171

FL105

C128

23

R159

JL125

R172

IC303

R139

C115

42

52

43

48

1

C327

R126

R182

JL209

JL206

36

IC202

649712

#PC00890

#PC00881

#PC00870

#PC01425

C227

R221

JL336

R220

JL341

C334

36

15

JL332

R364

JL338

JL330

R161 R137

R160

R135 R132

R198

R128

R130

R123

R164

#PC00336

#PC00309

R166

#PC00334

R169

#PC00341

R153

R156

#PC00281

R150

C108

R189

R173

R174

R191

R190

R127

JL106

#PC00331

R111

R133

JL207

#PC01410

#PC01409

C228

R335

JL339

R365

#PC00294

#PC00284

#PC00283

#PC00282

#PC00262

R193

#PC00321

R177

#PC00293

R180

JL212

JL208

JL335

R199

#PC00259

#PC00339

R176

#PC01249

26

25

C333

R197

R105

R188

#PC00298

#PC00880

C229

R241

R240

R222

JL310

JL311

JL318

JL324

JL325

R339

R342

#PC00279

R117

C118

JL312

R351

JL107

R223

C274 C272

25305131

#PC00871

R225

#PC01412

R242

JL327

JL314 JL315

R363

JL317

JL322

R340

5

IC101

8

C102

JL131

A

KB004

KB001

#PC00771

JL248

24

C214

R344

FL302

C273

C275

JL217

#PC00767

#PC00768

19

JL216

JL218

#PC00769

50

R269

18

JL307

R243

C230

JL304

13

R308 R305

JL302

R231 R224

R227

C220

R233

#PC00872 #PC01411

C250

JL326

R715

R252

JL145

JL148

JL316

JL146

JL144

R733

JL323

R085

R341

JL142

R089

R091

JL140

JL130

R090

R093

R092

JL108

R095

JL138

R096

R343

JL136

R097

JL134 JL132

R099

R155

JL133

JL329

JL110

R149

JL328

JL111

JL337

JL112

JL116

JL113 JL114 JL115

JL215

C219 R229 C218

R086

B

JL214

JL306

C

JL305 JL303 JL301

R226

D

R725

R084

JL147

R727 R736 R087

R726

R088

E

JL143

JL141

JL139

R094

JL137 JL135

R098

F

R145 R140 R154 R167 R168 R157 FB112 R170

D501 D-15 IC101 H-2

IC106 H-4 IC201 B-5 IC202 B-3 IC302 C-4 IC303 E-3 IC401 F-7 IC404 G-8 IC405 H-8 IC503 E-14 IC601 I-14 IC602 H-12 IC605 H-14 IC702 F-6

Q201 C-6 Q202 D-6

G

FL102

R102

R162

#PC00254

4

1

#PC00263

R103

HB002

1-685-712-

H

I

J

11

123456789101112131415

4-11 4-12

SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO

MB-107

DVP-CX875P

MB-107 (RF AMP, SERVO) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-9 for printed wiring board.

– Ref. No.: MB-107 board; 3,000 series –

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

• Wavef orms

MB-107 BOARD (1/10)

NO MARK:PB MODE

A

B

CN203 26P

C

D

E

F

G

H

05

TK-63 BOARD CN002,004 (SEE PAGE4-8)

9PCN204

LD GND

DVD LD

CD LD

TRK+

SLA+

SLB+

INLIM

SPM-

SPM+

MOD

FCS+

TRK-

SLB-

SLA-

GND

S+5V

+3.3V

RFMON

RF+

SSCK

SSWD

SSRD

SSCS

PI

TE

FE

MIRR

TZC

SSDFCTI

SS_MON

SVC

139

MB-107 BOARD

(6/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(5/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(2/10)

(4/10)

31 112

4

5

76

810

12

B+B+

TRK-

TRK+

FCS-

FCS+

SLB+

SLA-

SLB-

SLA+

SPM-

SPM+

INLIM

XLDON

B+

SSCK

SSWD

SSRD

SSCS

PI

TE

FE

MB-107 BOARD (4/10)

MB-107 BOARD (2/10)

MB-107 BOARD (5/10)

B+

R211

100

FL201

C201

0.01u

C202

0.01u

JL219

H

26

JL220

B

25

JL221

A

24

JL222

F

23

JL223

RF

22

GND

21

JL224

VC

20

JL225

VCC

19

JL226

G

18

JL227

C

17

JL228

D

16

JL229

E

15

JL201

GND

14

JL230

PD

13

JL231

12

VR

11

JL232

SW

10

9

JL233

8

7

N.C

JL234

6

N.C

5

JL202

4

JL203

3

FCS-

JL204

2

JL205

1

JL206

1

JL207

2

JL208

3

JL209

4

JL210

LED

5

JL211

GND

6

JL235

7

JL212

8

JL213

9

R206 4700

R212

100

R210

INLIM

SPM-

SPM+

DVD_LD

CD_LD

FCS+

FCS-

TRK+

TRK-

330

SLA+

SLB+

SLB-

SLA-

DVD_LD

CD_LD

H

B

A

F

R235

100

R244

C232

4700p

1k

1

3.3

R246

100

3.3

3.4

2.5

Q202

2SB1132-T100-QR

CD LD DRIVE

C238

10u 16V

C233

4700p

G

C

D

E

D

C

B

A

E

F

R234

R236

33

4.5

Q201

2SB1132-T100-QR

DVD LD DRIVE

L201

C221

2.2

47uH

10u 16V

C236

560p

C210 2200p C211 2200p C212 2200p C213 2200p

R245

C234

47u

6.3V

47k

33

3.8

C235

0.01u

12345678

910111213141516

R248

3.6

RFIP

RFIN

WIN

WPP

CN

A2

B2

C2

D2

D

C

B

A

E

F

33

4.8

L202 47uH

2

C247

0.1u

0.01u

0.1u

C241

C244

C248

0.01u

3.6

4.1

4.8

2.7

2.4

3.3

57

6364

ATOP

ATON

5859606162

AIP

AIN

VPA

SIGO

DIP

DIN

BYP

IC201

SERVO ERROR

PROCESS

IC201

SP3728ACB

CDPD

G

17 18

H

G

R249

33

R251

47k

4.8

0.5

DVDPD

H

VC

VPBCPVNB

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

4.8

2.5

C245

0.01u

C242

47u

6.3V

C243

0.01u

LDSELO

DVDLD

3.8

4.7

0.2

R256

100

C251

0.1u

2.2

FNP

CDLD

0

4.8

C252

0.1u

0.001u

2.1

FNN

VNA

MEVO

LDON

2.5

C254

0.01u

R260

12k

C253

0.1u

C255

3.3

3.2

0.6

4950515253545556

RX

TPA

MEV

MP

MB

MIN

2.2

2.4

3.4

C256

0.047u

C257

0.047u

SIGNAL PATH

PB

C260

0.01u

3.4

V33

MLPF

2.62.5

C261 330p

VIDEO SIGNAL

SDEN

SCLK

SWD

SRD

MON

TPH

FE

TE

TZIN

VCI

DFT

TZC

PI

PII

BYP2

MIRR

R263

2.2M

Y/CHROMA

C263

10u 16V

0

3.4

SSCS

SSCK

SSWD

SSRD

MIRR

TZC

3

SSDFCTI

0

3.2

1.7

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

2.5

1.7 0 3

1.8 0

2.6 0

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

R264

100k

R265

0.1u

C262

C265

0.1u

0.01u

C264

0.01u

TRK-

TRK+

FCS-

FCS+

27k

C266

SLB+

SLA-

SLB-

SLA+

SPM-

SPM+

INLIM

SSDFCTI

R273

FE

TE

0

TZC

4

PI

MIRR

B+

SPINDLE SERVO(SPEED AND PHASE)

AUDIO

SIGNAL

TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV

SLED SERVO DVD/CD

FOCUS SERVO

1 IC201 2 (DVD play) 200 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV

570 mVp-p

RF AMP, SERVO

MB-107 (1/10)

1 IC201 2 (CD play) 200 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV

550 mVp-p

2 IC201 tl (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV

1.4 Vp-p

2 IC201 tl (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV

1.4 Vp-p

3 IC201 rs (DVD play) 100 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

180 mVp-p

3 IC201 rs (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

860 mVp-p

4 IC201 ra (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

4-13 4-14

1.5 Vp-p

4 IC201 ra (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ms/DIV

1.7 Vp-p

MB-107 (ARP, SERVO DSP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-9 for printed wiring board.

– Ref. No.: MB-107 board; 3,000 series –

DVP-CX875P

MB-107 BOARD (2/10)

NO MARK:PB MODE

A

MB-107 BOARD

XRST

(5/10)

B

C

D

E

F

MB-107 BOARD

(3/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(6/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(1/10)

CDDOUT

XSRQ

SDCK

XSHD

XSAK

SDEF

SDI7

SDI6

SDI5

SDI4

SDI3

SDI2

SDI1

SDI0

B+

+3.3V

S+5V

GND

RF+

G

H

I

MB-107 BOARD

(1/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(4/10)

(1/10)

SS_MON

TE

FE

PI

SLE

SPFG

SVC

J

K

L

05

• Waveforms

5

R360 100

B+

VIN

45

3.3

R313

470

R325 6800

R318

470

B+

C311

0.01u

R319

10k

100p

C310

R320

100

R311

33k

R321

B+B+

4.8

R314

470

R315

470 R316 4700 R317

10k

22k

R312

C308 100u

6.3V

C304

0.01u

R358

C305

4700p

R359

10k

C314

C317

C313

0.1u

0.033u

R327

0.5%

R322

C316 4700p

10k

0.5%

VSSA0

8990919293949596979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112113114115116117118119120121122123124125126127128129130131132

1.7

R332 2200 R333 150k

C321

0.01u

R328

27k R329 2200

C312

R330

0.068u 2200 R331 2200

C322

0.01u

1800R334

220

1k

0.5%

R323 2200

R324

10k

C318 4700p

0.5%

0.5% C315

C323

0.01u

C324

0.1u

C325

0.01u C326

10k

R326

0.01u

CL301

C327

0.01u CL302

C328

0.01u

C329

0.01u

C319

0.01u

R335

C320

4700

4700p

C330 4700p

VCO

0.7

R1

2.4

R2

3.3

VDDA0 3.3V

1.7

INP

1.7

FR1

1.7

FR2

1.7

FR3

1.7

Y

3.3

VDDA1 3.3V

1.0

IREF

0.5

AOUT

VSSA2

3.3

VDDA2 3.3V

2.5

BIAS

1.0

VREF

VSSD0

3.4

VDDD0 3.3V

2.7

VRT

1.6

RFIN1

3.3

VDDA3 3.3V

1.6

RFIN2

VSSA3

0.6

VSSD1

3.4

VDDD1 3.3V

VSSD2

B+

VDDD2 3.3V

3.4

VRBA TESTK0

VSSA4 HCS

3.4

VDDA4 3.3V

3.4

VRTA

1.7

ADC0

1.6

ADC1

1.8

ADC2

1.7

ADC3

2.3

ADC4

JL339

1.7

ADC5

1.7

ADC6

0

ADC7

VSSA5

C334

0.01u

B+

MB-107 BOARD

33MARP

(6/10)

HD8

HD9

HD10

HD11

MB-107 BOARD

HD12

(3/10)

HD13

HD14

HD15

MB-107 BOARD

SLDA

SLDB

(4/10)

LMCTL

SSDFCTI

MIRR

(1/10)

TZC

CDDOUT

XSRQ

SDCK

XSHD

XSAK

SDEF

SDI7

SDI6

SDI5

SDI4

SDI3

SDI2

SDI1

SDI0

R301

0

R302

0

C303

0.1u

IC302

+3.3V REG

IC302

TK11133CSCL-G

4.8

123

CONT

GND

1.3

VOUTNOISE

C309

0.1u

76 16

SDI7

1.5

JL305

JL309

JL308

RFD

SD7

VSS

PLCKO

JITPWM

1

2

3

4

VDDA5 3.3V

D0

D2

D3

D1

133134 135 136137 138 139140 141 142143 144 145146 147 148149 150 151152 153 154155 156 157158 159 160161 162 163164 165 166167 168 169170 171 172173 174 175176

3.4

1.1

0.8

1.6

1.4

81410

SDI6

SDI5

SDI4

SDI3

SDI2

SDI1

SDI0

RAMA9

1.7

1.5

1.501.7

SD6

SD3

SD5

SD4

D5

D7

D6

D4

0.9

0.7

1.2

0.3

1.7

SD1

SD2

SD0

VSS

MA9

VDD1.8V

PWM1

PWM0

DFCTI

VDD3.3V

PWM2

VSS

000

3.4

1.7

JL310

JL311

JL312

CL306

SDEF

XSAK

RAMA8

RAMA7

RAMA6

RAMA5

RAMA4

RAMA3

RAMA2

RAMA1

RAMA0

0.3

MA7

MA8

MA6

VDD1.8V

MIRR

CLKIN

1.7

1.6

C337

0.01u

CL307

MA5

3.1 0.3

VSS

CL308

0.3

MA4

MA3

MA2

IC301

ARP,SERVO DSP

IC301

CXD9703R

TZC

GIO1/INT3

GIO0/INT2

0

3.4

JL313

JL314

1k

R310

JL315

0.300.3

MA1

GIO2/INT4

3.4

JL316

0.3

MA0

GIO3/INT5

JL317

3.4

SDEF

GIO4/PGREF

JL318

2.6

C335

0.01u

C338

0.01u

3.4

XSAK

GIO5/PGIN

JL319

VDD3.3V

GIO6/SDI

C339

0.01u

SDCK

XSHD

XSRQ

CDDOUT

RAMD15

RAMD14

C340

0.01u

3.4

2.6

3.4

1.7

3.0

CL309

VSS

LOCK

SDCK

DOUT

XSHD

XSRQ

XRESET

GIO7/SDO

VDD3.3V

GIO8/SCK

3.4

JL320

JL322

JL321

GIO9/GREF

3.4

JL323

GIO10/FGIN

JL324

GIO11/TMC2

GIO12/BUSY

0

JL325

MD15

VDD1.8VGIO13

VSS

0

CL310

12

RAMD9

RAMD8

RAMD13

RAMD10

RAMD11

RAMD12

2.8

3.0

2.8

MD14

MD13

DATA/EMU1

BCLK/EMU0

1.7

XFRRST

4546474849505152535455565758596061626364656667686970717273747576777879808182838485868788

VSS

MD9

MD8

MD11

MD10

MD12

TCK

TDI

LRCK/TDO

TMS

TRST

VDD1.8V

1.7

0

3.0

3.4

1.7

TCK

TMS

TDIKT

CDLRCK/TDOKT

VDD3.3V

VDD1.8V

XMWR

TESTK3

VDD3.3V

TESTK2VRB

TESTK1

VDD1.8V

139

XKATWT

XARPCS

XARPIT

XRD

XWRH

XSDPCS

XSDPIT

HA7

HA6

HA5

HA4

HA3

HA2

HA1

HA0

FDRV-

FDRV+

TDRV-

TDRV+

RAMA0

RAMA1

RAMA2

RAMA3

RAMD0

RAMD1

RAMD2

RAMD3

RAMD4

RAMD5

RAMD6

RAMD7

C333

0.01u

R352

0

C332

0.01u

MB-107 BOARD

(5/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(5/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(4/10)

CDDATA/EMU1

CDBCK/EMU0

XFRRST

TMS

TCK

TDIKT

CDLRCK/TDOKT

SSCS

LMM

LMP

SSCK

SSWD

SSRD

TSD

SPMUTE

INLIM

3.4

3.2

3.0

2.8

2.7

3.4

2.7

3.0

2.9

2.8

B+

3.4

2.8

0.3

3.4

(5/10,10/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(1/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(4/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(1/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(4/10)

(1/10)

B+

3.4

2.8

MD7

2.9

MD6

3.0

MD5

2.7

MD4

2.7

MD3VSSA1

2.8

MD2INM

3.0

MD1

3.2

MD0

VSS

1.7

JL326

2.3

MDP0

JL327

1.6

MDS0

JL340

2.8

XRAS

JL341

3.2

XCAS

JL342

3.4

JL328

3.4

XWAT

JL329

3.4

XCS

JL330

3.4

XINT

JL331

1.0

XRD

JL332

2.2

XWR

VSS

JL333

1.7

PDM3

0

JL334

1.7

PDM2

3.4

JL335

1.7

PDM1

JL336

1.7

PDM0

VSS

0

JL337

3.4

JL338

3.4

HINT

1.7

2.5

A7

0.9

A6

0.8

A5

1.6

A4

1.4

A3

2.0

A2

1.2

A1

0.2

A0

1234567891011121314 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

VSS

B+

RAMD7

RAMD6

RAMD5

RAMD4

RAMD3

RAMD2

RAMD1

RAMD0

C343

0.01u

0

R364

FDRV-

TESTK3

FDRV+

C344

0.01u GND

TDRV-

GND

TDRV+

GND

B+

GND

TESTK3

R366

FDRV-

FDRV+

TDRV-

TDRV+

JL343

XFRRST

TMS

TCK

TDIKT

CDLRCK/TDOKT

0

R349

10k

174

IC303

16M DRAM

GM71V18160CT-6TRIC303

12345678

VDD

I/O0

I/O1

I/O2

I/O3

VDD

I/O5

91016171819202122

I/O6

I/O7

N.C

1115

N.C

WE

RAS

N.C

A1

A2

23

A3

24

VDD

25

SIGNAL PATH

SPINDLE SERVO(SPEED AND PHASE)

TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV

SLED SERVO DVD/CD

FOCUS SERVO

MB-107 BOARD

(3/10)

(10/10)

(3/10)

GND

I/O15

I/O14

I/O13

I/O12

GND

I/O11I/O4

I/O10

I/O9

I/O8

N.C

LCAS

UCAS

GND

VIDEO SIGNAL

Y/CHROMA

PB

(5/10)

183 15 191 112

MDPO

MB-107 BOARD

(4/10)

MDSO

GND

R351

0

RAMD15

3.0

RAMD14

2.8

RAMD13

3.0

47 48 49 50

RAMD12

2.8

RAMD11

2.8

RAMD10

2.8

43 44 45 46

RAMD9

2.8

RAMD8

2.8

36 40

3.2

OE

A9

A8

A7A0

A6

A5

A4

RAMA9

0.3

RAMA8

0.3

RAMA7

0.3

RAMA6

0.3

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 41 42

RAMA5

0.3

RAMA4

0.3

26 27 28

AUDIO

SIGNAL

MB-107 BOARD

B+B+

(6/10)

+1.8V

1 IC301 <zzz> (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 100 ns/DIV

1.4 Vp-p

2 IC301 <zzc> (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV

1.4 Vp-p

4-15 4-16

3 IC301 <zxv> (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

1.4 Vp-p

3 IC301 <zxv> (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ms/DIV

1.7 Vp-p

4 IC301 <zxb> (DVD play) 100 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

160 mVp-p

4 IC301 <zxb> (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

860 mVp-p

ARP, SERVO DSP

MB-107 (2/10)

DVP-CX875P

MB-107 (AV DECODER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-9 for printed wiring board.

– Ref. No.: MB-107 board; 3,000 series –

MB-107 BOARD (3/10)

NO MARK:PB MODE

A

XRD

XWRH

XAVDIT

XAVDWT

(5/10)

DACK0

DREQ0

DACK1

DREQ1

XRST

MB-107 BOARD

B

SIGNAL PATH

VIDEO SIGNAL

C

CHROMA YPBY/CHROMA

D

HD0

HD1

HD2

(5/10)

(2/10,5/10)

(9/10)

(2/10)

(7/10)

(6/10)

512FSAVD

CDDOUT

CDDATA/EMU1

CDBCK/EMU0

CDLRCK/TDOKT

ACH12

SPDIF1

HD3

HD4

HD5

HD6

HD7

HD8

HD9

HD10

HD11

HD12

HD13

HD14

HD15

LRCK

BCK

SDI0

SDI1

SDI2

SDI3

SDI4

SDI5

SDI6

SDI7

SDCK

SDEF

XSHD

XSAK

XSRQ

DVD0

DVD1

DVD2

DVD3

DVD4

DVD5

DVD6

DVD7

+1.8V

+3.3V

GND

MB-107 BOARD

E

MB-107 BOARD

F

MB-107 BOARD

(6/10)

G

MB-107 BOARD

(2/10)

H

I

MB-107 BOARD

J

K

MB-107 BOARD

L

MB-107 BOARD

M

B+

3.4

1.8

2.0

1.2

1.9

3.4

2.0

1.9

2.2

3.4

B+

0.1

3.1

2.7

2.5

3.1

1.6

0.1

0.7

1.4

1.6

3.4

B+

3.4

1.8

2.0

1.2

1.9

3.4

2.0

1.9

2.2

3.4

+ B

0.1

3.1

2.7

2.5

3.1

1.6

0.1

0.7

1.4

1.6

3.4

B+

174

A0

HA3

H

HA2

HA1

HA4

HA5

HA3

HA0

HA2

HA1

HA4

HA5

IC404

16M SDRAM

IC404 HY57V16160DTC-7TR

12345678910111213141516171819202122232425

VCC

DQ0

DQ1

VSSQ

DQ2

DQ3

VCCQ

DQ4

DQ5

VSSQ

DQ6

DQ7

VCCQ

DQML

WE

CAS

RAS

CS

A11(8A)

A10/AP

A0

A1

A2

A3

VCC

IC405

16M SDRAM

IC405 HY57V161610DTC-7TR

12345678910111213141516171819202122232425

VCC

DQ0

DQ1

VSSQ

DQ2

DQ3

VCCQ

DQ4

DQ5

VSSQ

DQ6

DQ7

VCCQ

DQML

WE

CAS

RAS

CS

A11(8A)

A10/AP

BA1

A0

A1

A2

VCC

183 15 191 112

MB-107 BOARD

(5/10)

A11

HA6

HA7

A7

HA6

H

VSS

DQ15

DQ14

VSSQ

DQ13

DQ12

VCCQ

DQ11

DQ10

VSSQ

DQ9

DQ8

VCCQ

N.C

DQMU

CLK

CKE

N.C

A9

A8

A7

A6

A5

A4

VSS

DQ15

DQ14

VSSQ

DQ13

DQ12

VCCQ

DQ11

DQ10

VSSQ

DQ9

DQ8

VCCQ

N.C.

DQMU

CLK

CKE

N.C.

A9

A8

A7

A6

A5

A4

VSS

A12

HA8

HA9

HA10

H

HA13

HA14

HA15

HA8

HA9

HA10

HA11

HA12

HA13

HA14

HA15

HA16

2.2

ADDT15

1.9

ADDT14

2.0

ADDT13

2.0

ADDT12

C450

3.4

0.01u

1.9

ADDT11

1.1

ADDT10

2.0

1.7

3.4

0.1

0.6

35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

3.4

33 34

0.1

1.8

2.1

1.6

1.5

26 27 28 29 30 31 32

2.2

1.9

2.0

3.4

1.9

1.1

2.0

1.7

3.4

0.1

0.6

35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

3.4

33 34

0.1

1.8

2.1

1.6

1.5

26 27 28 29 30 31 32

ADDT9

ADDT8

+

B

ADAD9

ADAD8

ADAD7

ADAD6

ADAD5

ADAD4

FL404

ADDT15

ADDT14

ADDT13

ADDT12

C448

0.01u ADDT11

ADDT10

ADDT9

ADDT8

ADAD9

ADAD8

ADAD7

ADAD6

ADAD5

ADAD4

XFRRST

TMS

TCK

HA16

HA17

HA18

MB-107 BOARD

(2/10,10/10)

HA18

HA19

A20

HA19

H

MB-107 BOARD

(5/10)

0

HA2

HA21

B+

5

R407

100

C408

0.01u

76 16

C417

0.01u

B+

AUDIO

SIGNAL

IC401

+1.8V REG

FL402

HD0

HD1

HD2

HD3

HD4

HD5

HD6

HD7

HD8

HD9

HD10

HD11

HD12

HD13

HD14

HD15

3.3

R402

1.8

45

C405

10u 16V

C410

0.01u

C411

0.01u

SDI0

SDI1

SDI2

SDI3

C413

0.01u

SDI4

SDI5

SDI6

SDI7

C414

0.01u

0

FL403

HD0

HD1

HD2

HD3

HD4

HD5

HD6

HD7

HD8

HD9

HD10

HD11

HD12

HD13

HD14

HD15

SDI0

SDI1

SDI2

SDI3

SDI4

SDI5

SDI6

SDI7

R432

0

DVD0

DVD1

DVD2

DVD3

DVD4

DVD5

DVD6

DVD7

JL401

B+

JL402

C401

1u

50V

TK11118CSCL-G

3.3

123

CONT VIN

GND

1.2

NOISE VOUT

IC401

C404

0.1u

B+

3.4

1.7

RSTn

IOVSS13

IOVDD13

3.4

123456789101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536

IOVDD00

0.7

HDATA0

0.7

HDATA1

0.7

HDATA2

0.7

HDATA3

CVS00

0.5

HDATA4

0.5

HDATA5

0.4

HDATA6

0.7

HDATA7

1.7

CVD00

1.6

HDATA8

1.4

HDATA9

1.1

HDATA10

0.8

HDATA11

IOVSS00

0.9

HDATA12

0.7

HDATA13

0.7

HDATA14

1.2

HDATA15

CVS01

1.8

ACLK

1.7

CVD01

0

ACH12O

ACH34O

ACH56O

3.4

IOVDD01

1.7

LRCKO

1.7

BCKO

1.7

DO

1.7

CDIN2I

0

CDIN1I

IOVSS01

1.7

CDBCKI

1.7

CDLRKI

CVS02

1.7

DT0I

1.7

DT1I

1.7

DT2I

1.7

DT3I

3.4

IOVDD02

1.5

DT4I

1.5

DT5I

1.7

DT6I

4452 4351 4250 4149 4048 3947 3846 3745

1.5

DT7I

1.7

CVD02

1.7

ICLKI

3.4

IERRIn

3.4

ISTARTIn

2.6

IVALIn

2.6

IREQON

IOVSS02

YOUT

IOAVSS00

AVDD00

53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100101 102103 104

B+

3.4

DMRQ0On

AVSS00

DMRQ1On

DMACK0In

GOUT

AVDD01

3.4

DMACK1In

ROUT

CVD08

AVSS01

HWAITOn

BOUT

B+

B+B+

C416

C407

10u 16V

0.01u

81410

HA1

HA2

HA3

HA4

HA0

R414

10k

3.4

2.2

1.0

0.2

1.2

HCSn

HRWn

HAD1I

HCPUMDI

COUT

C418

0.01u

AVSS02

COMPOUT

C419

0.01u

IOVSS12

DVSS33

3.4

R416 6800

HAD0I

DVDD33

C420

0.1u

VGO

3.4

HIRQOn

AVDD02

3.4

HA5

0.8

2.0

1.4

1.6

HAD4I

HAD3I

HAD2I

CVS08

IREFI

IOVDD03

VREFI

IOAVDD00

0

3.4

JL403

R418 1200

HAD5I

FLDO

JL404

HA6

0.9

HA7

2.5

HAD6I

HSYNCOn

HAD7I

CVS03

C423

0.01u

HA8

3.4

0.9

IOVDD12

IC403

AV DECODER

DSPACK0

HA9

0.8

HAD8I

IC403

CXD1935Q

DSPACK1

1.7

HAD9I

CVD03

HA10

0.9

HA11

HAD10I

IOVSS03

JL407

2.5

C424

0.01u

HAD11I

I2C_CLK

SCLKIN

TMS

1.8

3.4

PAVDD18P

TRST

139

XAVDCS3

MB-107 BOARD

(5/10)

XAVDCS2

27MAVD

MB-107 BOARD

(6/10)

R430

10k

1.7

3.4

157158159160161162163164165166167168169170171172173174175176177178179180181182183184185186187188189190191192193194195196197198199200201202203204205206207208

CLKI

TESTIn

CRPCLKI

IOVSS10

SDDQ0

SDDQ15

IOVDD10

SDDQ1

SDDQ14

IOVSS09

SDDQ2

SDDQ13

SDDQ3

SDDQ12

IOVDD09

SDDQ4

SDDQ11

SDDQ5

SDDQ10

CVD06

SDDQ6

SDDQ9

SDDQ7

SDDQ8

IOVSS08

SDDQM0O

SDDQM1O

CVS06

SDWEOn

SDCASOn

IOVDD08

SDCLKO

IOVSS07

SDRASOn

SDCKEO

IOVDD07

SDCS0On

SDCS1On

SDAD11O

IOVSS06

SDAD9O

SDAD12O

SDAD10O

SDAD8O

IOVDD06

SDAD0O

SDAD7O

SDAD1O

SDAD6O

CVD05

SDAD2O

SDAD5O

SDAD3O

SDAD4O

CVS05

IOVSS05

B+

JL411

JL412

JL413

JL415

B+

C438

0.01u

ADDT0

ADDT1

ADDT2

ADDT3

C439

0.01u

ADDT4

ADAD11

ADAD10

ADAD0

ADAD1

ADAD2

ADAD3

ADDT5

ADDT6

ADDT7

ADAD11

ADAD10

ADAD0

ADAD1

ADAD2

ADAD3

ADDT0

ADDT1

ADDT2

ADDT3

ADDT4

ADDT5

ADDT6

ADDT7

C440

0.01u

C441

0.01u

C442

0.01u

C443

0.01u

1.8

2.2

3.4

2.0

1.9

1.2

2.0

1.9

2.0

145146 147 148149 150 151152 153 154155 156

3.4

2.0

1.9

2.0

1.1

1.7

1.9

2.0

2.2

1.7

0.1

3.1

2.7

3.4

0.6

2.5

3.4

2.8

3.1

1.6

0.1

3.4

0.1

1.8

0.7

2.1

1.7

1.4

1.6

1.5

105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118 119 120121 122 123124 125 126127 128 129130 131 132133 134 135136 137 138139 140 141142 143 144

ADDT0

ADDT15

C431

0.01u ADDT1

ADDT14

ADDT2

ADDT13

ADDT3

ADDT12

C432

0.01u ADDT4

ADDT11

ADDT5

ADDT10

C433

0.01u ADDT6

ADDT9

ADDT7

ADDT8

R434

10

ADAD11

ADAD9

ADAD10

ADAD8

C436

0.01u ADAD0

ADAD7

ADAD1

ADAD6

C437

0.01u ADAD2

ADAD5

ADAD3

ADAD4

12

HA12

HA13

HA14

HA15

HA16

HA17

HA18

HA19

HA20

HA21

C429

0.01u

C427

0.01u

3.4

1.7

0.8

2.3

2.2

0.5

0.2

0.7

CVD07

CVS04

JL408

HAD12I

I2C_DATA

3.4

HAD13I

IOVDD04

0.9

DVD0

HAD14I

DVO0

HAD15IDVO1

IOVSS11

DVO2

0.4

1.2

DVD1

DVD2

CVS07

HAD18I

HAD19I

HAD16I

HAD17ICVD04

DVO4

DVO5

DVO3

DVO6

1.1

1.7

1.0

C426

0.01u

DVD3

DVD4

DVD5

DVD6

3.4

0.4

3.0

3.4

HAD22I

HAD23I

HAD20I

HAD21I

IOVDD11

BF_ID

NC

D1CLKO

DVO7

IOVSS04

1.5

1.8

JL410

JL409

R419

10

DVD7

R403

10

SCAN_EN

TDI

1.7

TDO SCAN_MODE

0

3.3

TCK MBIST_EN

IOVDD05 PAVSS18G

3.4

0.01u

C430

R426

10k

1.7

3.0

05

MB-107 BOARD

(7/10)

27MCLK

AV DECODER

MB-107 (3/10)

4-17 4-18

MB-107 (MOTOR DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-9 for printed wiring board.

– Ref. No.: MB-107 board; 3,000 series –

DVP-CX875P

MB-107 BOARD (4/10)

NO MARK:PB MODE

A

MB-107 BOARD

(6/10)

B

C

D

E

FDRV+

F

G

MB-107 BOARD

(2/10)

H

I

FDRV-

TDRV+

TDRV-

MDSO

MDPO

LMCTL

+3.3V

SLDA

SLDB

3 151 112

4

5

76

81410

12

139

SIGNAL PATH

SPINDLE SERVO(SPEED AND PHASE)

B+

+5V

GND

R250

100k

0.5% R253

R232

33k

C216

R218

220p

120k

C240

0.033u

B+

R254 100k

56k

0.5%

C246

0.033u

0.5%

R255

56k

C249

0.01u

0.5%

R259

0.001u

10k

0.01u

C258

R261

10k

R262

330

C259

B+

1.7

4.8

3.2

3.4

1.7

4748

R219

120k

R230

33k

C215

R220

100p

150k

R221

150k

R222

56k

R223

56k

SLE

R225

10k

C218

1500p

R233

R226

R229

470k

10k

C214

0.015u

R227 120k

R224

270k

LMP

LMM

R231 680k

C226 220p

R239

33k

C225 100p

R238

C219

0.1u

C220

0.1u

CL202

33k

C228

0.001u

R240

33k

C229

0.001u

R241

33k

R242 220k

R243 470k

1.7 5.2

12345

IN1-

1.7

OUT1

1.7

IN2+

1.7

IN2-

1.7

OUT2

1.7

6

IN3+

49

1.7

IN3-

1.7

OUT3

1.7

IN4+

1.7

IN4-

1.7

OUT4

1112 910 78

1.7

IN5+

C230

4700p

CL201

CL203

CL204

IN1+

IN5-

14

13

1.7 0

1.4

CL205

R252

33k

SVCC

OPIN1-

OPIN1+

OPOUT1

FWD

OUT5

REV

CTL

15 16 17 18 19 20 21

3.4

52

VREF

IC202

FOCUS/TRACKING

COIL DRIVE

SPINDLE/SLED/

LOADING

MOTOR DRIVE

IC202

FAN8034L

SGND

50

C250

0.01u

1.7

OPIN2-

OPIN2+

MUTE34

MUTE12

3.4

40414243444546

OPOUT2

MUTE5

3.4

10.5

3.4

PS

PVCC1

PVCC2

TSD-M

22 23 24

3.4

10.5

5.1

373839

DO1+

DO1-

5.1

DO2+

5.2

DO2-

PGND1

DO3+

32 33 34 35 36

DO3-

31

51

DO4+

30

DO4-

29

DO5+

DO5-

27 28

PGND2

26

DO6+

25

DO6-

C270

0.01u

5.1

5.3

5.1

5.2

3.7

6.5

5.1

B+

C271

16V47u

TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV

SLED SERVO DVD/CD

FOCUS SERVO

SLA+

SLA-

SLB+

SLB-

SPM-

C272

0.1u

R269

10k

SPM+

TRK+

SVC

MB-107 BOARD

(1/10,2/10)

MB-107 BOARD

SPFG

(2/10)

FCS+

FCS-

TRK+

TRK-

SLA+

SLA-

JL247

JL248

SLB+

SLB-

SPM-

SPM+

FCS-

TRK-

FCS+

FCS-

TRK+

TRK-

MB-107 BOARD

SLA+

(1/10)

SLA-

SLB+

SLB-

SPM-

SPM+

LDM+

MB-107 BOARD

(6/10)

LDM-

TSD

MB-107 BOARD

SPMUTE

XDRVMUTE

B+

+11V

M_GND

(2/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(5/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(6/10)

05

MOTOR DRIVE

4-19 4-20

MB-107 (4/10)

DVP-CX875P

MB-107 (SYSTEM CONTROL) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-9 for printed wiring board.

– Ref. No.: MB-107 board; 3,000 series –

MB-107 BOARD (5/10)

A

MB-107 BOARD

(9/10)

MB-105 BOARD

(7/10,8/10)

(4/10)

MB-107 BOARD

XDRVMUTE

XAVDCS2

XAVDCS3

XARPCS

XSDPCS

XKATWT

XAVDWT

MA_MUTE

XAVDIT

XARPIT

XSDPIT

XFRRST

XGAIT

IPSW

DREQ0

DACK0

DREQ1

DACK1

XGACS

XDACS

CPUCK

XLDON

XWRH

+3.3V

XRST

WIDE

+1.8V

GND

SO1

SC1

1234

SDA

SCL

16.5MHz

XRD

BR24C64F-E2

A0

A1

A2

GND

2

X101

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

05

MB-107 BOARD (6/10)

MB-107 BOARD (10/10)

MB-107 BOARD (8/10)

MB-107 BOARD (3/10)

MB-107 BOARD (2/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(2/11,3/10,7/10,8/11,9/10,10/11)

MB-107 BOARD (8/10)

MB-107 BOARD (3/10)

MB-107 BOARD

MB-107 BOARD (3/10)

MB-107 BOARD (6/10)

MB-107 BOARD (3/10)

MB-107 BOARD (2/10)

MB-107 BOARD (3/10)

MB-107 BOARD (10/10)

MB-107 BOARD (9/10)

MB-107 BOARD (10/10)

MB-107 BOARD (1/10)

MB-107 BOARD (9/10)

(2/10,3/10,10/10)

5

NO MARK:PB MODE

D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY P:PAL DVD PLAY

100

N:NTSC DVD PLAY

FL102

100R198

R197

100

C115

SI0

SC0

SO0

0.01u

3300

R123

3.4

P3.3/N0/C0

SI1

SC1

SO1

R112

3.3

100k

SI2

3132

R113

3.3

100k

SO2

DVD/SACD

3334353637383940414243444546

VSS

3.4

XRST

0

WIDE

RGBSEL

R114

3.3

1k

SDA

R115

3.1

1k

SCL

R102

0

10k

XSARST

EUROVY

EXT/DSEL

3.4

MD0

MD1

MD2

3.4

DREQ0

R117

3.4

10k

DACK0

4748495051525354555657585960

3.4

XDRVMUTE

3.4

DREQ1

R118

3.4

10k

DACK1

3.1

XIFCS

VSS

1.7

X1

1.6

X2

JL107

JL131

1.6-2.0

3.4

2.0

3.4

R193

100

R190

100

1

VCC

0 1.1

CKSW1/TSW1

OCSW1/TSW2

CS0X

CS1X

CS2X

3.4

CS5X

CS4X

CS3X

61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68

B+

R177

100

R178

100

R179

100

R151

150

C113

0.01u

10k

R126

3.4

1.5

SC0

SO0

1.7

CS6X

VCCI

3.4

3.5

3.4

2324252627282930

SI0

VCC

INT4

INT5

INT6

INT7

2.2

1.0

3.4

XRD

BRQ

BGRNTX

XWAIT

CS7X

XWRH

3.4

69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82

R125

10k

JL106

C118

0.047u

R181

22

3.4

INT3

MB91307RPFV-G-BND-E1

3.4

2.0

XWRL

10k

R133

100

R183

22

R182

B+ B+ B+

IC101

EEPROM

C102

0.01u

IC101

VCC

WP

SCL

SDA

1

3

B+

R103

0

R101

0

3.4

R105

0

3.3

5678

R188

100

R189

100

R106

1k

FL106

C109 100u

4V

SI2

SO2

R107 22k

C108

0.01u

R176

R111

1k

R180 100

76 16

R173 4700

12k

R166

10k

3300

R139

R153

R150

R156

0

3.4

INT0

INT1

INT2

IC104

SYSTEM CONTROL

IC104

1.7

VSS

VCCI

NMIX

C122

0.01u

3.4

2.0

141516171819202122

AN3

AN2

AN1

AN0

AVSS

X38CS

XFRRST

XDACS

SMUTE

CPUCK

3.4

1.6

3.4

JL129

JL102

R159

10k

100

R195

81410

HAI20

HAI21

HAI19

HAI18

HAI17

C120

0.01u

3.0

0.8

3.4

910111213

AVCC

AVRH

XSACS

48/44.1K

MA_MUTE

XLDON

83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90

0

3.4

0

R163

0.2

0.53.4

JL109

WP

XSRWE

3.4 3.4

12345678

0.4

HA21

HA18

HA20

HA17

HA19

HA22

HD0

HD1

HD2

HD3

HD5

HD4

0.5

0.7

0.5

R187

100

12

FL105

HAI16

HAI15

HAI14

HAI13

HAI12

HAI11

HAI10

HAI9

HAI20

B+B+

C121

0.01u

1

2345789

RB102

HAI16

HAI15

HAI14

HAI13

HAI12

HAI11

HAI10

HAI9

HAI8

HAI7

HAI6

HAI5

HAI4

HAI3

HAI2

HAI1

HAI0

HDI15

HDI14

HDI13

HDI12

HDI11

HDI10

HDI9

HDI8

HDI7

HDI6

10

6

HDI5

HDI4

HDI3

HDI2

HDI1

HDI0

2.2

HA16

VSS

119120

2.3

HA15

2.3

HA14

2.3

HA13

0.8

HA12

2.5

HA11

0.9

HA10

0.8

HA9

0.9

HA8

3.4

VCC

2.5

HA7

0.9

HA6

0.8

HA5

1.6

HA4

1.4

HA3

105106 107 108109 110 111112 113 114115 116 117118

2.0

HA2

1.2

HA1

0.2

HA0

VSS

1.2

HD15

0.7

HD14

0.7

HD13

0.9

HD12

0.8

HD11

HD10

1.4

HD9

1.6

HD8

0.7

HD7

0.4

HD6

91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102103 104

B+

HAI21

R152

10k

R165

10k

HAI19

HAI18

HAI8

HAI7

HAI6

HAI5

HAI4

HAI3

HAI2

FL109

HAI19

HAI18

0.8

HAI8

0.2

HAI7

0.9

HAI6

2.5

HAI5

0.9

HAI4

0.8

HAI3

1.6

HAI2

1.4

HAI1

2.0

1.2

1.6-2.0

HDI0

HDI8

HDI1

HDI9

HDI2

HDI10

HDI3

HDI11

1.0

0.7

1.6

0.7

1.4

0.7

1.1

0.7

0.8

139

B+

XX

IC106

12345678

A15

A14

A13

A12

A11

A10

A9

A8

910111213141516171819202122

A19

A20

WE

RESET

N.C.

WP/ACC

RY/BY

A18

A17

A7

A6

A5

A4

A3

A2

2324

A1

IC107

12345678

N.C.

A18

A17

A7

A6

A5

A4

A3

9101314151617181920

A2

A1

A0

1112

CE

VSS

OE

D0

D8

D1

D9

D2

D10

D3

21

D11

22

ROM

IC107

OTP

DQ15/A-1

D15/A-1

A16

BYTE

VSS

DQ7

DQ14

DQ6

DQ13

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

DQ5

DQ12

DQ4

VCC

DQ11

DQ3

DQ10

DQ2

DQ9

DQ1

DQ8

DQ0

OE

VSS

27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

CE

A0

25 26

HA21

A19

A8

A9

41 42 43 44

A10

A11

A12

A13

37 38 39 40

A14

A15

A16

BYTE

33 34

VSS

D7

D14

D6

D13

D5

D12

D4

VCC

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 35 36

HAI17

HDI15

HDI7

HDI14

HDI6

HDI13

HDI5

HDI12

HDI4

C128

0.01u

HDI11

HDI3

HDI10

HDI2

HDI9

HDI1

HDI8

HDI0

HAI1

HAI21

0.5

HAI20

3.0

HAI9

0.8

HAI10

0.9

HAI11

2.5

HAI12

0.8

HAI13

2.3

HAI14

2.3

HAI15

2.3

HAI16

2.2

HAI17

0.5

R171

3.3

10k

HDI15

1.2

0.7

0.4

0.7

0.5

0.9

0.5

3.4

HDI7

HA5

HDI14

HA4

HDI6

HA3

HDI13

HA2

HDI5

HA1

HDI12

HDI4

HD0

HD1

HD2

HD3

HD4

HD5

HD6

HD7

HA16

HA15

HA14

HA13

0.8

1.6

1.4

2.0

1.2

2.0

0.7

3.4

0.5

0.4

0.7

3.4

2.2

2.3

IC108

1M SRAM

IC108

IDT71V016SA15PH8(SCD2994)

12345678

A4

A3

A2

A1

A0

CS

I/O0

I/O1

9101314151617181920

I/O2

I/O3

VCC10k

1112

GND

I/O4

I/O5

I/O6

I/O7

WE

A15

A14

A13

A12

21

N.C.

22

174

B+B+

0.9

A5

2.5

A6

0.9

A7

1.0

OE

41 42 43 44

2.2

UB

2.0

LB

1.2

I/O15

0.7

I/O14

37 38 39 40

0.7

I/O13

0.9

I/O12

GND

3.4

VCC

33 34

0.8

I/O11

1.1

I/O10

1.4

I/O9

1.6

I/O8

N.C.

0.8

A8

0.9

A9

2.5

A10

0.8

A11

N.C.

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 35 36

183 15 19 201 112

SO2

SI2

R172

1k

HA1 HA2 HA3

HA4 HA5 HA6 HA7

HA8 HA9 HA10 HA11

HA12 HA13 HA14 HA15

HA16

HA6

HA7

HA8

HD15

HD14

HD13

HD12

C130

0.01u

HD11

HD10

HD9

HD8

HA9

HA10

HA11

HA12

HD0 HD1 HD2 HD3

HD4 HD5 HD6 HD7

HD8 HD9 HD10 HD11

HD12 HD13 HD14 HD15

1

4

5

3

2

HAI0 HAI1 HAI2 HAI3

HAI4 HAI5 HAI6 HAI7

HAI8 HAI9 HAI10 HAI11

HAI12 HAI13 HAI14 HAI15

HAI16 HAI17 HAI18 HAI19

HAI20

HAI21

HDI0 HDI1 HDI2 HDI3

HDI4 HDI5 HDI6 HDI7

HDI8 HDI9 HDI10 HDI11

HDI12 HDI13 HDI14 HDI15

MB-107 BOARD

CN104

6P

JL123

TXD

6

JL124

RXD

5

JL125

GND

4

JL126

+3.3V

3

JL127

GND

2

JL128

RF MON

1

RFMON

RB103

100

1

2 4

3

6

5 7

8

RB104

100

1

2 4

3

6

5 7

8

RB105

100

1

2 4

3

6

5 7

8

RB106

100

1

2 4

3

6

5 7

8

RB107

100

1

2 4

3

6

5 7

8

R138

100

R148

100

RB108

100

8

7 5

6

3

4 2

1

RB109

100

8

7 5

6

3

4 2

1

RB110

100

1

2 4

3

6

5 7

8

RB111

100

1

2 4

3

6

5 7

8

(6/10)

MB-107 BOARD

HA0

HA1 HA2 HA3

HA4 HA5 HA6 HA7

HA8 HA9 HA10 HA11

HA12 HA13 HA14 HA15

HA16

HA17 HA18 HA19

HA20

HA21

HA19

HD0 HD1 HD2 HD3

HD4 HD5 HD6 HD7

HD8 HD9 HD10 HD11

HD12 HD13 HD14 HD15

DIAG (JIG)

(1/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(10/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(2/10,3/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(3/10)

MB-107 BOARD (10/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(3/10)

MB-107 BOARD (2/10,3/10,10/10)

• Wavef orm

1 IC104 tf

SYSTEM CONTROL

MB-107 (5/10)

1.7 Vp-p (16.5 MHz)

4-21 4-22

MB-107 (CLOCK GENERATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-9 for printed wiring board.

– Ref. No.: MB-107 board; 3,000 series –

DVP-CX875P

2

31 11

4

5

76

810

9

12

• Waveforms

1 IC103 4

MB-107BOARD (6/10)

DRSW2

CKSW2

DRSW1 CKSW1

TSW3

TSENS

TSW2

DSENS

LDMP

LDSW2 TRMP

LDSW1

TSCTL

TRMM

LDMM

DIMM

DRMM DSADJ

DRMP

LDM-

MB-107 BOARD

LDM+

(4/10)

AI-25 BOARD

CN305

(SEE PAGE 4-35)

MB-107 BOARD (10/10)

AI-25 BOARD

CN303

(SEE PAGE 4-35)

3.5 Vp-p (27 MHz)

2 IC103 8

1.5 Vp-p (27 MHz)

3 IC103 9, 0

DVD: 3.3 Vp-p (24.57 MHz) CD : 3.3 Vp-p (22.58 MHz)

4 IC103 qg

3.2 Vp-p (33.87 MHz)

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

NO MARK:PB MODE

MB-107 BOARD

MB-107 BOARD (1/10,2/10)

MB-107 BOARD

MB-107 BOARD (4/10)

05

*:IMPOSSIBLE TO MEASURE THE VOLTAGE AT THE MARKED POINTS.

512FS2CH

512FSAVD

33MARP

+3.3V

GND

+5V

S+5V

+1.8V

+11V

M_GND

27MAVD

1

5

3

4

2

MB-107 BOARD (3/10)

MB-107 BOARD (9/10)

MB-107 BOARD (3/10)

MB-107 BOARD (2/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(5/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(1/10,2/10,3/10,4/10,

7/10,8/10,10/10)

5/10,

(1/10,4/10)

(2/10,3/10,5/10)

CN101

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

10

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

11

29

29PCN103

3.3V_MNT

XFRRST

IFBSY

XIFCS

SI0

SO0

SC0

GND

DRMP

DSADJ

DRMM

DIMM

LDMM

CM+

TRMM

CM-

TSCTL

LDSW1

TRMP

LDSW2

LDMP

DSENS

TSW2

TSW1

TSW3

CKSW1

DRSW1

CKSW2

DRSW2

10P

SW+3.3V

GND

SW+5V

GND

+1.8V

M_GND

M+11V

B+

R168 0

R167 100

R154 100

R149 0uH

R155 0

R099 0uH

R098 0uH

R097 0uH

R096 0uH

R095 0uH

R093 0uH

R091 0uH

B+

JL138

JL137

JL108

JL130

JL147

JL148

JL117

JL118

JL119

JL120

JL121

JL122

JL116

JL115

JL114

JL113

JL112

JL111

JL110

JL133

JL132

JL134

JL135

JL136

JL139

JL140

JL141

JL142

JL143

JL144

JL145

JL146

DRSW2

CKSW2

DRSW1 CKSW1

TSW3

TSENS

TSW2

DSENS

LDMP

LDSW2 TRMP

LDSW1

TSCTL

TRMM

LDMM

DIMM

DRMM DSADJ

DRMP

B+

R104

R184

FL101

0

B+

R109

2.2

C103 100u

4V

10

C104

0.01u

C105

0.01u

1

3.4

CL101

1.7

JL101

1.7

3.4

R108 1500

*

1.5

C106

C107

22p

12p

X102

27MHz

IC103

PLL

IC103

CY24233ZCT

12345678

VDD

VSS

27-1OUT

27-2OUT

VDD

VSS

XTI

XTO 512-2OUT

33-1OUT

FSEL

33-2OUT

512-1OUT

N.C

1.7

3.4

1.7

3.4

VDD

VSS

1.6

910111213141516

2

R116

10

R144

10

R141

10

B+

L101

B+

10uH

FB104

FL103

B+

C124 100u

6.3V

C123

0.1u

FB105

FB106

C125

47u

FL104

FB107

FB108

C126

4V

47u 16V

FL107

B+

4

R119

R192

R194

22

0

JL102

JL103

JL104

JL105

R120

22

C111

R121

R122

0.01u

10

3

FL108

FB111

FB109

FB110

C127

220u

4V

R170

FB112 0uH

R157

SI0

SO0

SC0

DRMP

DSADJ

DRMM

DIMM

LDMM

TRMM

TSCTL

LDSW1

TRMP

LDSW2

LDMP

DSENS

TSW2

TSENS

TSW3

CKSW1

DRSW1

CKSW2

DRSW2

0uH

100

4-23 4-24

CLOCK GENERATOR

MB-107 (6/10)

DVP-CX875P

MB-107 (I/P CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-9 for printed wiring board.

– Ref. No.: MB-107 board; 3,000 series –

MB-107 BOARD (7/10)

NO MARK:PB MODE

A

(5/10)

XRST

27MCLK

DVD0

DVD1

DVD2

DVD3

DVD4

DVD5

DVD6

DVD7

+3.3V

SDA

SCL

B+

GND

MB-107 BOARD

(5/10)

B

C

MB-107 BOARD

D

MB-107 BOARD

(3/10)

E

F

G

H

I

J

MB-107 BOARD

(6/10)

05

R601

R603

3 151 112

100

0

PO7

PO6

PO5

PO4

PO3

PO2

PO1

PO0

IC601

+2.5V REG

IC601

TK11125CSCL-G

3.4

123

CONT

GND

1.3 2.5

NOISE

C602

0.01u

C601

B+

0.1u

VOUT

C603

0.001u

VIN

4

R612

100

R613

100

C604

47u

4V

C605

0.01u

C606

0.1u

45

C607

47u

4V

C608

0.1u

C609

47u

4V

CL609

3.3

3.4

SDA

OVDD

R619

CSB

OVSS

76

DQ0

DQ1

DQ14

DQ15

22

CL611

SLV

YO4

0.2

2.6

1.3

R622

22

C614

R621

R620

0.1u

3.4

CL613

CL615

CL617

129130131132133134135136137138139140141142

1.5

1.3

1.6

MD1

MD0

OVDD

MD14

MD15

IC602

I/P CONVERTER

CXD9698R

OVDD

YO0

YO1

YO3

YO2

53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67

1.300.3

3.4

81410

DQ4

DQ5

DQ10

DQ11

R626

22

R627

3.4

CL628

1.2

MD3

OVSS

OVDD

CO4

CO3

0.7

3.4

R628

MD11

OVSS

CL629

1.8

0.7

R630

22

R629

CL631

CL633

1.0

1.9

MD5

MD4

MD10

CO6

CO7

CO5

1.3

1.0

IC602

CVSS

R623

OVSS

0

DQ13

22

CL619

1.3

R624

MD13

CO0

DQ2

22

CL621

0.7

0.2

DQ3

DQ12

22

R625

CL623

CL625

1.4

1.7

MD2

MD12

CO1

CO2

0.5

1.0

DQ9

22

R631

CL637

1.3

3.4

114115116117118119120121122123124125126127128

MD9

OVSS

OVDD

FILM

CO9

CO8

68 69 70 71 72

2.4

JL603

R632

DQ6

22

CL638

1.5

MD6

W31F

R633

DQ8

22

CL639

0.8

MD8

OVSS

DQ7

CL640

1.3

2.5

MD7

CVDD

R634

109110111112113

22

C617

0.1u

B+

2.5

CVDD

3.4

OVDD

OVSS

TEST4

TEST3

CL641

3.3

WE

1.8

MCLK

1

IVDD

3.4

OVSS

OVDD

MA11

MA10

OVDD

CVSS

OVSS

OVDD

OVSS

OVDD

MD16

MD17

MD18

MD19

OVDD

CL642

3.1

CAS

CL643

CKE

101 102103 104 105106 107 108

CL644

0.3

RAS

1.7

CL645

0.3

MA9

1.7

CL646

0.3

MA8

CL647

1.7

3.4

IVSS

CL648

1.6

MA7

CL649

0.2

MA0

CL650

1.6

MA6

87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

CL651

0.2

MA1

3.4

CL652

1.5

MA5

CL653

0.3

MA2

CL654

1.6

MA4

CL655

2.0

MA3

3.4

73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86

B+

R639

C618

0

R022

0

A9

A11

A8

A10

A7

A0

A6

A1

0.1u A5

A2

A4

A3

B+

5

C611

47u

C612

4V

0.01u

B+

3.4

12345678

OVDD

CL601

1.5

CLKI

PLL_TEST

3.4

PLL_EN

PI0

PI1

0.9

PI2

1.2

PI3

0.4

910111213141516171819202122

PI4

1.0

PI5

1.7

PI6

1.1

PI7

1.1

PI8

1.8

PI9

NHSI

NVSI

OVSS

IVSS

CVSS

JL601

NVSO

JL602

NHSO

1.8

PO9

1.1

PO8

23

1.1

PO7

242526

1.7

PO6

3.4

OVDD

OVSS

27

1.0

PO5

28

0.4

PO4

29

1.2

PO3

30313233

0.9

PO2

CL602

PO1

CL603

PO0

TSET0

343536

OVSS

3.4

OVDD

B+

2.5

C613

0.01u

R615

75

R617

20k

2.5

0.9

143144

0.9

IVDD

VCOIN

CPOUT

PLL_VDD

PLL_GND

YO9

CLKO

TEST2

TEST1

CVDD

39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52

37 38

1.9

1.3

3.2

3.4

SCL

SRN

OVSS

CVDD

YO7

YO6

YO5

YO8

1.3

R698

R697

12

0

A11

A10

A0

A1

A2

A3

R640

2.2

C619

47u

4V

139

IC603

16M SDRAM

IC603

B+

DQ0

DQ1

DQ2 DQ13

DQ3

DQ4

DQ5

DQ6

DQ7

C621

0.1u

3.4

1.5

1.6

0.7

1.7

3.4

1.8

1.9

1.5

1.3

3.4

3.3

3.1

3.3

1.7

0.2

0.3

2.0

3.4

C620

0.1u

SIGNAL PATH

12345678

910111213141516171819202122

232425

PB

VCC

DQ0

DQ1

VSSQ

DQ2

DQ3

VCCQ

DQ4

DQ5

VSSQ

DQ6

DQ7

VCCQ

DQML

WE

CAS

RAS

CS

A11(BA)

A10/AP

A0

A1

A2

A3

VCC

HY57V161610DTC-7TR

DQ15

DQ14

VSSQ

DQ13

DQ12

VCCQ

DQ11

DQ10

VSSQ

VCCQ

DQMU

VIDEO SIGNAL

VSS

50

2.6

1.3

48 49

47

1.3

1.4

3.4

1.2

43 44 45 46

1.0

1.3

DQ9

0.8

DQ8

3.4

38 39 40 41 42

N.C.

36 37

1.8

CLK

3.4

CKE

34 35

R605

10k

N.C.

33

0.3

A9

0.3

A8

1.6

A7

1.6

A6

29 30 31 32

1.5

A5

1.6

A4

VSS

26 27 28

B+

Y

Y/CHROMACHROMA

• Wavef orm

C622

C623

DQ15

DQ14

DQ12

0.1u DQ11

DQ10

0.1u

DQ9

DQ8

A9

A8

A7

A6

A5

A4

1 IC602 <z/c>

R614

C615

CBCR1

CBCR2

CBCR3

CBCR4

0.01u

CBCR5

CBCR6

CBCR7

CBCR8

CBCR9

R618

0

C610

47u

4V

Y9Y8Y7Y6Y5

Y4Y3Y2Y1Y0

CBCR0

C616

0.01u

1

2

3

MB-107 BOARD

B+

4

5

(8/10)

I/P CONVERTER

MB-107 (7/10)

1.6 Vp-p (66 MHz)

4-25 4-26

MB-107 (VIDEO ENCODER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-9 for printed wiring board.

– Ref. No.: MB-107 board; 3,000 series –

DVP-CX875P

MB-107 BOARD (8/10)

NO MARK:PB MODE

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

1

2

3

4

MB-107 BOARD

H

I

(7/10)

MB-107 BOARD

(5/10)

5

SCL

SDA

3 151 112

C626 100u

6.3V

C624

Y0

Y1

Y2

Y3

Y4

Y5

Y6

Y7

Y8

Y9

CBCR0

CBCR1

CBCR2

SCL

SDA

0.22u

C625

0.22u

C627

0.22u

4

B+

3.4 3.3

12345678910111213141516

VDD_IO

0

P_Y[0]

0.3

P_Y[1]

1.3

P_Y[2]/SCANEN

1.3

P_Y[3]/TESTMODE

0.1

P_Y[4]

1.3

P_Y[5]

2.0

P_Y[6]

1.3

P_Y[7]

2.5

VDD

GND

1.3

P_Y[8]

1.3

P_Y[9]

0

P_C[0]

0.2

P_C[1]

0.5

P_C[2]

B+

1.0

5

PO7

PO6

PO5

PO4

PO3

PO2

PO1

PO0

JL604

1.8

1.9

1.1

1.7

1.0

2.5

0.4

1.2

0.9

JL605

GND_IO

CLKIN_2

S[9]

S[8]

S[7]

S[4]P_C[5]

S[2]

S[0]

S[5]

S[6]

S[3]

S[1]

VDD

GND

3

IC604

VIDEO ENCODER

IC604

ADV7300AKST

7

6

SCLK

SPI_12C_EN

ALSB

3.3

C628 470p

R659

100

P_HSYNC

P_VSYNC

SDA

3.0

SDA

C629

SCL

000

3.0

470p

R6630R664

R661

100

P_BLANK

0.7

0

R665

CBCR5

P_C[3]

P_C[4]

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

3.3

0.7

CBCR3

CBCR4

1.3

CBCR6

P_C[6]

1.0

CBCR7

P_C[7]

1.0

CBCR8

P_C[8]

2.4

CBCR9

P_C[9]

2.5

JL606

JL607

49505152535455565758596061626364

S_VSYNC

S_HSYNC

4

2

5

1.8

CLKIN

RTC/SCRESET/TR

76 16

S_BLANK

RSET1

VREF

COMP1

DAC A

DAC B

DAC C

VAA

GND

DAC D

DAC E

DAC F

COMP2

RSET2

EXT_LF

RESETB

1

R674

C630

3900p

B+

1.3

JL609

1.5

0.5

0.6

2.5

0.5

0.6

1.5

1.2

1.3

3.1

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

680

81410

C634

0.22u

B+

R021

10k

R675

JL608

C633 820p

C631

0.1u

B+B+

1k

RV601

1k

VIDEO

LEVEL ADJ

C636

0.22u

R676

1k

0.1u

C632

C635

0.001u

100u

RV602

1k

COMP-Y

R677

100

3.4

2.5

R678

300

0.5%

IC605

+2.5V REG

IC605

TK11125CSCL-G

CONT

VIN

GND

45

NOISEVOUT

C637

B+

6.3V

C638

0.22u

12

R683

300

0.5%

R681

R679

300

0.5%

0.5% R682

R680

300

0.5%

B+

3.4

123

1.3

C639

0.1u

C640

0.1u

+3.3V

GND

MB-107 BOARD

(6/10)

139

JL610

JL611

JL612

JL613

R609

0

JL614

JL615

JL616

15PCN601

1

Cr/R

2

GND

3

Cb/B

4

GND

5

Y/G

6

GND

7

SY

8

GND

IPSW

9

GND

10

SC

11

GND

12

V

13

GND

14

WIDE

15

SIGNAL PATH

VD-33 BOARD

CN103

(SEE PAGE 4-39)

WIDE

IPSW

MB-107 BOARD

(5/10)

XRST

VIDEO SIGNAL

CHROMA YPBY/CHROMA

05

• Wavef orms

1 IC604 es

3.4 Vp-p (27 MHz)

2 IC604 rs

850 mVp-p (H)

3 IC604 rd

950 mVp-p (H)

4 IC604 rf

1.1 Vp-p (H)

5 IC604 ej

650 mVp-p (H)

6 IC604 ek

650 mVp-p (H)

7 IC604 el

950 mVp-p (H)

VIDEO ENCODER

4-27 4-28

MB-107 (8/10)

DVP-CX875P

MB-107 (AUDIO D/A CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-9 for printed wiring board.

– Ref. No.: MB-107 board; 3,000 series –

• Waveforms

1 IC503 4

DVD: 4.3 Vp-p (48.1 kHz) CD : 4.3 Vp-p (44.1 kHz)

2 IC503 2

DVD: 4.4 Vp-p (3.1 MHz) CD : 4.4 Vp-p (2.9 MHz)

3 IC503 1

31 112

A

MB-107 BOARD (9/10)

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY

D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY P:PAL DVD PLAY N:NTSC DVD PLAY

4

5

76

810

9

12

B

IC503

C

R570

R572

0

R571

0

BCK

MB-107 BOARD (3/10)

D

MB-107 BOARD (5/10)

ACH12

LRCK

XRST

SC1

SO1

2

R573

C539

0.001u

3

1

0.4

D0.4/C1.2

100

1.6

3.3

P3.3/N0/C0

E

AUDIO D/A CONVERTER

12345678

MCLK

BICK

SDTI

LRCK

PDN

CSN

CCLK

CDTI

9

DCLK

10

AK4382AVIC503

DZFL

DZFR

VDD

VSS

AOUTL+

AOUTL-

AOUTR+

AOUTR-

DSDM

DSDRDSDL

JL511

D0/C51.6

20

JL512

D0/C5

19

5

C538 100u

C537

0.47u

B+

10V

R590

10

17 18

2.3

16

2.3

15

2.3

14

2.3

13

12

11

DVD: 3.3 Vp-p (24.57 MHz)

CD: 3.3 Vp-p (22.58 MHz)

MB-107 BOARD (6/10)

GND

13PCN501

GND

13

JL511

SPDIF

12

R560

JL512

11

JL513

JL514

JL515

JL516

JL517

JL518

JL519

JL520

10

9

8

7

6

5

1

4

3

2

A+5V

ART-

N.C.

ART+

MUTE_2CH

ALT+

N.C.

ALT-

P_GND

SPDIF1

MA_MUTE

XDACS

512FS2CH

AV-66 BOARD

CN201

(SEE PAGE 4-43)

MB-107 BOARD (3/10)

MB-107 BOARD (5/10)

MB-1057BOARD (6/10)

R509

0

0uH

F

R587

0

D501

DAP202K-T-146

G

SIGNAL PATH

AUDIO

SIGNAL

H

PB

R569

0

I

05

AUDIO D/A CONVERTER

MB-107 (9/10)

4-29 4-30

MB-107 (NAND FLASH I/F, EXTENSION I/O) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-9 for printed wiring board.

– Ref. No.: MB-107 board; 3,000 series –

DVP-CX875P

31 112

4

5

MB-107 BOARD (10/10)

A

B

C

D

E

NO MARK:PB MODE

HA0

HA1

HA2

HA3

HA4

HA19

C701

0.01u

TRMP

TRMM

TSCTL

DSADJ

DIMM

C705

0.01u

DRMM

DRMP

LDMM

LDMP

B+

0

3.3

0.3

3.3

TSCTL

DSADJ

DIMM

3.4

VDD

NAND FLASH I/F,

3.4

TDO

TRMP

TRMM

adVDD

HD15

HD14

HD13

HD12

HD11

HD10

HD9

HD8

HA19

HA4

HA3

HA2

HA1

HA0

HA1

HA2

HA3

HA4

HA0

1.2

1234567891011121314151617181920

HD15

VSS

0.7

HD14

0.7

HD13

0.9

HD12

0.8

HD11

1.1

HD10

1.4

HD9

1.6

HD8

0.8

HA19

1.6

HA4

VSS

1.4

HA3

2.0

HA2

1.2

HA1 NFBSY

0.2

HA0

3.4

XGAIT

2.6

XWR

1.0

XRD

3.3

XGACS

DRMP

DRMM

IC701

EXTENSION I/O

IC701

CXD9705R

LDMM

3.3

LDMP

JL701

JL702

TESTO0

JL703

TESTO1

JL704

TESTO2

JL705

TESTO3

TESTO4

76

81410

IC702

123456789101516171819202122

VSS

CLE

ALE

XWE

XWP

N.C.

1314

N.C.

I/O0

I/O1

I/O2

I/O3

VSS

64M NAND FLASH

IC702

K9F6408U0C-TCB0T

C713

0.01u

GND

VCCQ

VCC

XCE

XRE

R/B

N.C.

37 38

N.C.

I/O7

I/O6

I/O5

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 35 36 39 40 41 42 43 44

I/O4

24

23

B+

JL706

6162636465666768697071727374757677787980

VSS

TESTI

TESTO5

3.3

EXO0

EXO1

XEXCS

XDACS3

XDACS2

NFTEST

NFWE

NFRE

NFWP

NFALE

NFCLE

NFCE

adVDD

TMS

TRST

JL707

JL708

JL709

C712

0.01u

B+

NFTEST

NFWE

NFRE

NFWP

NFALE

NFCLE

NFCE

NFBSY

0

3.3

VSS

3.3 0 0

3.3

3.4

3.3

JL414

TDI

3.3 0

TCK

VSS

3.3

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

NFCLE

NFALE

NFWE

NFWP

HD8

HD9

HD10

HD11

0 0

3.3

1.6

1.4

1.1

0.8

3.4

3.3

3.3 0

1.2

0.7

0.9

3.4

R712

12

TRMP

B+

NFCE

NFRE

NFBSY

NFTEST

10k

HD15

HD14

HD13

HD12

TRMM

DRMP

DRMM

LDMP

LDMM

TSCTL

DRSW2

LDSW2

DRSW1

DSENS

DSADJ

TSENS

CKSW2

DIMM

CKSW1

TSW2

LDSW1

TSW3

139

TDIKT

NT/PAL

TMS

TCK

TRMP

TRMM

DRMP

DRMM

LDMP

LDMM

TSCTL

DRSW2

LDSW2

DRSW1

DSENS

DSADJ

TSENS

CKSW2

DIMM

CKSW1

TSW2

LDSW1

TSW3

MB-107 BOARD (2/10)

MB-107 BOARD (3/10)

MB-107 BOARD (6/10)

F

G

H

I

MB-107 BOARD (5/10)

05

HD10

HD11

HD12

HD13

HD14

HD15

XRST

WOBBLE

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

0

3.4

R738

10k

C702

0.01u

R714

82k

R718

82k

HD10

HD11

HD12

HD13

HD14

HD15

HD8

HD9

B+ B+

HD8

HD9

1.6

0.1

470p

C703

0

R725

LDSW1

LDSW2

000

0.1

C704 470p

LDSW2

EXI0

10k

R703

10k

R704

EXI1

47k

R722

DSENS

C706

1k

R730

TSENS

3.3

0.01u

TSENS

C707

1k

R732

0

R733

R705

3.3

0.01u

TSW2

100

TSW2

C708

3.3

0.01u

1k

R735

TSW3

C709

0.01u

R736

VDD

3.4

3.400.1

0

XRST

R706

C710

0

0.01u

VPD

82k

R720

CKSW1

LDSW1

CPUCK

VSS

adVDD

CKSW1

0.1

82k

R719

CKSW2

0.2

27k

R717

DRSW1

3.1

27k

R716

DRSW2

C711

0.01u

adVDD

3.4

R721

R731

R734

R713

B+

1k

FL701

0

C714

47u

4V

B+

+3.3V

GND

XFRRST

XRD

XWRH

CPUCK

XGACS

XGAIT

MB-107 BOARD (6/10)

MB-107 BOARD (5/10)

4-31

4-32

NAND FLASH I/F, EXTENSION I/O

MB-107 (10/10)

DVP-CX875P

AI-25 (LOADING/TURN TABLE/DOOR MOTOR DRIVE, INTERFACE) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

– Ref. No.: AI-25 board; 1,000 series –

: Uses unleaded solder.

AI-25 BOARD

A

ET303

C318

B

C

D

E

R323

JL364

JL358

JL362

JL356

JL360

JL357

JL359

JL361

JS309

JL376

JL374

JL378

JL377

JL380

JL375

JL379

JW357

IC302

19

JS302

JS304

JS306

JS308

JL368

JL372

JL370

JL366

JL371

JL373

JR312

JL367

JL369

JW358

JR304

JS310

CN307

C322

CN306

JL363

JL365

JL411

JL384

JL382

JL383

JL381

D301

F

R301

JW371

C302

JW373

JW368

G

R314

R311

C301

C

ET302

Q302

BE

C311

D303

R320

H

I

J

05

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

AI-25 BOARD CN301 E-24

CN302 H-24 CN303 I-17 CN304 C-25 CN305 D-6 CN306 B-6 CN307 D-2 CN308 J-7 CN309 J-10

D301 F-2 D303 H-4

IC301 H-5 IC302 F-3 IC303 H-23

Q301 H-7 Q302 H-4 Q303 D-24 Q304 D-23 Q308 C-6

JW342

JR311

JW349

JL332

JW394

LP302

JW372

JS307

JL330

JS305

C337

JS301

JS303

JL326

JL328

JL335

JL337

JL339

JL341

JL343

JL345

JL347

JL349

JL351

JL353

JW362

IC301

JW367

C304

R334

R332

R333

B

C

E

Q308

JW343

CN305

29

1

C305

JW364

JW344

JL327

28

JL329

JL331

JL333

JL336

JL338

JR305

JL340

JL342

JL344

JL346

JL348

JL350

JL352

JL354

2

JL355

R316

R315

R317

C324

JW335

R313

C

Q301

C303

JL388

JL386

JL385

JL387

R309

R312

BE

JL394

R310

JR310

JL395

JL392

JL390

JL393

CN308

R304

R305

R306

R307

R308

JL391

JL389

JW337

JW340

JW336

JW365

JW321

JW325

JW397

JW396

JW326

JW327

JW328

JL401

JW320

JW334

JW338

JW339

JL397

JL396

JL399

JR303

JL403

JR302

JW318

JW319

JW322

JW399

JW398

JW323

JW324

JW329

JW330

JW331

JR300JR301

JL400

JL404

JL398

JL402

JL406

JL408

CN309

JL409

JW332

C323

JL407

JL405

4-33

LOADING/TURN TABLE/DOOR MOTOR DRIVE, INTERFACE

AI-25

JW316

JW315

JW314

JL320 JL321 JL322 JL323JL324

CN303

10

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

JW300

JL317

CN304

JL410

JL318

JL334

Q303

CN301

1

12

R335

JL312

JW301

C314

C312

LP301

JW395

R336

R326

JL303

JL309

JL315

JL316

JL314

JW317

LP303

JL319

C319

C321

JW303

C

JW313

JW304

L301

C332

C329

JW305

13

Q304

BE

C310

C307

C315

C313

C326

C325

R319

R321

R322

R325

JL301

C317

JL302

JL304

C316

R327

JL305

R328

JL306

R329

JL307

R330

R331

JL308

JW309

C309

JW310

C308

JL313

JW311

CN302

IC303

2

JL325

1

JL310 JL311

LL-12

TK-63

(LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

(RELAY)

ZSSR113M (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

LC-78 (LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR)

LR-17 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

LS-62 (LOADING SENSOR)

CK-118 (DISC SENSOR)

AV-66 (AUDIO AMP)

VD-33 (VIDEO BUFFER)

FR-189 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

CS-58 (CHUCKING SENSOR)

SW-374 (EJECT SWITCH)

DA-32 (DOOR SENSOR)

MB-107

(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) TM-129 (TURN T ABLE MO T OR)

TS-154 (TURN T ABLE SENSOR)

DM-105

AI-25 (LOADING/TURN TABLE/ DOOR MOTOR DRIVE, INTERFACE)

(DOOR MOTOR) FL-128 (FUNCTION SWITCH)

4-34

ET304

C320

R324

R318

C306

ET301

1-685-705-

11

(11)

AI-25 (LOADING/TURN TABLE/DOOR MOTOR DRIVE, INTERFACE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

– Ref. No.: AI-25 board; 1,000 series –

DVP-CX875P

AI-25 BOARD

NO MARK:PB MODE

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

ZSSR113M BOARD

CN201

(SEE PAGE 4-64)

J

K

05

IC301

LOADING/

TURN TABLE MOTOR

DRIVE IC301

LB1648

BA6956AN

UDZSTE-175.1B

TM+

TRMM

IC302

10.7

C301

0.01u

3.3

0.4

3.3

IN1

VZ1

OUT1

VCC1

IN2

OUT2

123 456

3.3

0.4

B+

TM-

TRMP

OUT2

VREF

RNF

123456789

5.1 0 0

R301

3300

D301

DM+

12PCN301

EVER-11V

EVER+11V

EVER+5V

SW+3.3V

PCONT

M+11V

M_GND

SW+5V

JL301

1

JL302

2

GND

3

GND

JL303

4

JL304

5

JL305

6

JL306

7

8

JL307

9

10

JL308

11

JL309

12

14

13

VIN

OUT1

10.7

C302

0.1u

DM-

B-

3 151 112

C303

LM-

0.1u

LDMM

UDZSTE-178.2B

3.3

0.4

10.7

789101112

IN4

VCC2

OUT4

OUT3

IN3

VZ2

3.2

0.4

3.3

LM+

LDMP

FIN

VCC

GND

3.3

10.7

DRMP

Q303

2SD1766-T100-QR

B- SWITCH

-10.7 -10.5

R319

10k

-9.9

C312 100u

C314

25V

0.01u

B+

C307

C310

100u

0.01u

25V

B+

DRMM

RIN

B+

C313 100u

81410

29PCN305

3.3V_MNT

MB-107 BOARD (6/10)

CN103

(SEE PAGE 4-24)

7PCN302

SW-10V

V_MUTE

S_LINK

SW+5V

CSEL2

GND

CSEL1

EVER+11V

GND

A_MUTE

SW-10V

EVER+5V

7PCN304

VD-33 BOARD

CN101

(SEE PAGE 4-39)

AV-66 BOARD

CN202

(SEE PAGE 4-43)

MB-107 BOARD (6/10)

CN101

(SEE PAGE 4-24)

XFRRST

IFBSY

XIFCS

DRMP

DSADJ

DRMM

DIMM

LDMM

TRMM

TSCTL

LDSW1

TRMP

LDSW2

LDMP

DSENS

TSW2

TSW1

TSW3

CKSW1

DRSW1

CKSW2

DRSW2

B+

12

JL326

29

JL327

28

JL328

27

JL329

26

JL330

SI0

25

JL331

SO0

24

JL332

SC0

23

JL333

GND

22

JL335

21

JL336

20

JL337

19

JL338

18

JL339

17

JL340

CM+

16

JL341

15

JL342

CM-

14

JL343

13

JL344

12

JL345

11

JL346

10

JL347

9

JL348

8

JL349

7

JL350

6

JL351

5

JL352

4

JL353

3

JL354

2

JL355

1

B+

B-

DRMP

DRMM

LDMM

TRMM

TRMP

LDMP

3.3V_MNT

B+

B-

XFRRST

XIFBUSY

XIFCS

SI0

SO0

SC0

CM+

CM-

LDSW1

LDSW2

DSENS

TSW2

TSW1

TSW3

CKSW1

DRSW1

CKSW2

DRSW2

R334

R332

4700

C337

R333

10u

470

50V

10.3

0

Q308

UN2212-TX

SWITCH

139

JS301

3.3V_MNT

XFRRST

XIFBUSY

XIFCS

SI0

SO0

SC0

XFRRST

3.3V_MNT

XIFCS

XIFBUSY

SO0

SI0

SC0

CSEL1

CSEL2

DRSW1

TSW3

DRSW2

TSW2

TSW1

CKSW1

DSENS

CKSW2

LDSW2

LDSW1

CM-

CM+

0.60mm

DM-

TM-

DM+

TM+

LM+

LM-

B+

JS302

JS303

JS304

JS305

JS306

JS307

JS308

JS309

B+

JS310

0.60mm

B+

B-

JL356

JL357

JL358

JL359

JL360

JL361

JL362

JL363

JL364

JL365

JL366

JL367

JL368

JL369

JL370

JL371

JL372

JL373

JL374

JL375

JL376

JL377

JL378

JL379

B+

JL380

JL411

B-

JL381

JL382

JL383

JL384

JL385

JL386

JL387

JL388

JL389

JL390

JL391

JL392

JL393

JL394

B-

JL395

JL396

JL397

JL398

JL399

JL400

JL401

JL402

JL403

JL404

JL405

JL406

JL407

JL408

JL409

10PCN306

1

3.3V_MNT

2

XFRRST

3

XIFBUSY

4

XIFCS

5

SI0

6

SO0

7

SC0

8

GND

9

IFRST

10

PCONT

21PCN307

21

XFRRST

20

3.3V_MNT

19

XIFCS

18

XIFBUSY

17

SO0

16

SI0

15

IFRST

14

SC0

13

PCONT

12

GND

11

AMUTE

10

GND

EVER+5V

9

8

SW+5V

7

SW+5V

6

SWGND

5

SW-10V

4

VMUTE

CSEL1

3

2

SLINK

1

CSEL2

11PCN308

11

DM-

10

TM-

9

DM+

8

TM+

7

SW+5V

6

DRSW1

5

TSW3

4

DRSW2

3

GND

2

GND

1

TSW2

15PCN309

15

SW+5V

14

TSW1

13

GND

12

GND

11

DIMM

10

DSPW

9

CKSW1

8

DSENS

7

CKSW2

6

LDSW2

5

LM+

4

LDSW1

3

LM-

2

CM-

1

CM+

DOWN LOAD

(JIG)

FR-189 BOARD

CN103

(SEE PAGE 4-45)

TS-154 BOARD

CN101

(SEE PAGE 4-59)

CK-118 BOARD

CN003

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

4-36

D303

C304

4

22u 25V

0.1

R304

18

R305

18

R306

18

R307

18

R308

18

R309

18

10.7

R310 3300

R313

470

TURN TABLE

CONTROL

UN2212-TX

3.3

R314

R311

2200

1k

R312

270

10.7

2SA1037AK-T146-QR

3.2

R315

1k

Q302

5

Q302

Q301

R317

B+

560

B+

76 16

B+

R316

1k

IC302

DOOR

MOTOR DRIVE

C305

10u 50V

3.3

B+B+

B-

B+

CSEL2

CSEL1

B+

B-

B+

B-

R321

Q304

1800

UN2111-TX

C316

SWITCH

R322

3.2

1800

47u

C317

0.01u

16V

C319

3.4

100u 25V

C321

0.01u

B+

B-

C322

C315

16V

0.01u

C323

0.1u

B+

IC303

+1.8V REG

C325

100u 16V

B+

IC303

BA18BC0FP-E2

IN

123

3.4 1.8

C326

0.1u

B+

GND

OUT

C332

0.1u

C329

22u

25V

JL310

7

JL311

6

JL312

5

JL313

4

JL314

3

JL315

2

JL316

1

JL317

7

JL318

6

5

4

JL319

3

JL334

2

JL410

1

CN303 10P

B+

JL320

10

M+11V

9

M+11V

JL321

8

M_GND

7

M_GND

JL322

6

+1.8V

JL323

5

GND

JL324

4

SW+5V

3

GND

JL325

2

SW+3.3V

1

B+

LOADING/TURN TABLE/DOOR MOTOR DRIVE, INTERFACE

4-35

AI-25

DVP-CX875P

VD-33 (VIDEO BUFFER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

– Ref. No.: VD-33 board; 4,000 series –

: Uses unleaded solder.

JL126

JL114

JW126

JW127

JL111

JL110

JW131

JW132

JW133

2

6

VIDEO OUTPUT

R123

R114

JL118

C113

JL109

JL116

C112

JL125

JL108

1

2

J101

3

R122

R113

R136

CN103

15

1

12

R108

R112

R137

C114

JW124

14

2

JL127

R124

D101

KK

A

B

C

E

Q105

JW123

JL103

JL106

JL104

BE

Q107

JW122

2

4

R115

C

R111

C111

S VIDEO OUTPUT

6

87

JL128

R125

KKAKK

R116

D103

B

E

Q106

L101

JW129

JW130

JL105

JL107

1

2

J103

95

JL129

R126

A

D104

C110

C

2

IC101

C101

13

JW128

1

3

R117

C108

JW121

JL130

R118

10

R127

KK

A

C107

C106

D102

C102

VD-33 BOARD

A

B

C

D

E

F

JL119

JL117

JL115

CN101

1

7

JL113

JL112

JR103

R109

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

Y Cb Cr

C105

JL133

6

5

R121

R130

JW110

JW112

JW109

JW111

4

J102

3

JL132

R129

R120

IC102

118

JR102

JW118

JW113

JW114

R110

C104

JW117

JR101

C103

JW120

JW119

19 36

R119

JW116

R128

JW107

JW115

JL131

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

COMMAND MODE SCAN SELECT

S-LINK 2

2

1

JL158

JL156

FB101 FB102

3

1

2

C109

JW105

J104

KK

S102

12 3 4

JL101 JL102

JL157

R135

D105

A

JL120 JL121

31

LND101

SELECTABLE INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE

S101

12 3 4

JL134 JL135

JL136 JL137

R132R133R134

G

05

VD-33 BOARD CN101 C-1

CN103 D-2 D101 B-3

D102 B-5 D103 B-3 D104 B-4

IC101 E-4 IC102 D-6

Q105 C-3 Q106 C-3 Q107 C-3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

VIDEO BUFFER

VD-33

LP101

11

1-685-706-

(11)

ZSSR113M (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

LC-78 (LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR)

LR-17 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

FR-189 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

CS-58 (CHUCKING SENSOR)

SW-374 (EJECT SWITCH)

DA-32 (DOOR SENSOR)

4-37 4-38

TK-63 (RELAY)

DM-105

(DOOR MOTOR) FL-128 (FUNCTION SWITCH)

LL-12 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

LS-62 (LOADING SENSOR)

CK-118 (DISC SENSOR)

AV-66 (AUDIO AMP)

AI-25 (LOADING/TURN TABLE/ DOOR MOTOR DRIVE,

MB-107

INTERFACE)

(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) TM-129 (TURN T ABLE MO T OR)

TS-154 (TURN T ABLE SENSOR)

VD-33 (VIDEO BUFFER)

DVP-CX875P

VD-33 (VIDEO BUFFER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

– Ref. No.: VD-33 board; 4,000 series –

3 151 112

VD-33 BOARD

NO MARK:PB MODE

A

B

MB-107 BOARD (8/10)

(SEE PAGE 4-28)

C

CN601

15PCN103

WIDE

IPSW

JL103

1

JL104

GND

2

JL105

3

JL106

4

GND

JL107

5

SC

6

GND

JL108

7

8

GND

JL109

9

SY

10

GND

JL110

11

Y

GND

12

JL111

13

Cb

GND

14

JL112

15

Cr

B+ B+

D

B+

E

F

G

7PCN101

SW-10V

V_MUTE

H

05

AI-25 BOARD

CN302

(SEE PAGE 4-35)

S_LINK

SW+5V

CSEL2

CSEL1

GND

B- B-

JL113

7

JL114

6

JL115

5

JL116

4

JL117

CSEL2

3

JL118

2

JL119

CSEL1

1

B+

4

0

Q105

UN2213-TX

Q106

UN2111-TX

R108

10k

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

5

76 16

81410

12

139

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

SIGNAL PATH

VIDEO SIGNAL

CHROMAPBY

IC102

LA73053-TLM-E

123456789101112131415161718

NC

0.5

VIDEO_IN

0.6

DCCNT1

GND

0.6

C_IN C_OUT

5

MUTE1

0.5

Y_IN Y_OUT

1.1

0.5

1.1

0.6 5

0.5

-5

B-

NC(DCCNT2)

NC(GND)

NC

Y_IN(NC) +5V(NC)

DCCNT2

GND

Cb_IN

MUTE2

Cr_IN Cr_OUT

-5V

IC102

VIDEO BUFFER

L79M05TLL-SONY-TL

C103

47u 16V

Q107

5

05

R136

10k

0

Q105-107

WIDE SWITCH

C104

47u 16V

VIDEO_OUT

IC101

-5V REG IC101

GND1IN2OUT

Y_OUT

Cb_OUT

3

NC

NCV

5

+5V

0.6

GND

0.1

NC

0.6

-5

-5V

-5

-5V

NC

5

0.6

GND

0.1

NC

0.1

-5

-5V

19 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 362120

C106

47u 16V

C107

0.1u

C108

0.1u

C110

0.1u

1

2

B-

C105

0.047u

4

3

5

6

B-

R113

R114

R115

R116

R117

R118

R121

R120

R119

R112

68

R137

10k

R122

R123

R124

R125

D101 HZM6.8ZWA1TL 2

1

2

1

D102

HZM6.8ZWA1TL

3

D103 HZM6.8ZWA1TL 1

3

2

1

3

2

D104

HZM6.8ZWA1TL

R126

R127

R130

R129

R128

-5

C101

0.01u

-10.5

C102

47u 16V

R132

1k

B+

B- B-

Y/CHROMA

JL125

0

JL126

0

JL127

0

JL128

0

JL129

0

JL130

0

JL133

0

JL132

0

JL131

R134

R133

1k

CSEL2

CSEL1

1V

1

GND

3

2V

2

1C

4

1CGND

2

8

2C

2CGND

6

9

S1

2YGND

5

2Y

7

1YGND

1

1Y

3

10

S2

J102

3P

6YGND

5Y

4BYGND

3B-Y

2RYGND

1R-Y

FB101 FB102

C109

0.001u

S101

JL134

1 2

JL135

JL136

3

JL137

4

S102

1

JL101

2

JL102

3

JL120

4

JL121

LND101

J101

2P

1VIDEO OUTPUT 2

G

C

Y

G

Y

COMPONENT

b

C

VIDEO OUT

r

C

JL156

A

BR

B

JL157

R135

1k

JL158

5

SELECTABLE

INTERLACE

PROGRESSIVE

6

5

1

COMMAND MODE2

3

6

J103

1 2 3

J104

SCAN SELECT

G

C

Y

G

21

S-LINK

S VIDEO OUTPUT

• Wavef orms

1 IC102 ed

2.4 Vp-p (H)

2 IC102 ea

1.8 Vp-p (H)

4-39

3 IC102 wl

2.0 Vp-p (H)

4 IC102 wf

2.0 Vp-p (H)

5 IC102 ws

1.3 Vp-p (H)

6 IC102 w;

1.3 Vp-p (H)

4-40

VIDEO BUFFER

VD-33

DVP-CX875P

AV-66 (AUDIO AMP) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

– Ref. No.: AV-66 board; 1,000 series –

: Uses unleaded solder.

LL-12

TK-63 (RELAY)

ZSSR113M (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

LC-78 (LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR)

LR-17 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

(LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

LS-62 (LOADING SENSOR)

CK-118 (DISC SENSOR)

AV-66 (AUDIO AMP)

AV-66 BOARD CN201 E-11

CN202 C-12 D201 C-10

D202 B-10 IC201 F-9

IC202 D-7 IC203 A-1

Q201 C-11 Q202 D-11 Q203 B-11 Q204 A-12 Q206 D-10 Q208 C-10 Q210 A-6 Q211 A-7 Q212 C-3

VD-33 (VIDEO BUFFER)

AV-66 BOARD

A

B

C

D

E

F

05

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

DIGITAL

OPTICAL COAXIAL

IC203

13

JL213 JL214 JL215

R245

OUTPUT

C231

JW221

1

2

R240

J201

JL216

R243

Q212

R251

R246

C232

C226

R244

C225

BE

C

R239

R238

R254

Q210

2

R249

C234

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

R233

C

BE

C221

JW224

R231

JW211

JW212

AUDIO OUTPUT

J202

1

R248

C235

C229

JW203

R235

R253

R

L

63

C

Q211

R255

C230 R232

C219

C236

C223 C224

R236

C220

R230

R250

R229

1

BE

JW222

JW223

C222

IC202

58

4

R228

R227

45

R234

R226

R247

R225

C216

C233

C218

C214

C217

R252

R220

R219

R222

R221

R224

R205

R223

JW210

JW213

C207

JW209

JW214

C203

JW205

IC201

R241

Q208

JW215

C213

JW206

BE

C205

R212

R216

JW216

C210

C

C208

C202

C212

C211

D201

JW217

C209

JW207

B

D202

AK

C

Q206

JL212

JL208

E

JW220

Q201

JL211

JL206

JL204

R213

BE

C

R209

BE

C206

C

CN201

2

12

Q203

BE

R204

13

R207

Q202

1

R203

R202

C201

JL219

R208

JL210

JL207

JL203

C

BE

C204

JL217

JL220

Q204

R206

JL201

CN202

6

2

JL218

R201

JL209

JL205

JL202

7

1

1-685-713-

11

(11)

FR-189 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

CS-58 (CHUCKING SENSOR)

SW-374 (EJECT SWITCH)

DA-32 (DOOR SENSOR)

AUDIO AMP

AV-66

DM-105

(DOOR MOTOR) FL-128 (FUNCTION SWITCH)

MB-107

(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) TM-129 (TURN T ABLE MO T OR)

TS-154 (TURN T ABLE SENSOR)

AI-25 (LOADING/TURN TABLE/ DOOR MOTOR DRIVE, INTERFACE)

4-41 4-42

AV-66 (AUDIO AMP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

– Ref. No.: AV-66 board; 1,000 series –

DVP-CX875P

AV-66 BOARD

NO MARK:PB MODE

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

05

D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY

AI-25 BOARD

CN304

(SEE PAGE 4-35)

MB-107 BOARD (9/10)

CN501

(SEE PAGE 4-30)

CN201

7PCN202

EVER+11V

A_MUTE

SW-10V

EVER+5V

13P

GND

MUTE_2CH

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

P_GND

ALT-

ALT+

ART+

ART-

A+5V

SPDIF

GND

Q201

3

C3.2

C202 220u

16V

-10.1

R203

10k

C201

47u 16V

4

C204 330u

6.3V

R204 220k

-9.5

R209

10k

Q202 UN2213-TX MUTE DRIVE

R206

10k

10.9

10.1

R207

100k

-8.8

2SC2712-YG-TE85L

2SB709A-QRS-TX

10.1

R212

10k

C205

1u

50V

D6/ C0.1

IC201

NJM78L05UA-TE1

R208

31 112

B+

JL201

JL217

JL218

B- B-

JL219

JL220

2SB709A-QRS-TX

-10.5

R202

470

D201

DAN202K-T-146

2

1

R201 4700

D0.6/

Q204

2SB710A-RTX

5600

-9.3

-9.5

Q203

Q208

MUTE DRIVE

D9.4/ C10.2

R216

10k

D0/C10.2

R213

47k

5

10.8

D202

1SS355TE-17

D10.1/ C-8.7

Q206

DTC124TKA-T146

MUTE DRIVE

R219

4700

0.5%

R220 4700

0.5%

IC202

AUDIO AMP

B+

IC201

+5V REG

OUT1GND2IN

C203

0.01u

3

10.8

B+

C208

5

C211

47u

0.01u

16V

B+

JL202

13

12

JL203

11

JL204

10

N.C

JL205

9

JL206

8

JL207

7

JL208

6

N.C

JL209

5

JL210

4

3

2

1

JL211

JL212

B+

R221 4700

R222 4700

0.5%

R223

5600

0.5%

76

R224

5600

0.5%

C216

-8.8

C214 180p

R225

2200

C217

560p

180p

1.4

C218 560p

R226 2200

1.4

BA4558F-E2

IC202

5678

1.4

C219 180p

R227 2200

810

R228

2200

R230

5600

C221

0.5%

1234

0

10.8

B+

47u 16V

C223

0.01u

C224

0.01u

C222

47u 16V

R238

R233

470

R235 4700

R231

47k

R232

47k

R234

470

R239

C225

47u 16V

1k

R240

1k

Q210

2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO

MUTE

R236 4700

Q211

2SD1938(F)-T(TX).SO

MUTE

Q212

2SC2712-YG-TE85L

BUFFER

2.4

C220 180p

1.4

0

R229 5600

0.5%

12

139

B+

SIGNAL PATH

AUDIO

SIGNAL

PB

R241

100k

R248

470

R247

B-

B+

5

1.7

R243

220

R244

C226

47u 16V

68

R246

10k

470

R249

470

R250

470

C231

47u 16V

JL213

JL214

JL215

JL216

1GND

2GND

1

1R

3

2

1L

4

2R

6

5

2L

GP1FA550TZ

1

2

3

D IN

VCC

GND

J201

IC203

1P

J202

4P

AUDIO OUTPUT

LR

OPTICAL

DIGITAL OUTPUT

COAXIAL

4-43

4-44

AUDIO AMP

AV-66

DVP-CX875P

FR-189 (INTERFACE CONTROL) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

– Ref. No.: FR-189 board; 1,000 series –

: Uses unleaded solder.

FR-189 BOARD (A SIDE) CN102 A-8

CN103 A-6 D101 B-2 IC101 B-4

IC104 C-4 IC107 D-3

FR-189 BOARD (SIDE A)

A

B

C117

C

D

E

F

G

D101

C114

123

C107

IC104

1

45

IC107

2 34

C122

IC101

5

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

FR-189 BOARD (SIDE B)

CN103

C105

C102

C104

121

CN102

JL110

118

JL104

JL115

JL153

JL109

JL106

JL112

JL116JL117

JL107

JL111

JL113JL114

JL105

JL108

JL103

JL155

JL154

JL120

JL127

JL118

JL121

JL123

JL119

R118

D103

Q106

S106

D103, S106

SURROUND

R114

BE

R115

C

JL101

JL161

JL138

JL137

C111

8

14

B

R102

E

IC103

89

16

1

JL136

7

C109

IC102

1

Q105

R149

R151

R176

C121

R130

R139

C133

R140

C

C126

R170

R161

R165

JL157

R166

R168

R101

JL129

JL124

JL122

JL125

JL128

JL126

JL162

JL131

JL130

C103

D102

R111

S104

D102, D104

PICTURE

MODE

C135

R129

R138

R169

R174

R175

R160

C131

C130

R167

C134

R128

R178

R155

R177

JL147

JL146

JL158

R159

R158

R141

R146

R144

R142

JL132

L101

JL135

JL102

JL163

R136

BZ101

R154

JL160

R145

R143

R147

ND101

R103

Q104

B

E

R104

C101

B

E

JL133

Q103

R107

C110

R108

R131

JL145

C136

R156R157

C125

C124

JL142

R132

JL143

R134

R135

JL144

JL159

24

25

40

789 6 4

C

C108

C106

R110

R171

R125

A

C

K

R172

D108

X101

1

80

IC106

41

D105

10 11

123

D104

D106

D107

Q102

B

E

R105

R173

R106

BE

Q101

C

C115

B

E

B

E

R113

R116

C116

R117

R119

Q108

C

R122

Q109

R123

C

JL156

R127

65

64

C132

R163R164

Q110

B

C

E

R162

JL140

D109

C112

C113

Q107

B

R124

JL139

C

E

C120

D110

C118

C119

S101

I/

R137

JL141

A

B

R126

C

D

E

F

G

FR-189 BOARD (B SIDE) D102 C-6

D103 C-8 D104 A-3 D105 A-3 D106 A-3 D107 B-3 D108 D-4 D109 A-2 D110 B-2 D112 I-2 D113 J-3 D114 H-2

IC102 G-8 IC103 E-8 IC106 F-4

Q101 C-3 Q102 B-3 Q103 B-5 Q104 A-5 Q105 E-8 Q106 E-9 Q107 A-2 Q108 D-3 Q109 D-3 Q110 G-3

H

I

05

INTERFACE CONTROL

FR-189

R179

TH101

R180

1-685-708-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4-45 4-46

47 45 42 631

D114

K

A

C127

K

A

K

FB102

D112

JL148

JL151

R148

SORTEDIT

11

(11)

R152

S105

S107

R150

S103

S108

A

D113

R153

KK

C128

FB101

FOLDERFILE

JL150

C129

J101

KEY BOARD

FB103

JL149

JL152

1-685-708-

123456789

11

(11)

TK-63

H

I

05

LL-12 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

(RELAY)

ZSSR113M (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

LC-78 (LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR)

LR-17 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

LS-62 (LOADING SENSOR)

CK-118 (DISC SENSOR)

AV-66 (AUDIO AMP)

VD-33 (VIDEO BUFFER)

FR-189 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

CS-58 (CHUCKING SENSOR)

SW-374 (EJECT SWITCH)

DA-32 (DOOR SENSOR)

MB-107

(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) TM-129 (TURN T ABLE MO T OR)

TS-154 (TURN T ABLE SENSOR)

DM-105

AI-25 (LOADING/TURN TABLE/ DOOR MOTOR DRIVE, INTERFACE)

(DOOR MOTOR) FL-128 (FUNCTION SWITCH)

DVP-CX875P

FR-189 (INTERFACE CONTROL) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

– Ref. No.: FR-189 board; 1,000 series –

5

FR-189 BOARD

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

NO MARK:PB MODE

FL-128 BOARD

CN401

(SEE PAGE 4-53)

AI-25 BOARD

CN307

(SEE PAGE 4-36)

SML-020MLTT86

/

05

B-

Q103,104

CONVERTER

C101

0.1u

C102

22u 16V

C103

0.1u

18PCN102

21PCN103

3.3V_MNT

LED+5V

L_LOAD

L_DSRC

L_EASY

L_DCHG

ACS_CCW

ACS_CW

JOG_CW

JOG_CCW

XFRRST

XIFBUSY

PCONT

AMUTE

EVER+5V

SW+5V

SWGND

SW-10V

VMUTE

L_FLIP

L_JOG

CSEL1

SLINK

CSEL2

JL103

1

JL104

2

JL105

3

JL106

4

JL107

5

JL108

6

JL109

7

AD3

JL110

8

GND

JL111

9

AD4

JL112

10

JL113

11

JL114

12

AD5

JL115

13

JL116

14

JL117

15

JL153

16

AD6

JL154

17

AD7

JL155

18

AD2

JL118

1

JL119

2

JL120

3

XIFCS

JL121

4

JL122

5

SO0

JL123

6

SI0

JL124

7

IFRST

JL125

8

SC0

JL126

9

JL127

GND

10

JL128

11

JL129

12

GND

JL130

13

JL131

14

15

JL132

16

JL133

17

JL162

18

JL135

19

JL163

20

JL102

21

B+

R106

R105

GRNA

GRNK

4

3

REDA

4

REDK

Q102

UN2213-TX

R173

1k

22k

0

5

Q101

UN2213-TX

470

1

D101

ON/OFF

2

B+

L-LOAD

L-DSRC

L-EASY

L-DCHG

L-FLIP

L-JOG

ACS-CCW

ACS-CW

JOG-CW

JOG-CCW

B+

AD4

AD5

AD6

AD7

AD2

B-

XFRRST

XIFCS

XIFBUSY

SO0

SI0

IFRST

SC0

AMUTE

B-

VMUTE

IC101

REMOTE

COMMANDER

RECEIVER

IC101

GP1UM27SXK

123

3.55

C106

0.1u

C107

47u 16V

R108 100k

R107

47

B+

C105

DC/DC

R104 6800

R103 6800

22u 50V

XIFCS

C109

0.01u

L-JOG

L-FLIP

L-LOAD

L-DSRC

L-EASY

L-DCHG

IC103

LED DRIVE

B+

R116 3300

R117

1k

Q103

2SD1622-S-TD

-10.8 -0.2

-10.5

-10.8

Q104

2SD1622-S-TD

IC102

1234567

5

3 5

4.5

JL136

1

0

2

0

3

3.8

4

3.8

5

3.8

6

3.8

7

0.2

8

C111

0.22u

R111

470

PICTURE MODE

R122

22k

R119

10k

R123

22k

-0.2

GND

VSS

DATA

CLOCK

Q0

Q1

Q2

Q3

Q4

2SB1132-T100-QR

NJM2406F-TE2

1

2

3

IC104

L101 47uH

C108

0.01u

TC74HCT08AF(EL)

IC103

BU2090F-E2

Q105

SWITCH

4.3

0.1

R118

D102

SLR-342DCT32

IC104

IN

G

FIN4OUT

S-LINK

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

76 16

T101

DC/DC

CONVERTER

2

3

4

7

6

55

VDD

3.3 5

4.7

1.5 5

2.2

891011 12 13 14

5

VDD

16

JL137

Q11

15

JL138

Q10

14

JL161

Q9

13

3.8

Q8

12

0.3

Q7

11

JL101

Q6

10

3.8

9

Q5

4.2

Q106

DTC144EKA-T146

SWITCH

D103

SLR-342DCT32

50.7

5

5.31.2

C115

0.01u

B+

R171

47k

DAN202K-T-146

R115

10k

R114

2200

470

SURROUND

AMBERAMBER

V

55

81410

D106

MA113-(TX)

11

MA113-(TX)

1

8

9

10

B+B+

IC102

SC0

LEVEL SHFT

SO0

R102

10k

R172

100

C116

0.001u

2.1

R125

D108

2200

D104

D107

D105

UN2113-TX IR BUFFER

2SB709A-QRS-TX

5

Q109

B-

IR BUFFER

JL139

C112

0.1u

JL140

R127

100

XFRRST

IFRST

Q108

55

12

Q107

2SB1122-ST-TD

-30V REG

-8.5

C113

C114

0.1u

47u

R124

50V

3900

-29.5

D109

MA8300-L-TX

B+

DIG13

-26.8

65666768697071727374757677787980

5

VDD

4.2

LED_CONT

JL156

DIG12

DIG11

DIG10

DIG9

DIG8

DIG7

DIG6

DIG5

DIG4

DIG3

DIG2

DIG1

B+ B+

16MHz

2

D110

MA8062-H-TX

-28.9

C117

DIG14

-26.7

123456789101112131415161718192021222324

X101

3

1

C118

C119

C120

0.1u

R126

22u

10k

50V

SEG1

SEG2

SEG3

DIG16

DIG15

-26.8

-26.4

-28.7

-17.9

-27

GND

XIN

XOUT

IFTEST_MODE

VDD

5

2.1

2.3

JL142

JL143

C136

0.1u

SEG4

-28.7

MODE_SEL

3.3

XFRST

5

SEG5

-13.4

IFRST

100

R132

SEG8

SEG9

SEG7

SEG6

SEG10

-20

-26.1

-24.1

-23.1

-17.1

IC106

IF CON

IC106

TMP86CM74AFG-4F87

SELF_CHECKIRJOG_CCWCSSISOSC

JOG_CW

5555

JL144

JL145

10k

R134

R135

R131

SEG11

-28.7

SEG12

-26.3

4.5 2.2

SEG14

SEG13

-11.1

-28.7

3.3

JL159

JL146

1k

2200

R156

R157

1

JOG-CCW

JOG-CW

B+

R129

120

R128

C121

33

0.01u

BD4740G-TR

JL141

123

C122

10u 16V

IC107

RESET

B+

5

45

R137

4700

R136 4700

BZ101

(BUZZER)

139

SEG15

SEG17

SEG16

SEG18

00

-13.9

-22.5

-24.4

-17.9

JL157

414243444546474849505152535455565758596061626364

LED_D

LED_CK

0.1

4.9

KB_CK

BUZ

AMUTE

CSEL1

555

100

R138

VMUTE

CSEL2

1k

5

R175

JL147

0

R174

10k

2200

R169

R178

C124 220p C125 220p

C134 220p

C135 220p

100

R139

R140

VMUTE

AMUTE

MAZ9120D0LS0-TX/L

KB_DT

5

4.7

JL160

10k

R154

R155

R177

100

R179

R180

PONCHK

ACS_CW

ACS_CCW

STATUS

D112

D113

D114

FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE

ND101

B-

3G

F1

123 6789101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142 454647

2G

5G

DIG1

DIG2

DIG3

DIG4

DIG5

DIG6

B-

R165

10k

R166

10k

R167

22k

R168

22k

-28.9

PCONT

VAREF

VKK

5

GND

5

AD8

5

AD7

5

AD6

5

AD5

5

AD4

5

AD3

5

AD2

2.6 5 5

BUSY

4.9 5

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

0.1

TH101

B+

R147

10k

R142

AD7

10k

R143

AD6

10k

R144

AD5

10k

R145

AD4

10k

R146

AD3

10k

R141

AD2

10k

R158

ACS-CW

10k

R159

ACS-CCW

10k

JL148

JL149

JL150

R161 2200

R160

1k

J101

6

5

34

12

KEY BOARD

JL158

FB101

FB102

6G

AD3

XIFBUSY

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

174

NC

16G

15G

14G

11G

7G

8G

12G

9G

10G

13G

DIG7

DIG8

DIG9

DIG10

DIG11

DIG12

DIG13

DIG14

DIG15

R162

B+

SI0

68k

5

Q110

2SD1622-T-TD

BUFFER

-2.7

C132 220p

S101

/

S103

FILE

S105

EDIT

S107 S104

SORT

S108

FOLDER

-2.7

R164

1k

R163

180

R148 2700

R150 3900

R152

8200

R153

22k

NC

DIG16

PICTURE

SURROUND

P34GP6

NC

P2

P1

SEG1

SEG2

SEG3

MODE

P41GP7

P5

SEG4

SEG5

SEG6

S106

183 15 191 112

SEG10

SEG11

P14

P12

P11

P15

SEG12

P13

SEG13

SEG14

SEG15

SEG16

P18

P16

P17

SEG17

SEG18

F2

P8F1P10

P9

SEG7

SEG8

SEG9

R149

0

R151 2700

R176 3900

• Waveforms

1 IC106 3

JL151

JL152

FB103

4 Vp-p (16 MHz)

4-47

4-48

INTERFACE CONTROL

FR-189

DVP-CX875P

CK-118 (DISC SENSOR), CS-58 (CHUCKING SENSOR), LC-78 (LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR), LS-62 (LOADING SENSOR), LL-12 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L), LR-17 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR R) PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

– Ref. No.: CK-118 board, CS-58 board, LC-78 board, LS-62 board, LL-12 board, LR-17 board; 2,000 series –

: Uses unleaded solder.

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

CK-118 BOARD

A

B

C

JL021

D

JL023

JL025

E

F

JL017

JL019

Q004

C002

BE

R007

C

E

JL022

Q003

JL020

JL024

CN003

JL016

JL018

JL014

JL013

JL012

JL015

Q002

R006

BE

R005

C

PH001

R004

R003

D001

C001

R001

R002

Q001

C

JL007

JL006

JL005

JL004

JL003

BE

JL001

CN001

JL002

G

05

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18

CS-58 BOARD

A

PH261

A

PH262

JL261

42

531

CN261

05

JL010

JL011

JL008

JL009

CN002

C

R262

CN262

K

C

K

JL262

JL263

3

JL265

R261

JL264

1

JL267

11

(11)

1-685-714-

LC-78 BOARD

CN201

JL201

C201

C202

M201

LOADING

MOTOR

1

19 20 2114

1-685-709-

11

(11)

05

JL204

14

JL203

JL202

C203

2

C204

M202

CHUCKING

MOTOR

1

11

(11)

1-685-710-

CK-118 BOARD CN001 F-15

CN002 D-20 CN003 E-1

D001 D-10 Q001 E-14

Q002 D-4 Q003 D-2 Q004 C-2

LS-62 BOARD

CN222

05

LL-12 BOARD

D241

D242

R241

PH222

K

A

C

1

3

JL221

R222

R221

JL225

JL227 JL228

CN221

JL224

42

1

43

CN223

81

JL222

JL223

JL226

K

C

PH221

1-685-711-

A

11

(11)

JL242

JL243

CN241

1

3

JL241

11

(11)

1-685-715-

05

LR-17 BOARD

D281

05

D282

JL282

1-685-716-

LL-12

TK-63

(LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

(RELAY)

ZSSR113M (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

LC-78 (LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR)

R281

JL283

LR-17 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

JL281

CN281

3

1

11

(11)

FR-189 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

CS-58 (CHUCKING SENSOR)

SW-374 (EJECT SWITCH)

DA-32 (DOOR SENSOR)

DM-105

TS-154 (TURN T ABLE SENSOR)

LS-62 (LOADING SENSOR)

CK-118 (DISC SENSOR)

AV-66 (AUDIO AMP)

VD-33 (VIDEO BUFFER)

AI-25 (LOADING/TURN TABLE/ DOOR MOTOR DRIVE,

MB-107

INTERFACE)

(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) TM-129 (TURN T ABLE MO T OR)

(DOOR MOTOR) FL-128 (FUNCTION SWITCH)

4-49

4-50

DISC/CHUCKING/LOADING SENSOR, LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR, LED, LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L/R

CK-118/CS-58/LC-78/LS-62/LL-12/LR-17

DVP-CX875P

CK-118 (DISC SENSOR), CS-58 (CHUCKING SENSOR), LC-78 (LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR), LS-62 (LOADING SENSOR), LL-12 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L), LR-17 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR R) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

– Ref. No.: CK-118 board, CS-58 board, LC-78 board, LS-62 board, LL-12 board, LR-17 board; 2,000 series –

31 112

A

D241

EB3804X-TP-J555K

DISC LIGHT L

R241

3P

CN241

JL243

1

LTL

JL242

2

SW+5V

JL241

220

B+

3

N.C

4

5

3PCN222

SW+5V CKSW2

LS-62 BOARD

1

LTL

N.C

B+

2

JL221

3

76

B

810

CS-58 BOARD

5P

CN223

1

2

GND

3

B+

CKSW1

4

SW+5V

5

LTR

5PCN261

CKSW2

CKSW1

SW+5V

JL261

5

JL262

GND

4

JL263

3

JL264

2

JL267

1

LTR

LL-12 BOARD

8PCN221

C

D

CKSW2

CKSW1

SW+5V

LDSW2

LDSW1

JL222

8

JL223

7

JL224

LT

6

JL225

5

GND

JL226

4

3

GND

JL227

2

JL228

1

PH221

SPI-238-18

LOADING

SENSOR1

R221

390

B+

R222

390

PH222

SPI-238-18

LOADING

SENSOR2

3PCN262

3PCN281

SW+5V

JL265

3

N.C

2

1

LTR

LR-17 BOARD

JL281

N.C

3

JL282

2

JL283

LTR

1

12

PH261

SPI-238-18

SENSOR1

R261

390

B+

R281

B+

220

139

PH262

SPI-238-18

CHUCKINGCHUCKING

SENSOR2

R262

390

D281

EB3804X-TP-J555K

DISC

LIGHT R

E

CK-118 BOARD

NO MARK:PB MODE

8PCN001

F

G

CN002

4P

CKSW2

CKSW1

SW+5V

LDSW2

LDSW1

JL001

JL002

JL003

JL004

JL005

JL006

JL007

JL008

JL009

JL010

JL011

CKSW2

CKSW1

LDSW2

LDSW1

2SC2412K-T-146-QR

LM-

LM+

CM+

CM-

8

7

6

LT

GND

5

4

3

GND

2

1

LM-

2

LM+

3

CM+

4

CM-

H

I

CN201

4P

J

05

LC-78 BOARD

JL201

LM-

1

JL202

LM+

2

JL203

CM+

3

JL204

CM-

4

B+ B+

PH001

TURN TABLE

SENSOR1

LED DRIVE

C201

0.1u

C203

0.1u

Q001

0.1

R002

8200

0.7

C202

0.1u

C204

0.1u

DIMM

1

C001

22u 25V

2

LOADING

MOTOR

1

CHUCKING

MOTOR

2

M201

M202

R003

R004

PH001

390

RPI-352

-0.3

R005

470

180

D001

GL528V1

D001,Q003

DISC

SENSOR

R006

3.3

2SC2412K-

T-146-QR

INVERTER

82k

Q002

PT380F3

Q003

R007 120k

0.6

2SC2412K-T-146-QR

0

Q004

INVERTER

C002 220p

DIMM

CKSW1

CKSW2

LDSW2

LM+

LDSW1

LM-

CM-

CM+

JL012

JL013

JL014

JL015

JL016

JL017

JL018

JL019

JL020

JL021

JL022

JL023

JL024

JL025

DISC/CHUCKING/LOADING SENSOR, LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR, LED, LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L/R

CK-118/CS-58/LC-78/LS-62/LL-12/LR-17

15PCN003

1

SW+5V

2

TSW1

3

GND

4

GND

5

DIMM

6

DSPW

7

CKSW1

8

DSENS

9

CKSW2

10

LDSW2

11

LM+

12

LDSW1

13

LM-

14

CM-

15

CM+

AI-25 BOARD

CN309

(SEE PAGE 4-36)

4-524-51

DVP-CX875P

FL-128 (FUNCTION SWITCH), SW-374 (EJECT SWITCH) PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

– Ref. No.: FL-128 board, SW-374 board; 2,000 series –

: Uses unleaded solder.

SW-374 BOARD

1

CN301

3

JL302

05

S301

2

JL301

EJECT

1-685-722-

FL-128 BOARD CN401 D-1

CN402 C-6 CN403 H-4

D401 B-5 D402 B-3 D403 B-2 D404 F-8 D405 F-7 D406 F-3

11

(11)

FL-128 BOARD

A

B

C

D

CN401

JL408

E

JL406

JL404

17

JL401

JL402

1

18

2

JL407

JR407

JR408

JL409

JL411

JL413

JL415

JL417

D403, S410

FLIP

D403

R418

R417

JR409JR410

JR406

JR411

S410

S415

JR413

JR412

R419

R406

R403

JR415

JR414

JL405

R420

D406

JR424

JL403

D402, S405

LOAD

D402

S405

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

D401, S421

EASY PLAY

S416

R402

D401

S421

S414

JR417

JR426

R401

JR425

JR427

JL420

JR428JR429JR430

CN402

JR431JR432

JR416

DISC CHANGE

D405

D405, S411

R405

JL419

OPEN/CLOSE

R421

R414

D404, S412

DIRECT SEARCH

D404

S419

R422

R423

R404

ZSSR113M (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

LC-78 (LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR)

LR-17 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

FR-189 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

CS-58 (CHUCKING SENSOR)

SW-374 (EJECT SWITCH)

DA-32 (DOOR SENSOR)

TK-63 (RELAY)

DM-105

(DOOR MOTOR) FL-128 (FUNCTION SWITCH)

LL-12 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

LS-62 (LOADING SENSOR)

CK-118 (DISC SENSOR)

AV-66 (AUDIO AMP)

AI-25 (LOADING/TURN TABLE/ DOOR MOTOR DRIVE,

MB-107

INTERFACE)

(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) TM-129 (TURN T ABLE MO T OR)

TS-154 (TURN T ABLE SENSOR)

VD-33 (VIDEO BUFFER)

JL410

JL414

F

JL412

JR401

JL416

JL418

JR402

JR403

JR404

JR405

S417

D406, S417

JOG

S411

S412

R415

JR419

S418

G

C401

C402

H

JL427

S402

JL425

R427

CN403

R407

DISPLAY

JL424

R426

JL422

JL423

JL421

R424

R425

S401

TOP MENU

JL426

ONE/ALL

DISCS

JR423

JR418

S409

JR421

S408

SHUFFLE

R413

JR420

R410

R412

TIME/TEXT

S407

R411

S406

REPEAT

S420

PROGRAM

1-685-721-

11

(11)

JL428

S403

MENU

RETURN

JR422

R408

R409

S404

I

J

4-53

FUNCTION SWITCH, EJECT SWITCH

FL-128/SW-374

05

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4-54

FL-128 (FUNCTION SWITCH), SW-374 (EJECT SWITCH) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

– Ref. No.: FL-128 board, SW-374 board; 2,000 series –

DVP-CX875P

3 151 112

A

FL-128 BOARD

4

5

76 16

81410

12

139

B

LOAD(AMBER)

B+

C

18PCN401

D

FR-189 BOARD

CN102

(SEE PAGE 4-45)

E

L_DSRC

L_DCHG

ACS_CCW

ACS_CW

JOG_CW

JOG_CCW

L_FLIP

LED+5V

L_LOAD

L_EASY

L_JOG

JL401

18

JL402

17

JL403

16

JL404

15

JL405

14

JL406

13

JL407

AD3

12

JL408

GND

11

JL409

AD4

10

JL410

9

JL411

8

JL412

AD5

7

JL413

6

JL414

5

JL415

4

JL416

AD6

3

JL417

AD7

2

JL418

AD2

1

F

FLIP(AMBER)

R403

TOP MENU

DISPLAY

MENU

RETURN

680

D403

SLI-343DCT32

R402

680

D402

S401

S402

S403

S404

SLI-343DCT32

G

EASY PLAY(AMBER)

DIRECT SEARCH(AMBER)

R401

R404

680

470

D404

D401

SLI-343DCT32

SLR-342DCT32

R407 2700

R408 3900

TIME/TEXT

R409 8200

SHUFFLE

ONE/ALL

DISC CHANGE(GREEN)

R405

470

D405

SLR-342MCT31

LOAD

REPEAT

DISCS

JOG(AMBER)

R406

470

D406

SLR-342DCT32

S405

S406

S407

S408

S409

R410 2700

R411 3900

R412 8200

R413

SW-374 BOARD

PUSH

ENTER

3PCN301

JL302

GND

3

JL301

AD5

2

GND

1

S301

EJECT

CN402 3P

1

GND

JL419

2

AD5

JL420

GND

3

S414

R417

S415

2700

OPEN/CLOSE

S410

FLIP

DISC

CHANGE

22k

DIRECT

SEARCH

S411

S412

R414 8200

R415

JOG

22k

C401

C402

0.01u

R418

S416

3900

PROGRAM

R419

S417 S421

8200

EASY PLAY

R420

22k

S418

S419

S420

R421 2700

R422 3900

R423 8200

R425 3900

R426 8200

R427

22k

S418

PUSH

ENTER

DOWN

ENTER

RIGHT

DOWN

LEFT

ENTER

UP

GND

RIGHT

COMMON

JOG_CW

JOG_CCW

9PCN403

JOG SHUTTLE

JL421

9

JL422

8

JL423

7

JL424

UP

JL425

JL426

JL427

JL428

6

5

4

3

2

1

H

05

4-56

FUNCTION SWITCH, EJECT SWITCH

4-55

FL-128/SW-374

DVP-CX875P

TS-154 (TURN TABLE SENSOR), TM-129 (TURN TABLE MOTOR), DA-32 (DOOR SENSOR), DM-105 (DOOR MOTOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARDS

– Ref. No.: TS-154 board, TM-129 board, DA-32 board, DM-105 board; 2,000 series –

: Uses unleaded solder.

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

TS-154 BOARD

CN103

125

6

JL114JL115

DA-32 BOARD

PH162

K

C

JL113

A

JL117

05

JL118

JL116

C101

R104

R105

C

R162

R103

EE

PH101

K

A

PH161

A

C

B

E

R102

Q102

Q101

B

E

C102

R161

C

R101

TM-129 BOARD

JL107

CN102

31

JL110

JL119

C

JL109

2

JL112

C103

JL102

JL101

JL108

JL111

JL105

JL104

2

JL106

10

1-685-717-

JL103

1

11

CN101

(11)

C132

C131

M131

TURN TABLE

MOTOR

05

11

JL132

JL131

2

CN131

13

1-685-718-

11

(11)

DM-105 BOARD

LL-12 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

LS-62 (LOADING SENSOR)

CK-118 (DISC SENSOR)

AV-66 (AUDIO AMP)

VD-33 (VIDEO BUFFER)

M191

(DOOR MOTOR)

JL191

1

2

C191

CN191

C192

JL192

TK-63 (RELAY)

5

6

ZSSR113M (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

LC-78 (LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR)

LR-17 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

JL163

JL161

JL162

JL164

05

2

4

CN161

1-685-720-

1

3

11

(11)

05

4-57

TURN TABLE SENSOR/MOTOR, DOOR SENSOR/MOTOR

TS-154/TM-129/DA-32/DM-105

JL193

JL196

JL194

CN192

1

4

1-685-719-

JL195

(11)

FR-189 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

CS-58 (CHUCKING SENSOR)

SW-374 (EJECT SWITCH)

DA-32 (DOOR SENSOR)

MB-107

(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) TM-129 (TURN T ABLE MO T OR)

TS-154 (TURN T ABLE SENSOR)

DM-105

AI-25 (LOADING/TURN TABLE/ DOOR MOTOR DRIVE, INTERFACE)

(DOOR MOTOR) FL-128 (FUNCTION SWITCH)

11

4-58

TS-154 (TURN TABLE SENSOR), TM-129 (TURN TABLE MOTOR), DA-32 (DOOR SENSOR), DM-105 (DOOR MOTOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

– Ref. No.: TS-154 board, TM-129 board, DA-32 board, DM-105 board; 2,000 series –

DVP-CX875P

3 151 1124

A

TS-154 BOARD

76

NO MARK:PB MODE

B+

B

81410

JL118

6

JL117

B+

JL116

JL115

JL114

JL113

5

4

3

2

1

CN103

DM+

SW+5V

DM-

GND

DRSW1

DRSW2

125

139

DM-105 BOARD

6P

6PCN191

DRSW2

1

DRSW1

SW+5V

GND

DM+

2

3

JL191

DM-

4

5

JL192

6

C191

0.1u

C192

0.1u

M191 DOOR

MOTOR

B+

CN192

CN161

4P

DRSW1

DRSW2

SW+5V

4P

DRSW1

DRSW2

SW+5V

C

D

E

TM-129 BOARD

M131

TURN TABLE

MOTOR

05

1

2

C132

0.1u

C131

CN131

JL131

0.1u JL132

1

2

3

3P

TM+

TM-

AI-25 BOARD

CN308

(SEE PAGE 4-36)

3PCN102

TM+

1

JL101

TM+

2

JL102

TM-

3

B+

11PCN101

SW+5V

DRSW1

DRSW2

DM+

TSW3

GND

TSW2

JL103

1

DM-

JL104

2

TM-

JL105

3

JL106

4

TM+

JL107

5

JL108

6

JL109

7

JL110

8

JL111

9

JL112

10

JL119

11

R101

560

PH101

TURN TABLE

SENSOR2,3

PH101

SPI-237

R103

470

Q102

2SC2412K-T-146-QR

TURN TABLE

SWITCH2

0.7

R104

82k

R102

470

1.5

R105

82k

Q101

2SC2412K-T-146-QR

TURN TABLE

SWITCH1

0.3

3.3

JL193

1

JL194

2

JL195

3

JL196

GND

4

DA-32 BOARD

JL161

1

JL162

2

JL163

3

JL164

GND

4

B+

SPI-235-19-S1

SENSOR1

R162

560

PH162

DOOR

SPI-235-19-S1

SENSOR2

R161

560

PH161

DOOR

4-59

4-60

TURN TABLE SENSOR/MOTOR, DOOR SENSOR/MOTOR

TS-154/TM-129/DA-32/DM-105

DVP-CX875P

ZSSR113M (SWITCHING REGULATOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

– Ref. No.: ZSSR113M board; 1,000 series –

: Uses unleaded solder.

ZSSR113M BOARD

C105

D105

R103

D106

12

CN101

F101

IC101

C112

C109

C106

D107

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

C108

R101

C107

C101

R102

C110

R105

RJ108

D109

L101

D108

PC101

C103

C104

D102

RJ115

C102

RJ114

D104

D103D101

ZSSR113M (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

LC-78 (LOADING/CHUCKING MOTOR)

LR-17 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

FR-189 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

CS-58 (CHUCKING SENSOR)

SW-374 (EJECT SWITCH)

DA-32 (DOOR SENSOR)

TK-63 (RELAY)

DM-105

(DOOR MOTOR) FL-128 (FUNCTION SWITCH)

LL-12 (LOADING GUIDE INDICATOR L)

LS-62 (LOADING SENSOR)

CK-118 (DISC SENSOR)

AV-66 (AUDIO AMP)

MB-107

(SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) TM-129 (TURN T ABLE MO T OR)

TS-154 (TURN T ABLE SENSOR)

VD-33 (VIDEO BUFFER)

AI-25 (LOADING/TURN TABLE/ DOOR MOTOR DRIVE, INTERFACE)

R104

T101

L401

L402

IP301

IP401

D401

G

D

S

R311

RJ101

D203

D202

C201

L201

RJ102

D201

L202

C203

L301

C302

C111

RJ107

D301

C301

C402

L302

D302

Q302

C202

C204

05

R201

L203

G

D

Q201

S

C205

IP201

R202

CN201

RJ103

RJ105

RJ104

RJ106

R308

Q301

B

C

E

C306

R310

RJ110

RJ111

RJ113

RJ112

BCE

Q303

121

RJ109

R301

C401

C403

R401

C303

C308

R305

R307

R313

IP302

R302

R304

C304

R309

IC301

R314

C307

IC302

R312

C309

1-468-695-

11

SWITCHING REGULATOR

ZSSR113M

4-61 4-62

DVP-CX875P

ZSSR113M (SWITCHING REGULATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

– Ref. No.: ZSSR113M board; 1,000 series –

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ZSSR113M BOARD

A

NO MARK: E-E MODE

R103

33k

D105

C105

+

150uF

200V

RD33ESAB2

D106

RD33ESAB2

D107

EG01C

C109

1000p

1kV

C112 100p

1kV

B

IC101

MIP2E4DMY

C106

100pF

1kV

D

S

SWITCH

161.9

C

6.1

D109

RD10ESAB2

C107

0.1uF 50V

R102

100

+

C108 47uF

35V

R105

1/4W

10

C110

+

10uF

C

50V

D108

D1NL20U

R104

4.7

1/4W

T101

L201

D202 RK36

L301

D301 RK13

D302 RK13

C201 470p

1kV

C202

270uF

25V

ERA83006

C301

1000p

1kV

D201

B+

+

D203

HZ188P

C302

1500uF

16V

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

IP201

Q301

POWER

R310

47k

10.7

0.6

1A/125V

R307

100 1/2W

R308

47k

C306

+

10uF

50V

B+

IP301

1.6A/125V

R305

10k

5

R313

100

1/2W

B+

2SK2989

B+ SWITCH

5

Q303

2SC4596

B+ SWITCH

4.1

C307

0.01

2.5

IC302

MM1431

UPC1093J-1

Q302

3.5

L202

B+

Q201

2SJ537

B+ SWITCH

C304

1uF 50V

IC301

MM1431

2.5

10.7

S

R201

100k

R304

4.99k

+

R309

4.7k

R202

10k

0

1

2SC1740

CONTROL

L203

C204

+

C203

33uF

150uF

25V

L302

+

C303

470uF

10V

C205

+

33uF

25V

B+

R301

47

+

R302

1k

4

UPC1093J-1

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

B+

CN201

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

12P

SW+3.3V

SW+5V

M GND

M_GND

M+11V

P-CONT

EVER+5V

EVER+11V

GND

EVER-11V

B+

5

S

R311

100k

R312

390

R314

1k

B+

C308

+

1uF

IP302

2A/125V

C309

+

47uF

16V

B+

B–

AI-25 BOARD

CN301

(SEE PAGE 4-35)

D

05

C402

+

150uF

D401

ERA83006

CN101

2P

F101

2A /250V

1

AC IN

R101

1.5M

1/4W

2

E

C101

0.1uF 250V

23mH

C103 330p 250V

L101

C104

330p

250V

C102

0.1uF 250V

D101-104

RL1N4005-E

C111

1000pF

250V

PC101

PS2561

13

0

5.1

4.1

C401 470p

1kV

L401

25V

B–

L402

C403

33uF

25V

+

R401

100k

IP401

B–

1A/125V

B–

SWITCHING REGULATOR

4-64 E4-63

ZSSR113M

SECTION 5

Pin No. Pin name I/O Function

38 SDA I/O I2C data input/output

39 SCL O I2C clock output

40 XSARST O SACD DEC Reset signal output (Not used in this set)

41 EUROV/Y O VIDEO Select signal output (Not used in this set)

42 DSEL O

Line input/output select signal output

(Not used in this set)

43 MD0 I Input of mode select 0 (fixed at “ H”)

44 MD1 I Input of mode select 1 (fixed at “ L”)

45 MD2 I Input of mode select 2 (fixed at “ L”)

46 DREQ0 I AV DEC DMA –REQ0 input

47 DACK0 O AV DEC DMA –ACK0 output

48 XDRVMUTE O Drive mute signal output

49 DREQ1 I AV DEC DMA –REQ1 input

50 DACK1 O AV DEC DMA –ACK1 output

51 XIFCS O IF CON Chip select signal output

52 VSS - Ground

53 X1 O Clock output (16.5 MHz)

54 X2 I Clock input (16.5 MHz)

55 VCC - Power supply (+3.3 V)

56 CKSW1 I Chuck Sensor input (Not used in this set)

57 OCSW1 I Tray Sensor input (Not used in this set)

58 CS0X O External ROM chip select signal output

59 CS1X O Extranal RAM chip select signal output

60 CS2X O AV DEC Chip select signal output

61 CS3X O AV DEC Chip select signal output

62 CS4X O ARP Chip select signal output

63 CS5X O SDSP Chip select signal output

64 VCCI - Power supply (+1.8 V)

65 CS6X O

NAND FLASH I/F, EXTENSION I/O Chip select

signal output

66 CS7X - Not used

67 XWAIT I Wait signal input

68 BGRNTX I Test terminal (fixed at “H”)

69 BRQ I Test terminal (fixed at “L”)

Pin No. Pin name I/O Function

1-5 HA17-HA21 O Address bus A17-A21

6 HA22 - Not used

7WPOI2C EEPROM write protect output

8 XSACS O

SACD DEC Chip select signal output

(Not used in this set)

9AVCC - Power supply (+3.3 V)

10 AVRH - Reference power supply (+3.3 V)

11 AVSS - Ground

12 AN0 I Set of mode 0

13 AN1 I Set of mode 1

14 AN2 I Set of mode 2

15 AN3 I Set of mode 3 (SCAN SELECT switch input)

16 INT0 I AV DEC Interrupt input

17 INT1 I ARP Interrupt input

18 INT2 I SDSP Interrupt input

19 INT3 I NAND FLASH I/F, EXTENSION I/O Interrupt input

20 INT4 I IF CON Interrupt input

21 INT5 I ADSP Interrupt input

22 INT6 I ADSP Interrupt input

23 INT7 I SACD DEC Interrupt input (Not used in this set)

24 VCC - Power supply (+3.3 V)

25 SI0 I Serial bus 0 (data input)

26 SO0 O Serial bus 0 (data output)

27 SC0 O Serial bus 0 (clock output)

28 SI1 I Serial bus 1 (data input) (Not used in this set)

29 SO1 O Serial bus 1 (data output)

30 SC1 O Serial bus 1 (clock output)

31 SI2 I Serial bus 2 (data input)

32 SO2 O Serial bus 2 (data output)

33 DVD/SACD O DVD/SACD Select signal output (Not used in this set)

34 VSS - Ground

35 XRST O System reset signal output

36 WIDE O WIDE Select signal output

37 RGBSEL O VIDEO Select signal output (Not used in this set)

5-1. SYSTEM CONTROL PIN FUNCTION (MB-107 BOARD IC104)

IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

DVP-CX875P

5-1

Pin No. Pin name I/O Function

70 XRD O Read enable signal output

71 XWRH O High byte write enable signal output

72 XWRL O Lower byte write enable signal output

73 NMIX I Non Maskable Interrupt input (fixed at “H”)

74 VCCI - Power supply (+1.8 V)

75 VSS - Ground

76 XFRRST I IF CON Reset signal input

77 CPUCK O CPU clock signal output

78 SMUTE O SACD mute signal output (Not used in this set)

79 XDACS O DAC (2ch, 6ch) chip select signal output

80 X38CS O ADSP chip select signal ouptut (Not used in this set)

81 48/44.1K O PLL FS control signal output

82 XLDON O Laser diode mute signal output

83 MA_MUTE O Audio mute signal output

84 XSRWE O External RAM write enable signal output

85-92 HD0-HD7 I/O Data bus D0-D7 (16 bit only)

93-100 HD8-HD15 I/O Data bus D8-D15 (16 bit) , D0-D7 (8 bit)

101 VSS - Ground

102-109 HA0-HA7 O Address bus A00-A07

110 VCC - Power supply (+3.3 V)

111-118 HA8-HA15 O Address bus A08-A15

119 VSS - Ground

120 HA16 O Address bus A16

5-2 E

SECTION 6

TEST MODE

DVP-CX875P

6-1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The T est Mode allo ws you to mak e diagnosis and adjustment easily using the remote commander and monitor TV. The instructions, diagnostic results, etc. are given on the on-screen display (OSD).

6-2. STARTING TEST MODE

Press the [TOP MENU], [CLEAR], [POWER] keys on the remote commander in this order with the power of main unit in OFF status, and the Test Mode starts, then “DIAG START” will be displayed on the fluorescent display tube and the menu shown below will be displayed on the TV screen. At the bottom of menu screen, the model name and revision number are displayed. Last Off at the lower right of screen indicates the information code concerning the last power off. To execute each function, select the desired menu and press its number on the remote commander. To exit from the Test Mode, press the [I/ ] key.

Test Mode Menu

0. Syscon Diagnosis

1. Drive Auto Adjustment

2. Drive Manual Operation

3. Mecha Aging

4. Emergency Hisory

5. Version Information

6. Video Level Adjustment Exit: Power Key

_ Model:DPX-16xxxx Revision:x.xxx Last Off: xx

Power Off Information Code List

00 : Primary Power Off 01 : Power Off Request from SYSTEM CONTROL 02 : Power Of f by Emer gency Power Off Command from SYS-

TEM CONTROL

(if information is sent from SYSTEM CONTROL) 03 : IF CON Judged that SYSTEM CONTROL is Faulty 04 : Power Off from Diagnosis Mode of IF CON 05 : Forced Power Off by the User 06 : Power Off by Power Supply Voltage Monitor

1

6-3. SYSCON DIAGNOSIS

The same contents as board detail check by serial interface can be checked from the remote commander. On the T est Mode Menu screen, press [0] key on the remote commander, and the following check menu will be displayed.

### Syscon Diagnosis ###

Check Menu

0. Quit

1. All

2. Version

3. Peripheral

4. Servo

5. Supply

6. AV Decoder

7. Video

8. Audio _

0. Quit

Quit the Syscon Diagnosis and return to the Test Mode Menu.

1. All

All items continuous check This menu checks all diagnostic items continuously. Normally, all items are checked successively one after another automatically unless an error is found, but at a certain item that requires judgment through a visual check to the result, the following screen is displayed for the key entry.

### Syscon Diagnosis ###

Diag All Check

No. 2 Version

2-3. ROM Check Sum Check Sum = xxxx

Press NEXT Key to Continue Press PREV Key to Repeat _

For the ROM Check, the check sum calculated by the Syscon is output, and therefore you must compare it with the specified value for confirmation. Following the message, press > key to go to the next item, or . key to repeat the same check again. T o quit the diagnosis and return to the Check Menu screen, press x or [ENTER] key. If an error occurred, the diagnosis is suspended and the error code is displayed as shown below.

### Syscon Diagnosis ###

3-3. EEPROM Check Error 03: EEPROM Write/Reed N Address : 00000001 Write Data : 2492 Read Data : 2490 Press NEXT Key to Continue Press PREV Key to Repeat _

Press x key to quit the diagnosis, or . key to repeat the same item where an error occurred, or > key to continue the check from the item next to faulty item.

6-1

Submenu

Selecting 2 and subsequent items calls the submenu screen of each item. Indication of “–” in the submenu means the check is not supported with the model. For example, if “5. Supply” is selected, the following submenu will be displayed.

### Syscon Diagnosis ###

Check Menu

No. 5 Supply

0. Quit

1. All

2. ARP Register Check

3. ARP to RAM Data Bus

4. ARP to RAM Address Bus

5. ARP RAM Check _

0. Quit

Quit the submenu and return to the main menu.

(2-6) M’t check

Error 22: region code discord. Accordance between region codes, one is detected with model resistance and destination resistance, and the other is detected with region resistance, is check. If an error is detected, the region code determined with region resistance is displayed at “write data” and the region code determined with model resistance and destination resistance is displayed at “read data”.

3. Peripheral

(3-2) EEPROM Check

Data write → read, and accord check Error 03: EEPROM write/read discord. 0x9249, 0x2942 and 0x4294 are written to the address 0x00 to 0xFF of the EEPROM and then read for checking. Before writing, the data are saved, then after checking, they are written to restore the contents of EEPROM.

(3-3) Gate Array Check

Data write → read, and accord check Error 02: Gate Array write/read discord Data of 0x00 to 0xFF is written sequentialy to the address 0xF and then read for checking.

1. All

All submenu items continuous check. This menu checks 2 and subsequent items successively . At the item where visual check is required for judgment or an error occurred, the checking is suspended and the message is output for key entry . Normally, all items are checked successiv ely one after another automatically unless an error is found. Selecting 2 and subsequent items executes respective menus and outputs the results. For the contents of each submenu, see “General Description of Checking Method” and “Check Items List”.

General Description of Checking Method

2. V ersion

(2-2) Revision

ROM revision number is displayed. Error: Not detected. The revision number defined in the source file of ROM (IC106 or 107) is displayed with four digits.

(2-3) ROM Check Sum

Check sum is calculated. Error: Not detected. 8-bit data are added up to the ROM (IC106 or 107) address 0x000F0000 to 0x002EFFFF, and the result is displayed with 4-digit hexadecimal number. Error is not detected. Compare the result with the specified value.

(2-4) Model Type

Model code is displayed. Error: Not detected. The model code read from the EEPROM is displayed with 2-digit hexadecimal number.

(3-4) NAND FLASH Check

Data delete → write → read, and accord check Error 04: delete error Error 05: write error Error 06: read data discord Error 21: more than ten blocks are defective Deleting, writing and checking read data are executed to the zeroth block of Flash memory. If any detective block is found, the address is displayed. When more than ten blocks are defective, it is considered as an error.

(3-5) ––––––– (not support)

(3-6) VENC Check

Data write → read, and accord check Error 52: Write and read data discord. Accessing to the SYSCON may be defective.

(3-7) ––––––– (not support)

(3-8) EX RAM Check

Test Data write → read, and accord check Error 02: The external RAM used in the system control is checked.

4. Servo

(4-2) Servo DSP Check

Data write → read, and accord check Error 12: Read data discord 0x9249, 0x2942 and 0x4294 are written to the RAM address 0x602 of the Servo DSP and then read for checking. Also, OPT type “1 LASER” or “2 LASER” is displayed.

(2-5) Region

Region code is displayed. Error: Not detected. The region code determined from the model code is displayed.

(4-3) ––––––– (not support)

(4-4) RF Amp (SSI) W/R Check

Date write → read and accord check Error 13: RF Amp resister write, and read data discord. After 0x01 is shifted to register which can read and write RF Amp for 8 bit operation, if write and read data are discord once, the check is performed unsuccessfully.

6-2

There may be a single piece of hardware is defective,

mounted imperfect or not mounted.

5. Supply

(5-2) ARP Register Check

Data write → read, and accord check

Error 08: ARP register write, and read data discord

Data 0x00 to 0xFF is written sequentially to the ARP TMAX

register (address 0xC6) and then read for checking.

(5-3) ARP to RAM Data Bus

Data write → read, and accord check

Error 09: ARP ←→ RAM data bus error

Data 0x0001 to 0x8000 where one bit each is set to 1 are

written to the address 0 of RAM (IC303) connected to the

ARP (IC301) through the bus, then they are read and

checked. In case of discord, written bit pattern and read

data are displayed. If data where multiple bits are 1 are

read, the bits concerned may touch each other. Further, if

data where certain bit is always 1 or 0 regardless of written

data, the line could be disconnected or shorted.

(5-4) ARP to RAM Address Bus

Data write → other address read discord check

Error 10: ARP ←→ RAM address bus error

Caution: Address and data display in case of an error is

different from the display of other diagnosis (de-

scribed later). Before starting the test, all addresses of RAM (IC303) are cleared to 0x0000. First, 0xA55A is written to the address 0x00000, and the address data are read and checked from addresses 0x00001 to 0x80000 while shifting 1 bit each. Next, the data at that address is cleared, and it is written to the address 0x00001, and read and checked in the same manner. This check is repeated up to the address 0x80000 while shifting the address data by 1 bit each. If data other than 0 is read at the addresses except written address, an error is given because all addresses were already cleared to 0. In this check, the error display pattern is different from that of other diagnosis; read data, written address, and read address are displayed in this order. Ho wever, the message uses same template, and accordingly exchange Address and Data when reading. The follo wing display, for example,

(5-5) ARP RAM Check

Data write → read, and accord check Error 11: ARP RAM read data discord The program code data stored in ROM are copied to all areas of RAM (IC303) connected to the ARP (IC301) through the bus, then they are read and checked if they accord. If the detail check was selected initially, the data are written to all areas and read, then the same test is conducted once again with the data where all bits are inverted between 1 and 0. If discord is detected, faulty address, written data, and read data are displayed following the error code 11, and the test is suspended.

6. AV Decoder

(6-2) 1935 RAM

Data write → read, and accord check Error 14: AVD RAM read data discord The program code data stored in ROM (IC106 or 107) are copied to all areas of RAM (IC404, IC405) connected to the AVD (IC403) through the bus, then they are read and checked if they accord. Further, the same test is conducted once again with the data where all bits are inverted between 1 and 0. If discord is detected, faulty address, written data, and read data are displayed following the error code 14, and the test is suspended. During the test, OSD display becomes blank as the OSD area is also checked.

(6-3) 1935 SP

ROM → AVD RAM → Video OUT Error: Not detected. The data including sub picture streams in ROM (IC106 or IC107) are transferred to the RAM (IC404, IC405) in AVD (IC403), and output as video signals from the AVD (IC403). Though OSD display becomes blank, the output of video signals continues until the key is pressed. They are output from all video terminals (Composite, Y/ C, Component) except EURO AV terminal.

### Syscon Diagnosis ###

5-4. ARP to RAM Address Bus Error 10: ARP - RAM Address B Address : 0000A55A Write Data : 00000000 Read Data : 00080000 Press NEXT Key to Continue Press PREV Key to Repeat _

shows the data 0xA55A was read from address 0x00080000 though it was written to the address 0x00000000. This implies that these addresses are in the form of shadow. Also, if the read data is not 0xA55A, another error will be present.

6-3

7. Video

(7-2) Color Bar

AVD color bar command write → Video OUT Error: Not detected. The command is transferred to the AVD, and the color bar signals are output from video terminals. They are output from all video terminals (Composite, Y/C, Component).

Check Items List

2) Version (2-2) Revision (2-3) ROM Check Sum (2-4) Model Type (2-5) Region (2-6) M’t Check

(7-3) Composite Out

AVD color bar command write → Video (Composite, Y/C) OUT Error: Not detected. The command is transferred to the AVD, and the color bar signals are output from video terminals. They are output from all video terminals (Composite, Y/C, Component).

(7-4) Y/C Out

AVD color bar command write → Video (Composite, Y/C) OUT Error: Not detected. The command is transferred to the AVD, and the color bar signals are output from video terminals. They are output from all video terminals (Composite, Y/C, Component).

(7-5) ––––––– (not support)

(7-6) Component Out

AVD color bar command write → Video (Component, Y/ C) OUT Error: Not detected. The command is transferred to the AVD, and the color bar signals are output from video terminals. They are output from all video terminals (Composite, Y/C, Component).

(7-7) ––––––– (not support)

8. Audio

(8-2) ARP → 1935

Error15 : ARP → 1935 video NG

16 : ARP → 1935 audio NG

(8-3) ––––––– (not support)

3) Peripheral (3-2) EEPROM Check (3-3) Gate Array Check (3-4) NAND FLASH Check (3-5) ––––––– (function not support) (3-6) VENC Check (3-7) ––––––– (function not support) (3-8) EX RAM check

4) Servo (4-2) Servo DSP Check (4-3) ––––––– (function not support) (4-4) RF Amp (SSI) W/R Check

5) Supply (5-2) ARP Register Check (5-3) ARP to RAM Data Bus (5-4) ARP to RAM Address Bus (5-5) ARP RAM Check

6) AV Decoder (6-2) 1935 RAM (6-3) 1935 SP

7) Video (7-2) Color Bar (7-3) Composite Out (7-4) Y/C Out (7-5) ––––––– (function not support) (7-6) Component Out (7-7) ––––––– (function not support)

8) Audio (8-2) ARP → 1935 (8-3) ––––––– (function not support) (8-4) Test Tone

(8-4) Test T one

Pink noise output Error: not detected Test tone is output, from only L and R 2 channels of the model without DD output function, and from Ls and Rs of two channels of DD model. After setting all outputs to ON, check for each channel is performed individually by pressing > to switch the output channel.

6-4

Error Codes List

00: Error not detected 01: RAM write/read data discord 02: Gate Array NG 03: EEPROM NG 04: Flash memory clear error 05: Flash memory write error 06: Flash memory read data discord 07: 2725 read data discord 08: ARP register read data discord 09: ARP ←→ RAM data bus error 10: ARP ←→ RAM address bus error 11: ARP RAM read data discord 12: Servo DSP NG 13: RF Amp NG 14: SDRAM NG 15: ARP → 1935 video NG 16: ARP → 1935 audio NG 19: 1901UCODE Download NG 1A:System call error (function not supported) 1B:System call error (parameter error) 1C:System call error (illegal ID number) 20: System call error (time out) 21: more than ten blocks of NAND FLASH memory are detective. 22: Resistance incorrect mounting 52: Video Encoder W/R NG 55: External RAM W/R NG 90: Error occurred 91: User verification NG 92: Diagnosis cancelled

6-5

6-4. DRIVE AUTO ADJUSTMENT

DVD reference disc

Single Layer

HLX-503 (J-6090-069-A) (NTSC) OR HLX-504 (J-6090-088-A) (NTSC)

Dual Layer

HLX-501 (J-6090-071-A) (NTSC) OR HLX-505 (J-6090-089-A) (NTSC)

TEST CD

YEDS-18 (3-702-101-01)

On the T est Mode Menu scr een, press [1] key on the remote commander, and the drive auto adjustment menu will be displayed.

## Drive Auto Adjustment ##

Adjustment Menu

0. ALL

1. DVD-SL

2. CD

3. DVD-DL

4. LCD

Exit: RETURN

Normally, [0] is selected to adjust DVD (single layer), CD, DVD (dual layer) in this order. But, indi vidual items can be adjusted for the case where adjustment is suspended due to an error. In this mode, the adjustment can be made easily through the operation following the message displayed on the screen. Which disc is currently adjusted is displayed on the fluorescent display tube. The disc used for adjustment must be the one specified for adjustment.

1. DVD-SL (single layer)

Select [1], insert DVD single layer disc, and press [ENTER] key, and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM.

DVD Single Layer Disc Adjustment Steps

1. Sled Reset

2. Disc Check Memory SL

3. Set Disc Type SL

4. Spdl Start

5. LD ON

6. Focus Error Check

7. Focus ON 0 with PI Level Musure

8. Auto Track Offset Adjust L0

9. Trv Level Check

10. Tracking ON

11. CLVA ON

12. Sled ON

13. Auto Focus Balance Adjust

14. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust

15. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0

16. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0

17. EQ Boost Adjust

18. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust

19. Auto Track Gain Adjust

20. RF Level Measure

21. Jitter Measure

22. Eep Copy Loop Filter Offset

23. All Servo Stop

0. ALL

You will be asked if EEPROM data are initialized or not, and for this prompt, select

[0] and press the [ENTER] key. First , the servo

setting data in EEPROM, Emergency History and Hour Meter are cleared to initialize. Then, 1. DVD-SL disc, 2. CD disc, and

3. DVD-DL disc are adjusted in this order . Y ou can exit the adjustment by pressing the x button. In adjusting each disc, the mirror time is measured to check the disk type. In the auto adjustment, whether the disc type is correct is not checked unlike conv entional models, and accordingly , take care not to insert a dif ferent type of disc. Three kinds of discs can be set in advance. In this case, set discs in order to the displayed number with following the massage. Every time after adjusting a disc, the disc is replaced and adjustment is continued automatically.

Set Disc Disc slot number 1: DVD-SL Disc slot number 2: CD Disc slot number 3: DVD-DL

6-6

2. CD

Select [2], insert CD disc, and press [ENTER] key, and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM.

3. DVD-DL (dual layer)

Select [3], insert DVD dual layer disc, and press [ENTER] key, and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM.

CD Adjustment Steps

1. Sled Reset

2. Disc Check Memory CD

3. Set Disc Type CD

4. Spdl Start

5. LD ON

6. Focus Error Check

7. Fcs ON 0 with PI Level Mesure

8. Auto Track Offset Adjust L0

9. Trv Level Check

10. Tracking ON

11. CLVA ON

12. Sled ON

13. Auto focus Blance Adjust

14. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust

15. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0

16. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0

17. Eq Boost Adjust

18. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust

19. Auto Track Gain Adjust

20. Copy Adjustment Data to LCD

21. RF Level Measure

22. Jitter Measure

23. All Servo Stop

DVD Dual Layer Disc Adjustment Steps

1. Sled Reset

2. Disc Check Memory DL

3. Set Disc Type DL DVD DL Layer 1 Adjust

4. Spdl Start

5. LD ON

6. Fcs ON 1 with PI Level Mesure

7. Auto Track Offset Adjust L1

8. Tracking ON

9. Clva ON

10. Sled ON

11. Auto Focus Balance Adjust

12. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L1

13. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L1

14. Eq Boost Adjust L1

15. Auto Track Gain Adjust L1

16. Jitter Measure DVD DL Layer 0 Adjust

17. Focus Jump (L1 → L0)

18. Auto Track Offset Adjust L0

19. Tracking ON

20. Clva ON

21. Sled ON

22. Auto Focus Balance Adjust

23. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0

24. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0

25. Eq Boost Adjust L0

26. Auto Track Gain Adjust L0

27. Jitter Measure

28. All Servo Stop

4. LCD (SACD)

No adjustments, because the adjusted data of CD are reflected to LCD disc and the adjusted data of CD and DVD-DL are reflected to SACD (hybrid disc).

6-7

6-5. DRIVE MANUAL OPERATION

0. Disc Check Memory

On the T est Mode Men u screen, select [2], and the manual operation menu will be displayed. For the manual operation, each servo on/off control and adjustment can be executed manually.

## Drive Manual Operation ##

1. Disc type

2. Servo Control

3. Track/Layer Jump

4. Manual Adjustment

5. Auto Adjustment

6. Memory Check

7. 300 CHG MechaControl 1

8. 300 CHG MechaControl 2

0. Disc Check Memory

Operation Menu

Exit: RETURN

In using the manual operation menu, take care of the following points. These commands do not provide protection, thus requiring correct operation. The sector address or time code field is displayed when a disc is loaded.

1. Set correctly the disc type to be used on the Disc Type screen. The disc type must be set after a disc was loaded. The set disc type is cleared when the door is opened.

2. After power ON, if the Drive Manual Operation was selected, first perform “Reset SLED TILT” by opening 1. Disc Type screen.

3. In case of an alarm, immediately press the x button to stop the servo operation, and turn the power OFF.

Basic operation (controllable from front panel or remote commander)

[I/ ] Power OFF

1

x Servo stop

O

[ RETURN] Return to Operation Menu or Test Mode

Menu

> , . Transition between sub modes of menu

[1] to [9], [0] Selection of menu items

Cursor↓/

✫Disc Loading or Eject is needed when operations, select “7. 300

chg Mecha Control 1” (SEE 6-11).

↑

Increase/Decrease in manually adjusted value

Disc Check

1. SL Disc Check

2. CD Disc Check

3. DL Disc Check

0. Reset SLED TILT

On this screen, the mirror time is measured and written to the EEPROM to check the disc type. First, set a DVD SL disc and press [1], then set a CD disc and press [2], and finally set a DVD DL disc and press [3]. The measured mirror time is displayed respectively. The adjustment must be executed more than once after default data were written. From this screen, you can go to another mode by pressing > or

. key, but you cannot enter this mode from another mode.

You can enter this mode from the Operation Menu screen only.

1. Disc Type

Disc Type

1. Disc Type Auto Check

2. DVD SL 12cm

3. DVD DL 12cm

4. CD 12cm

5. LCD 12cm

6. DVD SL 8cm

7. DVD DL 8cm

8. CD 8cm

9. LCD 8cm

0. Reset SLED TILT _ EMG. 00

0. Reset SLED TILT

On this screen, select the disc type. To select the disc type, press the number of the loaded disc. The selected disc type is displayed at the bottom. Selecting [1] automatically selects and displays the disc type. In case of wrong display, retry “Disc Check Memory”. Also, opening the door causes the set disc type to be cleared. In this case, set the disc type again after loading. In performing manual operation, the disc type must be set. Once the disc type has been selected, the sector address or time code display field will appear as shown below. These values are displayed when PLL is locked.

1. Disc Type Auto Check

2. DVD SL 12cm

3. DVD DL 12cm

4. CD 12cm

5. LCD 12cm

6. DVD SL 8cm

7. DVD DL 8cm

8. CD 8cm

9. LCD 8cm

0. Reset SLED TILT SA.------ SI.-- EMG.00

DVD SL 12cm

Disc Type

Display when DVD SL 12cm disc was selected

6-8

1. Disc Type Auto Check

Disc Type

2. DVD SL 12cm

3. DVD DL 12cm

4. CD 12cm

5. LCD 12cm

6. DVD SL 8cm

7. DVD DL 8cm

8. CD 8cm

9. LCD 8cm

0. Reset SLED TILT _ TC. --:--:-- EMG.00 CD 12cm

Display when CD 12cm disc was selected

[0] Reset SLED TILT Reset the Sled and Tilt to initial

position.(This model does not have T ilt device, so reset only the Sled to initial position.)

[3] Focus Search the focus and turn on the focus.

[4] TRK Turn ON/OFF the tracking servo.

[5] Sled Turn ON/OFF the sled servo.

If PLL is not locked (or can not be locked), the sled servo does not be turned ON. (Indication remains as OFF)

[6] CLVA Turn ON/OFF normal servo of spindle

servo.

[7] FCS. Srch Apply same voltage as that of focus

search to the focus drive to check the focus drive system.

→ Sled FWD Move the sled outward. Perform this

operation with the tracking servo turned off.

[1] Disc T ype Auto Judge automatically the loaded disc. As

Check the judged result is displayed at the bot-

tom of screen, make sure that it is correct. If Disc Check Memory menu has not been executed after EEPROM default setting, the disc type cannot be judged. In this case, return to the initial menu and make a check for three types of discs (SL, DL, CD).

[2] to [9] Select the loaded disc. The adjusted

value is written to the address of selected disc. No further entry is necessary if [1] was selected.

2. Servo Control

Servo Control

1. LD Off R. Sled FWD

2. SP Off L. Sled REV

3. Focus Off

4. TRK. Off

5. Sled Off

6. CLVA Off

7. FCS. Srch Off

0. Reset SLED TILT SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00

DVD SL 12 cm

← Sled REV Move the sled inward. Perform this op-

eration with the tracking servo turned off.

3. Track/Layer Jump

Track/Layer Jump

1. 1Tj FWD R.Fj(L1 -> L0)

2. 1Tj REV L.Fj(L0 -> L1)

3. 2Tj FWD U.Lj(L1 -> L0)

4. 2Tj REV D.Lj(L0 -> L1)

5. NTj FWD

6. NTj REV

7. 500Tj FWD

8. 500Tj REV

9. 10k/20k FWD

0. 10k/20k REV SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00

DVD DL 12 cm

On this screen, track jump, etc. can be performed. Only for the DVD-DL, the focus jump and layer jump are displayed in the right field.

[1] 1Tj FWD 1-track jump forward.

[2] 1Tj REV 1-track jump reverse.

[3] 2Tj FWD 2-track jump forward.

[4] 2Tj REV 2-track jump reverse.

On this screen, the servo on/off control necessary for replay is executed. Normally, turn on each servo from 1 sequentially and when CLV A is turned on, the usual trace mode becomes acti v e. In the trace mode, DVD sector address or CD time code is displayed. This is not displayed where the spindle is not locked. The spindle could run overriding the control if the spindle system is faulty or RF is not present. In such a case, do not operate CL VA.

[0] Reset SLED TILT Reset the Sled and Tilt to initial

position.(This model does not have T ilt device, so reset only the Sled to initial position.)

[1] LD Turn ON/OFF the laser.

[2] SP Turn ON/OFF the spindle.

[5] NTj FWD N-track jump forward.

[6] NTj REV N-track jump reverse.

[7] 500Tj FWD Fine search forward.

[8] 500Tj REV Fine search reverse.

[9] 10k/20k FWD Direct search forward.

[0] 10k/20k REV Direct search reverse.

– The following commands are valid for DVD-DL disc only –

→ Fj (L1 → L0) Focus jump forward.

(Trk/Sled Servo OFF)

6-9

← Fj (L0 → L1) Focus jump reverse.

(Trk/Sled Servo OFF)

↑ Lj (L1 → L0) Layer jump forward.

(Trk/Sled Servo ON)

↓Lj (L0 → L1) Layer jump reverse.

(Trk/Sled Servo ON)

4. Manual Adjustment

5. Auto Adjustment

Auto Adjustment

1. Auto TRK. Offset

2. Auto FCS Balance

3. Auto Focus Offset

4. Auto Focus Gain

5. Auto TRK. Gain

6. Auto EQ.

7. Auto L.F. Offset

8. Auto Group Delay

Manual Adjustment:Up/Down

1. TRK. Offset

2. Focus Gain

3. TRK. Gain

4. Focus Offset

5. Focus Balance

6. L.F. Offset

7. Analog FRSW

8. PLL Dac Gain

9. EQ BOOST

0. GD ADJ

_ SA. ------ SI. -- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12cm Jitter FF

On this screen, each item can be adjusted manually. Select the desired number [1] to [0] from the remote commander, and current setting for the selected item will be displayed, then increase or decrease numeric value with ↑key or↓key. This value is stored in the EEPROM. If CLV has been applied, the jitter is displayed for reference for the adjustment.

[1] TRK. Offset Adjusts tracking offset.

[2] Focus Gain Adjusts focus gain.

[3] TRK. Gain Adjusts track gain.

[4] Focus Offset Adjusts focus offset.

[5] Focus Balance Adjusts focus balance.

[6] L.F. Offset Adjusts loop filter offset.

[7] Analog FRSW Sets the shifting switch for analog feed-

back circuit.

[8] PLL Dac Gain Adjusts PLL D/A converter gain.

[9] EQ BOOST Adjusts amount of boost of equalizer.

SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00

DVD SL 12 cm

On this screen, each item can be adjusted automatically . Select the desired number [1] to [8] from the remote commander, and selected item is adjusted automatically.

[1] Auto TRK. Offset Adjusts tracking offset.

[2] Auto Focus Balance Adjusts focus balance.

[3] Auto Focus Offset Adjusts focus offset.

[4] Auto Focus Gain Adjusts focus gain.

[5] Auto TRK. Gain Adjusts track gain.

[6] Auto EQ

[7] Auto L.F. Offset Adjusts loop filter offset.

[8] Auto Group Delay

6. Memory Check

Display images are shown as follows, and all three screens are able to switch.

EEPROM Data 1 -– DL -–

CD LCD SL L0 L1 Focus Gain xx xx xx xx xx TRK. Gain xx xx xx xx xx FCS Balance xx xx xx xx xx Focus Bias xx xx xx xx xx TRV. Offset xx xx xx xx xx L.F. Offset xx xx xx xx xx EQ. Boost xx xx xx xx xx

[0] GD ADJ Adjusts amount of group delay

_ UP : Last Data DOWN : Next Data CLEAR : Default Setpage.1/3

EEPROM Data 2 -– DL -–

CD LCD SL L0 L1 RF Jitter xx -- xx xx xx RF Level xx -- xx -- -FE Level xx -- xx -- -FE Balance xx -- xx -- -TRV.Level xx -- xx -- -TE Gain xx xx -- -- -PI Level xx -- xx xx --

_ UP : Prev Data DOWN : Next Data CLEAR : Default Setpage.2/3

6-10

EEPROM Data 3 -– DL -–

CD LCD SL L0 L1 Analog FRSW xx xx xx xx xx PLL Dac Gain xx xx xx xx xx Mirror Time xx xx xx xx xx

THR A&L: xx xx xx/xx xx xx

[DOWN] : Chucks the MD block.

Chuck

[RIGHT] :Moves the disc from the un-chucked state

Loading (Front) to the T. table then to the MD block.

[LEFT] :Moves the disc from the un-chucked state

Unloading (Front) to the MD block then to the T . table.

_ UP : Prev Data DOWN : First Data CLEAR : Default Setpage.3/3

On this screen, current servo adjusted data stored in the EEPROM are displayed. The adjusted data are initialized by pressing the

[CLEAR] key, but be careful that they are not recoverable after

initialization. Before clearing the adjusted data, make a note of the set data. This screen will also appear if [0] All is selected in the Drive Auto Adjustment. In this case, default setting cannot be made. Data of “THR A & L” on page 3/3 can not be changed if default set is done.

7. 300 CHG MechaCon Menu 1

On this test mode screen, selecting [7] enables the adjustment from the front control panel such as disc loading. The following screen appears.

Display when [7] is selected in the Drive Manual Operation

## 300 CHG MechaCon Menu 1 ## ENTER : Mecha Initial PLAY : Disc Load (Front) STOP : Disc UnLoad (Front) OP/CL : Door Open/Close UP : Unchuck (Front) DOWN : Chuck RIGHT : Loading (Front) LEFT : UnLoading (Front) jog FOR: Table R Step Turn jog PRV: Table L Step Turn _ RETURN : Exit

[ENTER] : Performs initialization of mechanism.

Mecha Initial Because the mechanical initialization is per -

formed when the machine enters the Drive Manual Operation mode, use this item when an error such as adjustment error occurs.

[PLAY] : Loads the disc from the chucking position of

Disc Load (Front) the T. table toward inside the MD.

When the Disc Load is selected, a series of operation starting from Unchucking – Loading – Chucking is performed.

[STOP] :Moves the disc from inside the MD to the T .

Disc Unload (Front) table.

When the Disc Unload is selected, a series of operation starting from Unchucking – Unloading – Chucking is performed.

[jog FOR] :Moves the T. table to the right in units of

Table R step Turn the slit.

The T. table number is incremented in the direction of positive (+) number.

[jog PRV] :Moves the T. table to the left in units of the

Table L step Turn slit.

The T. ta ble number is decremented in the direction of negative (–) number.

[RETURN] : Returns to the Operation Menu.

Exit

8. 300 CHG MechaCon Menu 2

On this test mode screen, selecting [8] enables the adjustment from the rear panel such as disc loading. The following screen appears.

Display when [8] is selected in the Drive Manual Operation

## 300 CHG MechaCon Menu 2 ## ENTER : Mecha Initial PLAY : Disc Load (Rear) STOP : Disc UnLoad (Rear) OP/CL : Door Open/Close UP : UnChuck (Rear) DOWN : Chuck RIGHT : Loading (Rear) LEFT : UnLoading (Rear) DISP : Mecha Adjust PAUSE : TT Offset Debug _ RETURN : Exit

Insertion and rejection of discs are performed from the rear panel. All operations are the same as those of the 300 CHG MechaCon Menu 1 except [DISP] and [PAUSE].

[DISP] : When this item is selected, the machine enters

Mecha Adjust the adjustment mode of the disc existence/

non-existence sensor. T he follo wing scr een appears.

[PAUSE] :When this item is selected, load to the T.

TT Offset Debug table is measured by changing the value of

the PWM control to the motor. Never attempt to enter this mode. When this mode is selected, the machine needs to perform the Mecha Initial.

[OP/CL] : Opens and closes the door.

Door Open/Close

[UP] : Un-chucks the MD block.

Un-chuck

6-11

Display when the Mecha Adjust is selected in the 300 CHG Mecha Con Menu 2

## Mecha Adjust Mode ##

RIGHT : Disc Sensor Adjust LEFT : TurnTable Adjust

TurnTable Data : xx Sensor sensiv : xx Sensor Posi RP : xx Sensor Posi RM : xx Sensor Posi LP : xx Sensor Posi LM : xx _

RETURN : Exit

Turn Table Data : Indicates the center position of the slit.

(Width of one slit = 24 pulses). The default value is 12.

[LEFT] : Determines the detection position of the T.

table by counting the number of slit’s tooth of the T. table when the T. table is turned counterclockwise by a full rotation.

Display when Turn Table Adjust Mode is selected in Mecha Adjust Mode.

## Turn Table Adjust Mode ##

JOGFWD : Right 1 Step JOGPRV : Left 1 Step DMSFWD : Right 2 Step DMSPRV : Left 2 Step ENTER : ENTER -> Exit

STEP : 12

Sensor Sensiv : Indicates sensitivity of the disc sensor. The

normal value is ranging form 0 to 15.

Sensor Posi RP : These are not the important values.

Sensor Posi RM : They indicate the position of the disc sensor Sensor Posi LP when the disc sensor monitors the disc when Sensor Posi LM rotating the T. ta ble. Rx indicates the value

when the T. ta ble is rotated clockwise and Lx indicates the value when the T. table is rotated counterclockwise.

[RIGHT] : Enters the sensitivity adjustment mode of

the disc sensor.

[LEFT] : Adjusts finely the center position of the slit

in units of plus using the jog dial.

Display when Disc Sensor Adjust is selected in the 300 CHG Mecha Con Menu 2

## Sensor Adjust Mode ##

DOWN : Sensitivity Adjust RIGHT : Position Adjust R LEFT : Position Adjust L

RETURN : Exit

Performs the fine adjustment of the slit position of the T. table using the Jog dial and the DMS (disc selection dial).

✫After this operation, perform Disc Sensor Adjust (SEE 6-12).

[JOGFWD] :Moves the T . table to the right by one pulse.

STEP +

[JOGPRV] :Moves the T. table to the left by one pulse.

STEP –

[DMSFWD] :Moves the T . table to the right by two pulses.

STEP ++

[DMSPRV] :Moves the T. table to the left by two pulses.

STEP – –

[ENTER] : Determines the adjustment values and the

set value.

STEP : When the T . table is adjusted using the above

commands, the adjustment position during each adjustment item is displayed. The initial value is set to 12.

RETURN : Exit

Before this operation, perform Turn Table Adjust (SEE 6-12) or Mecha Initial (SEE 6-11). You must perform 3 operations for Sensor Adjustment.

[DOWN] → [RIGHT] → [LEFT]

→

or LEFT → RIGHT

[DOWN] :Performs the sensitivity adjustment of the

disc sensor by turning T. table for a full rotation.

[RIGHT] : Determines the detection position of the T.

table by counting the number of slit’s tooth of the T. table when the T. table is turned clockwise by a full rotation.

Display when

[PAUSE] is selected in the 300 CHG MechaCon

Menu 2

## Turn Table Offset Debug ##

No | On | off

1| xx | xx 2| xx | xx 3| xx | xx 4| xx | xx

5| xx | xx PLAY : Slow Turn (No.5) STOP : Turn Stop PAUSE : Change PWM _ RETURN : Exit

[PLAY] :Moves the T. table slowly.

[STOP] : Stops movement of the T. table.

[PAUSE] : Sets the PWM value in the order starting

from NO → On→ Off.

6-12

This mode is prepared for measurement of the load to the T. table as described before. Result of the measurement is not reflected on adjustment. After this mode is selected, Mecha Initial must be performed.

6-8. VERSION INFORMATION

## Version Information ##

IF con. Ver:x.xxx(xxxx)

Group xx

6-6. MECHA AGING

When [3] is selected on this test mode screen, the machine enters the mechanical aging mode. The following screen appears. Do not use this mode.

### Mecha Aging ###

1. Please Select Aging Mode

2. All Mecha : Random Aging Move

3. All Mecha : +1 Move

4. All Mecha : -1 Move

5. All Mecha : 1 Disc Front

6. All Mecha : 1 Disc Rear

7. TurnTable : Random Move

8. TurnTable : Half Move

9. Door Open/Close

Exit: RETURN

6-7. EMERGENCY HISTORY

### EMG. History ###

Laser Hours CD xxh xxm

DVD xxh xxm

1. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

SYScon. Ver:x.xxx(xxxx)

Model xx Region 0x

Servo DSP Ver: x.xxx AVD ucode Ver: xxxxxxxx OPT TYPE : x LASER

Exit: RETURN

The ROM version, region code, OPT type, etc. are displayed if

[5] is selected in the Test Mode Men u.

The parenthesized hexadecimal number in the version number field indicates the checksum value of the ROM.

Note : After down loading ROM data, sometimes it happens that

checksum is not the same as that of ROM data which has been down loaded. In such a case, go back to the menu and select “0. Syscon Diagnosis”, then select “1. All” in “2. Version”. If the result of this operation does not give an agreement, it must be either Down Load error or ROM error.

6-9. VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [6] displays color bars for video level adjustment. During display of color bars, OSD disappears but the menu screen will be restored if pressing any key.

2. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

_ Select: 1-9 Scroll: UP/DOWN (1:Last EMG.) Exit: RETURN

On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [4] displays the information such as servo emergency history. The history information from last 1 up to 10 can be scrolled with ↑key or↓key. Also, specific information can be displayed by directly entering that number with ten keys.

The upper two lines display the laser ON total hours. Data below minutes are omitted.

Clearing History Information

Clearing laser hours Press [DISPLAY] and [CLEAR] keys in this order. Both CD and DVD data are cleared. Clearing emergency history Press [TOP MENU] and [CLEAR] keys in this order. Initializing set up data Press [MENU] and [CLEAR] keys in this order. The data have been initialized when “Set Up Initialized” message is displayed. The EMG. History screen will be restored soon.

6-13

6-10. IF CON SELF DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION

1. FR-189 BOARD (IF CON) TEST MODE

The front board test mode is the IF CON self diagnostic mode. The IF CON can diagnose the functions of the front panel boards that the IF CON controls. Normally, the IF CON makes a serial communication with the SYSTEM CONTROL and operates following the commands from the SYSTEM CONTROL, but in the Test mode, the IF CON operates independently from the SYSTEM CONTROL.

In the Test mode, the following functions can be checked.

1. Button function

2. Remote commander receiving function

3. SYSTEM CONTROL-IF CON serial communication

4. Click shuttle function

5. Fluorescent display tube lighting check Grid check Anode check

6. LED control function

In the Test mode, the set operates same as usual, except voltage monitoring, communication monitoring, display of fluorescent display tube, and LED control.

1. The routine that monitors +3.3 V (P-CONT) of MB-107 board is not provided.

2. The monitoring timer for serial communication with the SYSTEM CONTROL is not provided. The set is not placed in the Standby mode, even if the communication with SYSTEM CONTROL is normal.

3. Display of fluorescent display tube (normally, display is made following the commands from SYSTEM CONTROL)

4. LED control (normally, control is made following the commands from SYSTEM CONTROL)

2. OPERATION OF SELF CHECK MODE

The Self Check mode is the function to conduct the basic test to the FL display and DVD panel section.

2-1. Self Check Mode Transition Processing

At the A C Po wer ON after IF CON (IC106) w as reset, the input to 10pin (SELF CHECK) is judged and if “Low” is entered, the main unit transits to the Self Check mode. In this port input judgment, the result of 3-time attempts must be same (assuming that the MB107 board is not connected). While pressing the x key on the main unit with the IF CON in STANDBY mode, enter

O

[ RETURN] → [DISPLAY] (or [SET UP]) on the remote com-

mander, and the unit transits to the Self Check Mode. The Self Check mode terminates when the IF CON transits to the ST ANDBY mode.

6-14

2-2. Operation of Auto Self Check

OGRESSIVE

ALL DISCS

SHUFFLE

VIDEO

UDIO

MP 3

REPEA

PGM A- B

Digital

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PROGRESSIVE

VCD

ALL DISCS SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1

PGM A- B

Digital

;

DVD

CD

SACD

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PROGRESSIVE

VCD

ALL DISCS SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1

PGM A- B

Digital

;

DVD

CD

SACD

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PROGRESSIVE

VCD

ALL DISCS SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1 PGM A- B

Digital

;

DVD

CD

SACD

When the Self Check mode becomes active at the AC Power ON or by key input, the test display of the following steps (1) to (4) is repeated. (1) FLD and LED all ON (for 5 seconds)

TITLE

AUDIO VIDEO

SACD

TRACK

CHAP

VCD

DVD

CD

GROUP

(2) MODEL display (for 2 seconds)

(3) Version display (for 2 seconds)

PRPROGRESSIVE

ALL DISCS

;

Digital

INDEX

MP 3

SHUFFLE REPEA

T 1

PGM A- B

HOUR

MULTI

MIN

ANGLE

NTSC

DISC

SEC

(4) ROM creation date display (for 2 seconds)

6-15

2-3. Each Self Check Function

OGRESSIVE

ALL DISCS

SHUFFLE

VIDEO

UDIO

MP 3

REPEA

PGM A- B

Digital

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PROGRESSIVE

VCD

ALL DISCS SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1 PGM A- B

Digital

;

DVD

CD

SACD

Each Self Check function tests the FLD display , LED display , and key input.

Input Voltage [V]

0 – 0.2 TOP MENU

0.6 – 0.82 DISPLAY SURROUND DOWN

1.16 – 1.47 MENU FLIP ENTER PROGRAM TIME/TEXT PAUSE EDIT

1.8 – 2.12 RETURN

2.48 – 2.7 –

3.3 –––––––

2-3-1. FLD and LED All ON 2-3-1-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode

x key and A key on the main unit

•

• ← key on the main unit and the remote commander

2-3-1-2. Operation and Display

In this mode, all LEDs except STANDBY LED and all segments of FLD turn ON. Example of FLD all ON

Pin ea (AD2) Pin es (AD3) Pin ed (AD4) Pin ef (AD5) Pin eg (AD6) Pin eh (AD7) Pin ej (AD8)

PICTURE

MODE

DISC

CHANGE

DIRECT

SEARCH

IC106: Pin No. (Signal)

LEFT EJECT LOAD PLAY POWER

OPEN/CLOSE

UP EASY PLAY SHUFFLE JOG SORT

RIGHT –

REPEAT STOP FILE

ONE/ALL DISCS

ACS ENTER FOLDER

TITLE

AUDIO VIDEO

SACD

TRACK

CHAP

VCD

DVD

CD

GROUP

2-3-2. Main Unit Key Name Displa y and Key Code Display 2-3-2-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode

•Keys on main unit except keys transited in self check

2-3-2-2. Operation and Display

When a key on the main unit is pressed in the Self Check mode, the name of that key is displayed on the FLD. Also, the key name display and the key code display can be switched with the

PRPROGRESSIVE

ALL DISCS

;

Digital

INDEX

MP 3

SHUFFLE

REPEA

PGM A- B

HOUR

[DISPLAY] key on the remote commander. “NOTHING” is dis-

played when nothing is entered. Also, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD segments turn on when a communication error occurred.

FLD display (at input of H key on the main unit)

T 1

MULTI

MIN

ANGLE

NTSC DISC

SEC

6-16

TITLE

GROUP

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PROGRESSIVE

VCD

ALL DISCS SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1 PGM A- B

Digital

;

DVD

CD

SACD

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PROGRESSIVE

VCD

ALL DISCS SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1 PGM A- B

Digital

;

DVD

CD

SACD

Key code display (at input of H key, Key code: 0Ah)

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PROGRESSIVE

VCD

ALL DISCS

SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1 PGM A- B

Digital

;

DVD

CD

SACD

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PROGRESSIVE

ALL DISCS SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1

PGM A- B

Digital

;

DVD

CD

SACD

At input of faulty voltage

When two keys are pressed

2-3-3. Remote Commander Key Name Display and Key

Code Display

2-3-3-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode

• Remote commander keys except keys transited in self check

2-3-3-2. Operation and Display

When a key on the remote commander is pressed in the Self Check mode, the name of that key is displayed on the FLD. Also, the key name display and the key code display can be switched with the

[DISPLAY] key on the remote commander. “NOTHING” is dis-

played when nothing is entered. Also, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD segments turn on when a communication error occurred.

Remote commander key name display (at input of X key)

VCD

6-17

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PROGRESSIVE

ALL DISCS SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1 PGM A- B

Digital

;

SACD

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PROGRESSIVE

ALL DISCS SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1 PGM A- B

Digital

;

SACD

Remote commander key code display (at input of X key, Key code: 39h)

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

SEC

PROGRESSIVE

VCD

ALL DISCS SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1

PGM A- B

Digital

;

DVD

CD

SACD

2-3-4. Communication Monitoring Display

The communication state is monitored and displayed while the key name on the main unit and the remote commander is displayed. When the communication to the System Controller failed, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD segments turn on.

Communication error display (at no key input)

VCD

DVD

CD

Communication error display (at code display without input of the remote commander)

VCD

DVD

CD

6-18

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PROGRESSIVE

VCD

ALL DISCS SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1 PGM A- B

Digital

;

DVD

SACD

2-3-5. FLD Anode Test Display and SHUTTLE Click

PROGRESSIVE

VCD

ALL DISCS SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT PGM A- B

Digital

;

DVD

CD

SACD

Operation Test

2-3-5-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode

• → on the main unit and the remote commander

• SHUTTLE on the remote commander during Anode Test display (This model does not provide JOG/SHUTTLE, and therefore use another DVD remote commander having the JOG/ SHUTTLE)

2-3-5-2. Operation and Display

The Self Check mode transits to this mode when → key is entered. Only the first segment of each grid of FLD turns on, and each time the SHUTTLE is entered, the segment of each grid is switched in order. When SHUTTLE input is clockwise, the segment switches in 1 → 2 → 3 direction, or counterclockwise it switches in 3 → 2 → 1 direction. This tests whether each segment turns on individually.

Display at the start of Anode Test

CD

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

↓ (Input in CW direction)

INDEX

CHAP

HOUR

MULTI

1

ANGLE

MIN

NTSC

DISC

SEC

6-19

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

PROGRESSIVE

VCD

ALL DISCS

SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1 PGM A- B

Digital

;

DVD

CD

SACD

2-3-6. FLD Grid Test Display and SHUTTLE Click

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

OGRESSIVE

ALL DISCS

SHUFFLE

UDIO

REPEA PGM A- B

Digital

MP 3

VIDEO

Operation Test

2-3-6-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode

• ↑on the main unit and the remote commander

• SHUTTLE on the remote commander during Grid Test display (This model does not provide JOG/SHUTTLE, and therefore use another DVD remote commander having the JOG/ SHUTTLE)

2-3-6-2. Operation and Display

The Self Check mode transits to this mode when ↑ key is entered. The first grid of FLD all turns on and other grids turn off. Each time the SHUTTLE is entered, the grid is switched in order. When SHUTTLE input is clockwise, the grid switches in 1 → 2 → 3 direction, or counterclockwise it switches in 3 → 2 → 1 direc- tion. This tests whether each grid turns on individually.

Display at the start of Grid Test

VCD

DVD

CD

2-3-7. LED Test Display 2-3-7-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode

•

↓ on the main unit and the remote commander

• SHUTTLE on the remote commander during LED Test display (This model does not provide JOG/SHUTTLE, and therefore use another DVD remote commander having the JOG/ SHUTTLE)

AUDIO

VIDEO

SACD

PRPROGRESSIVE

ALL DISCS

;

Digital

MP 3

↓ (Input in CW direction)

SHUFFLE REPEA

PGM A- B

T 1

SEC

2-3-7-2. Operation and Display

LED is switched in order by the input of JOG/SHUTTLE. Also, LED ON/OFF is switched by the input of same key as the function that turns on the LED concerned.

6-20

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PROGRESSIVE

VCD

ALL DISCS SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1

PGM A- B

Digital

;

DVD

CD

SACD

FLD display during LED Test

GROUP

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

DISC

MULTI

INDEX

ANGLE

NTSC

HOUR

MIN

SEC

PROGRESSIVE

VCD

ALL DISCS SHUFFLE

VIDEO

AUDIO

MP 3

REPEAT 1

PGM A- B

Digital

;

DVD

CD

SACD

2-3-8. ACS Test Display 2-3-8-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode

• [PREV NEXT] dial on the main unit

2-3-8-2. Operation and Display

The self check mode is transited by pressing [PREV NEXT] dial. When [PREV NEXT] is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise, the displayed pattern is switched depending on the direction that the dial is rotated.

Display at the start of ACS Test

./>

2-3-9. Dimmer Test Mode 2-3-9-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode

• ./> dial on the main unit

2-3-9-2. Operation and Display

The self check mode transits to the dimmer test mode when ./

> dial is pres se d more than 2 seconds. The indication is switched

as follows when ./> dial is rotated.

(bright) t (dark)

[Mode 0]

2-3-10. Beep Sound Test 2-3-10-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode

• Input of a key on main unit

2-3-10-2. Operation and Display

In the Self Check mode, each time a key on the main unit is entered, a beep sound of 1kHz (100ms) is generated.

t

[Mode 1]

t

[Mode 2]

t

[Mode 3]

t

[Mode 4]

t

[Mode 5]

t

[Mode 6]

t (OFF)

6-21

Sony DVPCX-875-P Service manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SERVICE NOTE

GENERAL

DISASSEMBLY

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

TEST MODE